Dear Customer,

We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing the Fiat New 500.
We have written this handbook to help you get familiar with all the features of your car.
Here you will find information, advice and important warnings regarding use of your car and how to achieve the best
performance from the technical features of your Fiat New 500.
You are advised to read it right through before taking to the road for the first time, to become familiar with the controls; at the
same time, you can understand the car behaviour on different road surfaces.
This document contains specifications, special procedures and essential information for caring for and maintaining your Fiat
New 500 over time, driving it safely and running it correctly.
After reading it, you are advised to keep the handbook inside the car, for an easy reference and for making sure it remains on
board the car should it be sold.
In the attached Warranty Booklet you will also find a description of the Services that Fiat offers to its customers, the Warranty
Certificate and the detail of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity.
We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate your new car and the service provided by the people at
Fiat.
Enjoy reading. Happy driving!
ATTENTION
All the versions of the Fiat New 500 are described in this Owner Handbook. Options, equipment dedicated to
specific markets or versions are not explicitly indicated in the text: as a consequence, you should only consider the
information which is related to the trim level, motor and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the production of the model, outside the specific request of options at the time of purchase, will be
identified with the wording (where provided). All data contained in this publication are purely indicative. FCA Italy
S.p.A. can modify the specifications of the car model described in this publication at any time, for technical or
marketing purposes. For further information, contact a Fiat Dealership.
ESSENTIAL INFORMATION!
STARTING THE ENGINE
With the transmission in position P (Park), when the ignition device is brought to the ENGINE position, an acoustic warning
is emitted and the message "READY" appears on the instrument panel display to indicate that the electric traction system of
the the New 500 has started. The New 500 is now ready to go.
ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
If, after buying the car, you decide to add electrical accessories (with the risk of gradually draining the 12V battery), contact a
Fiat Dealership. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the car's electric system can support the
required load.
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct maintenance of the car is essential for ensuring that it maintains its performance and its safety features, its
environmental friendliness and low running costs for a long time to come.
USE OF THE OWNER HANDBOOK
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Each time an instruction is given that concerns direction (left/right or forward/backward), it is written to be read from the
perspective of an occupant in the driver's seat. If a direction is written from a different perspective, it will be specified as such in
the text as appropriate.
The figures in the Owner Handbook are provided by way of example only: this might imply that some details of the image do
not correspond to the actual arrangement of your car. In addition, the Handbook has been conceived considering vehicles
with steering wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible that on vehicles with steering wheel on the right side, the position or
construction of some controls is not exactly mirror-like with respect to the figure.
To identify the chapter with the information needed you can consult the index at the end of this Owner Handbook.
The sections can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd page. A few pages further there is
a key for getting to know the section order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. There is in any case a textual indication of the
current section at the side of each even page.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
While reading this Owner Handbook you will find a series of WARNINGS to prevent procedures that could damage your car.
There are also PRECAUTIONS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the car, which
could cause accidents or injuries.
Therefore, all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS must always be carefully followed.
WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols:
personal safety;

car safety;

environmental protection.
NOTE These symbols, when necessary, are indicated besides the title or at the end of the line and are followed by a number.
That number recalls the corresponding warning at the end of the relevant chapter.
SYMBOLS
Some car components have coloured labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component.
CHANGES/ALTERATIONS TO THE CAR
WARNING Any change or alteration of the car might seriously affect its safety and road grip, thus causing accidents, in which
the occupants could even be fatally injured.

WARNING The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external aerial) may cause the electrical
systems to malfunction. This could compromise the safety of the car in addition to constituting a potential hazard for
passengers' health.

ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNER

If after buying the car, you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio, satellite
anti-theft system, etc.) or accessories that in any case burden the electrical supply, contact a Fiat Dealership, whose personnel
will check whether the car's electrical system is able to withstand the load required, or whether it needs to be integrated with a
more powerful 12V battery.

WARNING Take care when fitting additional spoilers, alloy wheel rims or non-standard wheel hubs: they could reduce the
ventilation of the brakes and affect efficiency under sharp, repeated braking or on long descents. Make sure that nothing
obstructs the pedal stroke (mats, etc.).

INSTALLING ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC DEVICES

Electrical and electronic devices installed after buying the car in the context of after-sales service must carry the following label
.
FCA Italy S.p.A. authorises the installation of transceivers provided that installation is carried out at a specialised centre, in a
workmanlike fashion and in compliance with manufacturer's specifications.

WARNING Traffic police may not allow the car on the road if devices have been installed which modify the features of the car.
This may also cause invalidation of warranty in relation to faults caused by the change either directly or indirectly related to it.
FCA Italy S.p.A. shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by
Fiat and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions.
RADIO TRANSMITTERS AND MOBILE PHONES
Radio transmitter equipment (car mobile phones, CB radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the car unless a
separate aerial is mounted on the roof.
Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the car body. As far as the use of EC-
approved mobile phones is concerned (GSM, GPRS, UMTS, LTE), follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phone
Manufacturer.

WARNING The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external aerial) may cause the electrical
systems to malfunction. This could compromise the safety of the car in addition to constituting a potential hazard for
passengers' health.
 GRAPHICAL INDEX

KNOWING YOUR CAR

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

SAFETY

STARTING AND DRIVING

IN AN EMERGENCY

MAINTENANCE AND CARE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

MULTIMEDIA

CONTENTS
 GRAPHICAL INDEX

FRONT VIEW

3 6

1
4

1 F0S1216

1 HEADLIGHTS 3 DOOR MIRRORS 6 WINDSCREEN WIPERS

Exterior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Replacing blades . . . . . . . . . 244
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . 210 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Bulb types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
4 DOORS
2 WHEELS Central opening/closing . . . . . . 27
Rims and wheels . . . . . . . . . 262
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 5 BONNET
Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . 67

9
 REAR-VIEW
GRAPHICAL INDEX

2
1

2 F0S1217

1 REAR LIGHTS
Exterior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . 217
Bulb types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
2 BOOT
Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . 66
3 REAR WINDOW WIPER
Blade replacement . . . . . . . . 244

10
DASHBOARD

4 5

5
2 6
3

8
1
9 7
5 10

11

3 F0S1093

1 LEFT STALK 6 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM 9 STEERING WHEEL

External lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Manual/automatic climate control Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2 INSTRUMENT PANEL bk CONTROLS ON THE STEERING
Instrument panel features . . . . . 75 7 TRANSMISSION WHEEL
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 One-speed transmission . . . . 137 Phone controls . . . . . . . . . . . 283
3 RIGHT STALK Display controls . . . . . . . . . . . 76
8 CONTROLS ON THE STEERING
Window washing . . . . . . . . . . 42 WHEEL bl Left-side controls
4 Co-Driver System ......... 145 Park Assist
Uconnect™ . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Cruise Control . . ......... 143 activation/deactivation . . . . . . 165
Speed Limiter . . . ......... 142 ESC system
5 AIR VENTS activation/deactivation . . . . . . 100
Climatic comfort . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

11
 Headlight alignment

GRAPHICAL INDEX
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

12
INTERIOR

5
1

4
2

3
2

2
4 F0S1094

1 IGNITION DEVICE 4 POWER WINDOWS AND DOOR

Starting the car . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 MIRRORS
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2 INTERIOR FITTINGS Adjusting the mirrors . . . . . . . . 36
Storage compartments . . . . . . 68
Cup/bottle holders . . . . . . . . . 68 5 DOORS
Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Door opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Smartphone compartment / Wireless
charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
USB ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Uconnect™ system controls . . 68
Drive mode selector . . . . . . . . 15
3 SEATS
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

13
 KNOWING YOUR CAR
KNOWING YOUR CAR
In-depth knowledge of your new car OPERATING PRINCIPLE ............... 15
starts here. DASHBOARD .............................. 21
The handbook you are reading will tell THE KEYS................................... 22
you how things are done, and how it
IGNITION DEVICE ........................ 24
works in a simple, direct way.
SENTRY KEY® ............................ 26
That’s why we advise you to read it
seated comfortably on board, so that ALARM SYSTEM.......................... 26
you can see what is described here for DOORS ...................................... 27
yourself. SEATS........................................ 32
HEAD RESTRAINTS ..................... 35
STEERING WHEEL....................... 35
REAR-VIEW MIRRORS ................. 36
EXTERNAL LIGHTS ...................... 37
INTERIOR LIGHTS........................ 41
WINDOW WASHING .................... 42
PROGRAMMING THE CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM ..................... 44
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ....... 46
ELECTRIC WINDOWS .................. 58
ROOF ......................................... 59
SOFT TOP .................................. 61
BOOT ......................................... 66
BONNET..................................... 67
INTERIOR FITTINGS ..................... 68
ROOF RACK/SKI RACK ................ 72
RED SPECIAL SERIES .................. 73

14
OPERATING powered by the high-voltage battery
PRINCIPLE and also recharges the 12V battery.
The battery is charged by connecting
The propulsion system of the New 500 the charging socket of the car to the
is completely powered by the energy mains power supply using the charging
contained in the high-voltage lithium- cable. The battery is charged by
ion rechargeable battery of the car. connecting the charging socket of the
Unlike conventional or hybrid cars, car to the mains power supply using
there is no internal combustion engine the charging cable.
in this car. The high-voltage battery is also
The New 500 uses the electrical energy partially recharged while driving during
stored in the high-voltage battery deceleration or braking. During this
and not fuel. This battery provides steps, the battery is recharged by
the energy needed to start moving regeneration via the electric motor. This
and therefore needs to be recharged is an efficient way of recharging as the
before use. If the high-voltage battery is kinetic energy of the car is used and
completely flat the car will not start. converted into electric charging energy.
This car also has a 12V battery of the Electric cars have specific
same type as those used by cars with characteristics of use, which is useful
internal combustion engines. If the 12V to know, in order to achieve optimal
battery is completely flat the car will not performance.
start. This car respects the environment
The 12V battery supplies power to the because it does not emit exhaust
conventional electrical system: lights, gases and therefore has zero CO2
windscreen wipers, restraint systems emissions.
(airbags and pretensioners), sound
system, etc.
The high-voltage battery supplies
power to the electric motor and
supplies the high-voltage auxiliary
devices (heaters, electric climate
compressor, etc.). The electronic
converter that powers the 12V system
for general car operation is also

15
 FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF THE CAR

KNOWING YOUR CAR

 

D B

5 F0S1050

A. Charging port B. High-voltage battery C. High-voltage electrical compressor D. Traction electric motor E. Voltage converter

16
HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY while in the smaller version the voltage for the proper handling of the batteries
The high-voltage battery is located at is 395V. to be disposed of.
the bottom of the vehicle in a central The high-voltage battery is equipped GENERAL INFORMATION
area and is maintenance-free. with conditioning systems that ensure
The car is also equipped with a battery
  that it operates under the best
management system designed to:
temperature conditions appropriate to
A ensure safe operation
its operation.
optimise driving range
1)
optimise the working life of the high-
The car is equipped with a safety voltage battery
A device that inhibits the activation of the NOTE You can hear a click from inside
high-voltage system. This device is the car when the car is starting and
normally used by Fiat Dealerships to switching it off. When the ignition
repair and service the car. device is in the ENGINE position, the
1)
high-voltage battery contactors are
6 F0S1069
2) 3) 4) closed to allow the distribution of the
1) 2) accumulated electricity to use the car.
A. High-voltage wires This typical sound is the noise of these
HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY
The high-voltage battery is lithium-ion. contactors opening and closing and is
DISPOSAL
Lithium-ion batteries provide the normal for the car.
The high-voltage battery is designed
following benefits: If the temperature of the high-voltage
to last for the lifetime of the car. If it
are much lighter than other types of battery is below -10°C, or above 40°C,
is necessary to replace the battery,
chargeable batteries of the same size; some car functions may change or turn
please contact a Fiat Dealership for
keep the charge longer; off as battery performance decreases
information on disposal.
have no memory, i.e. it is not outside this temperature range.
NOTE The car is provided with a
necessary to discharge them OPERATING MODE
high-voltage lithium-ion battery.
completely before recharging, as is the As with a car with automatic
Inappropriate disposal of this type
case with other types of batteries; transmission, you must get used to
of battery carries a risk of serious
can be recharged and discharged,
burns, electric shock and damage not using your left foot to activate the
charging times vary depending on
to the environment. In accordance clutch pedal which is not present. While
home or public charging mode and
with national and international battery driving, when you lift your foot off the
power.
regulations, FCA guarantees an accelerator pedal or when you press
The high-voltage battery of the New the brake pedal during deceleration,
adequate collection of this component
500 in the larger version (with more the motor generates electric current
in cooperation with qualified operators
energy) has a nominal voltage of 350V,

17
 which is used to brake the car and When the motor is started, the system this mode, the energy consumption of

KNOWING YOUR CAR

recharge the high-voltage battery. usually maintains the driving mode that the car depends on the driving style.
Refer to the "eBraking mode" chapter was active before the car was stopped. In "NORMAL" mode, when the
in the "Starting and driving" section. The standard operating mode is accelerator pedal is released, the car
Special case: after the high-voltage "NORMAL". Pull and release the slows down with an motor braking
battery has been fully recharged selector once to activate "RANGE" effect similar to that of a conventional
and during the first kilometres of mode. Pulling and releasing the vehicle. During this phase, the high-
use of the car, the exhaust brake is selector switch a second time activates voltage battery is partially recharged
in a temporary condition of reduced the "SHERPA" mode. To return to (regeneration).
effectiveness. Adapt your driving "RANGE" mode, push the switch In "NORMAL", when the one-speed
accordingly. towards the dashboard and release it transmission is on D, to keep the car
5) 6) 7) once, to return to "NORMAL" mode, stationary press the brake pedal ("One
While driving, you can activate the push and release it a second time. Pedal Driving" not available).
selector (A) fig. 7 located on the central Driving mode selection is not available The "creeping" function is also
tunnel. This device allows you to set in "Performance limitation - Turtle available. The car will start to move
three different driving modes according mode". forward (with transmission in "D") or
to the driver's needs: backward (with transmission in "R")
NORMAL when the brake pedal is released. The
RANGE accelerator should not be pressed in
SHERPA this case.
Via the on board electronics, the "RANGE" mode
device acts on the dynamic control In "RANGE" mode, the car continues to
system of the car (motor, ESC system), have no speed restrictions but offers
interfacing the instrument panel as well. comfortable handling with a smoother
The selector is of "hold to operate" response to accelerator pedal
type, returning to the central position 7 F0S1088 pressure. This mode helps to adopt a
when released. Engagement of the driving style aimed at maximising the
required driving mode is indicated on "NORMAL" mode range.
the instrument panel display with a In the "NORMAL" operating mode, the
dedicated message. The system does car has no performance limitations and WARNING The "One-Pedal Driving"
not allow you to change the driving can be driven fast using all the power function is enabled on the accelerator
mode when you drastically reduce the and torque of the traction system. In pedal in "RANGE" mode. In this
performance of the electric motor (see
case, the car can be accelerated,
paragraph on performance limitations).

18
decelerated and stopped by acting only decelerated and stopped by acting only Performance limitation -
on the accelerator pedal. See the "One on the accelerator pedal. Turtle mode
Pedal Driving" chapter in the "Starting "Turtle" mode is activated automatically
the motor" section. NOTE The "creeping" function is not when the remaining range is less
available in "SHERPA" mode. than 24 km, but can be temporarily
NOTE The "creeping" function is not NOTE When "One Pedal Driving" with deactivated in case of emergency (for
available in "RANGE" mode. one-speed transmission in D is active example to clear a junction) by quickly
NOTE When "One Pedal Driving" with and the car is stationary, it is not depressing the accelerator pedal fully
one-speed transmission in D is active necessary to press the brake pedal to (kick-down function).
and the car is stationary, it is not hold it stationary. Range: 24-16 km
necessary to press the brake pedal to NOTE Even if "One Pedal Driving" is Amber high-voltage battery charge
hold it stationary. active, the brake system operated by status indicator, symbol on the
In "RANGE" mode, by fully depressing the brake pedal works normally. instrument panel display lit for 6
the accelerator pedal, you can override In "SHERPA" mode, by fully depressing seconds.
the mode limitations and temporarily the accelerator pedal, the operating Speed according to the selected
return to "NORMAL" mode. mode is temporarily returned (e.g. to mode (NORMAL, RANGE, SHERPA).
make an overtaking manoeuvre) to The heated rear window,
"SHERPA" mode windscreen, mirrors and seats are
In "SHERPA" mode, the car has no "NORMAL".
When "SHERPA" mode is activated, deactivated automatically (but can be
acceleration restriction but the top reactivated manually if necessary).
speed is electronically limited to the heated seats will be turned off if
turned on. To turn them on again, you Range: 16-8 km
80km/h. "SHERPA' mode significantly
must act on the activation command. Red high-voltage battery charge
helps to adopt a driving style aimed at
NOTE If the climate control system status indicator, symbol on the
maximum efficiency and maximises the
or heated seats are activated in instrument panel display lit fixed.
range of the car.
"SHERPA" mode, a dedicated Speed according to the selected
The climate control system and
message appears on the instrument mode (NORMAL, RANGE, SHERPA).
seat heaters are also automatically
panel to alert the user that these The heated rear window,
deactivated but can be manually
functions have an impact on battery windscreen, mirrors and seats are
reactivated if necessary.
life. deactivated automatically (but can be
reactivated manually if necessary).
WARNING The "One-Pedal Driving" Range: 8-0 km
function is enabled on the accelerator Red high-voltage battery charge
pedal in "SHERPA" mode. In this status indicator, symbol on the
case, the car can be accelerated, instrument panel display lit fixed.

19
 Top speed: 70 km/h.

KNOWING YOUR CAR

or modification on the high-voltage
The climate control system is electrical system of the car (components, IMPORTANT
deactivated, and the fan and quick cables, connectors, high-voltage battery) is
defrosting may be activated. The strictly forbidden due to the risks it may 1) The high-voltage battery may only be
imply for your safety. In this case, contact disconnected by qualified personnel at a
heated rear window, windscreen, a Fiat Dealership. Tampering with the Fiat Dealership.
mirrors and seats are deactivated high-voltage system can lead to serious
automatically (but can be reactivated burns or electrical discharges with even
manually if necessary). fatal consequences. IMPORTANT
Range: ≈0 km (emergency 2) Do not resell, give away or modify the
high-voltage battery. The high-voltage 1) Do not dispose of the battery yourself.
conditions) battery must only be used on the car If the car is scrapped, it must be taken to
Red high-voltage battery charge on which it is supplied. If used outside a Fiat Dealership to have the high-voltage
status indicator, symbol on the the car or modified, accidents such as battery removed and disposed of properly
instrument panel display blinking. electric shock, heat or smoke generation, by the Fiat Dealership personnel who have
explosion or electrolyte leakage may the technical skills to operate in complete
Top speed: 70 km/h.
occur. safety.
The climate control system is 3) If the car is scrapped without removing
deactivated, and the fan and quick 2) Live parts of the car are marked with
the high-voltage battery, contact with safety warning labels. The high-voltage
defrosting may be activated. The high-voltage components, cables and battery bears a label indicating this danger.
heated rear window, windscreen, connectors could cause very dangerous
mirrors and seats are deactivated electric shock.
4) If the high-voltage battery is not
automatically (but can be reactivated disposed of properly, it may cause electric
manually if necessary). shock, resulting in serious injury or death.
NOTE Turtle mode speed limits are 5) Under no circumstances may the motor
disabled when the Speed Limiter or brake replace pressing the brake pedal.
Cruise Control is active. 6) In case of bad weather and flooded
roads: Do not drive on a flooded street if
the water level exceeds the lower part of
the wheel rims.
WARNING 7) Due to the quiet operation of your
electric car, always set the speed selector
1) The propulsion system of the electric
switch to P and engage the electric
car is connected by the high-voltage parking brake and stop the motor before
battery and when the system is active the leaving the car. DANGER OF SERIOUS
components are then powered at high- INJURY.
voltage. Observe the warning messages
on the labels on the car when accessing
the motor compartment. Any intervention

20
DASHBOARD
The presence, graphics and position of panels, controls, instruments and indicators may vary according to the different
versions.
  
C E

B D
A
G F G H

T Q L
R
U P O M
S

N
I
8 F0S1096

A. side air vent B. left steering wheel stalk C. instrument panel D. right steering wheel stalk E. Uconnect™ system F. hazard
warning lights, door locking/unlocking button G. central air vents H. side air vent I. glove compartment L. climate control system
controls M. storage compartment and wireless charging device (where provided) N. One-speed transmission O. USB port P.
ignition device Q. controls on the steering wheel: Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control, Speed Limiter, Co-Driver R. driver's
side front airbag and horn S. steering wheel adjustment lever T. Uconnect™ system and display steering wheel controls. U.
control panel: rear fog light, ESC deactivation, headlight alignment adjustment

21
 THE KEYS The current setting can be changed Lights on

KNOWING YOUR CAR

using the display Menu or the Press the button to remotely control
The car is equipped with two types of Uconnect™ system (see "Settings" in the switching on of the side/tail lights
key, an electronic key and a Wearable the"Vehicle mode" paragraph in the and main beam headlights, for up to 90
Key. "Multimedia" section), for the system seconds.
8)
to unlock the driver door only or all This function is useful for example to
2) 3) the doors the first time the button is find the car easily in a crowded parking.
ELECTRONIC KEY pressed on the remote control. For Pressing button again, or at the end
further information, see the "Display" of the 90 seconds, the lights switched
The electronic key of the car performs
chapter in the "Knowing the instrument on previously will go off (if the parking
the conventional functions for access
panel" section. light function was already active, it
and starting, which are detailed below.
Door and boot locking will remain so). If, when 90 seconds
Briefly press the button : lock of have passed, the button is pressed,
doors and boot with interior ceiling the main beam headlights and the
light off and single flash of direction side/tail lights will stay on for a further
indicators (where provided). 30 seconds.
If one or more doors are open, the FLAT BATTERY
doors are locked and this is indicated When the battery of the key is nearly
by a rapid flashing of the direction flat, the car will detect it beforehand by
indicators (where provided). The doors displaying a message on the instrument
9 F0S1229 prepare for locking, which is active panel.
from the moment they are closed.
OPERATION The doors will unlock again only if the
WARNING The battery life of the keys
Unlocking doors and boot key presence is detected inside the
depends considerably on their use.
Briefly press the button : unlocking passenger compartment.
of doors and boot, timed switching-on Opening the boot BATTERY REPLACEMENT
of internal lights and double flashing of Rapidly press the button twice to
direction indicators (where provided). open the boot remotely.
3)

When the function is available, press To replace the battery, proceed as

The direction indicators will flash twice
and release the unlock button on the follows:
to indicate that the boot has been
remote control once only to unlock the take the key from the lower side (A)
opened.
driver's door or twice within 1 second fig. 10 (the one without buttons) and,
to unlock all doors and the tailgate. using the fingertips, move the cover in

22
the direction of the key chain hole until extract the battery (D). EMERGENCY KEY
the teeth are released (motion (1)); HOLDER
gently remove the lower cover by The emergency key (B) fig. 11 can be
pulling it upwards (motion (2) fig. 10); housed in the charging compartment.
Open the charging compartment flap
and remove the holder (A) fig. 13. Insert
the key into the holder from the grip
side and refit the holder on the flap.

12 F0S1233

To replace the battery, insert it in

10 F0S1231 the compartment occupied by the
A
previous one, taking care to respect
pull up the edge of the metal key (B) the polarities indicated inside the
fig. 11 until the release and pull it out; electronic key. Then proceed by sliding
remove the battery protection cap (C) and then pushing the battery into the 13 F0S1348
fig. 11; cavity intended to house it.
Reposition the battery protection REQUEST FOR
cap. ADDITIONAL KEYS
Refit the metal insert in the electronic To guarantee that the motor starts and
key. the car operates correctly, use only
Reposition the cover taking care to electronic keys specifically coded for
anchor it correctly to the key. the car’s electronics.
If an electronic key is coded for a car, it
WARNING The battery replacement cannot be used on any other car.
operation must be carried out with
Duplicating keys
11 F0S1232 care, in order not to damage the
electronic key. Should a new key with remote control
or a new electronic key be necessary,
lift the fastener (C) fig. 12 by prying
go to a Fiat Dealership, taking an ID
into the recess in the end of the key,
document and the car ownership
on the side of the key chain (movement
documents.
(3));

23
 WEARABLE KEY WARNING The battery of the Wearable

KNOWING YOUR CAR

The car is optionally equipped with Key cannot be replaced. If the internal IMPORTANT
an additional extremely small, light- battery is not sufficiently charged,
weight electronic device that works as contact a Fiat Dealership and follow 3) Used batteries should be disposed
of, as specified by law, in the special
a passive key (without buttons). the "Request for additional keys" containers, otherwise take them to a
procedure. The need to replace the Fiat Dealership, which will deal with their
battery is notified to the owner as disposal.
described above for the electronic key
in the "Flat battery" paragraph.
IGNITION DEVICE
OPERATION
WARNING 9) 10) 11)

To activate the ignition device (A) fig. 15

8) Do not swallow the battery. Danger of
chemical burns. The keys contain a small the electronic key must be inside the
14 F0S1230 passenger compartment.
battery. If the battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just 2 hours The ignition device activates also if the
The Wearable Key is resistant to and cause death. Keep new and used electronic key is inside the boot or on
immersion in water (15 meters/1 batteries out of the reach of children. If
the battery compartment does not close the rear shelf.
hour) and can therefore be used for
outdoor activities or sports activities in securely, discontinue use of the product
and keep it out of reach of children. If you
general. Every indication in this manual believe that batteries may have been
related to the electronic key apply swallowed or inserted inside the body,
to the Wearable Key, except for the seek medical attention immediately.
functions related to the presence of the
buttons and the battery replacement
IMPORTANT
procedure.
2) The electronic components inside
WARNING The Wearable Key must the key may be damaged if the key is
not be used for deep diving or other subjected to strong shocks. In order 15 F0S1366

activities involving contact with high- to ensure complete efficiency of the

electronic devices inside the key, it should The ignition device has the following
speed water (such as water skiing,
never be exposed to direct sunlight.
diving, kite surfing, etc.). possible states:
3) Do not place the car key in the wireless
charging compartment: risk of access and STOP: the motor is off. Some
starting system malfunction. electrical devices (e.g. central door

24
locking system, alarm, etc.) are still “Knowing the instrument panel” section, compliance of the car with type-approval
available; where available, and contact the Fiat requirements.
ENGINE: driving position. All Dealership as soon as possible. For 10) If the ignition device has been
electrical devices are available. This more information on the engine start- tampered with (e.g. an attempted theft),
have it checked by a Fiat Dealership before
state can be selected by pressing the up, see the description in the "Starting driving again.
ignition device button once, without the engine" chapter in the "Starting and 11) Always take the key with you when
pressing the brake pedal; driving" section. you leave your car to prevent someone
START: motor starting. NOTE The electronic key can be from accidentally operating the controls.
12) 13) disabled for starting if it is left in the car. Remember to engage the electric parking
brake. Never leave children unattended in
NOTE The ignition device does NOT To do this: the vehicle.
activate if the electronic key is inside close all the doors, including the 12) Before leaving the car, ALWAYS
the boot and this is open. tailgate; engage the electric parking brake. Put the
NOTE With the ignition device in the press the lock button on another transmission in the P (Park) position and
press the ignition device to set it to STOP.
ENGINE position, if 30 minutes pass key twice or the button located under
Always lock the doors when you leave the
with P (Park) transmission and the the handle with another electronic key, car.
motor stopped, the ignition device waiting at least 3 seconds between 13) Do not leave the electronic key inside
will automatically move to the STOP each press; or near the car or in a place accessible
position. wait 30 seconds without unlocking to children. Do not leave the car with the
the car or opening the doors. ignition device in the ENGINE position. A
NOTE With the ignition device in the child could activate the electric window
ENGINE position, if 15 minutes pass To reactivate the previously disabled winders, other controls or even start the
with transmission in position N, motor electronic key you must either start vehicle.
off and car stopped, the ignition device the car with an enabled electronic key
will automatically switch to the STOP or unlock the car using an enabled
position. electronic key.
NOTE With motor started, it is possible
to go away from the car taking the
electronic key with you. The motor will WARNING
still be running. The car will indicate the
absence of the key on board when the 9) It is absolutely forbidden to carry out
door is closed. any after-market operation involving
steering system or steering column
NOTE If the device does switch off the modifications (e.g. installation of anti-theft
car, refer to the “Display” chapter in the device) that could adversely affect
performance and safety, invalidate
the warranty and also result in non-

25
 SENTRY KEY® STOP and ENGINE; if it is still blocked, SWITCHING ON THE

KNOWING YOUR CAR

try with the other keys provided. If it ALARM
The Sentry Key® system prevents is still not possible to start the motor, With the doors, bonnet and tailgate
unauthorised use of the car preventing contact a Fiat Dealership. closed and the ignition device turned to
to start the motor.
If the icon is displayed while driving, STOP, point the electronic key towards
The system does not need to be the car and press and release button
this means that the system is running
enabled/activated: operation is
a self-diagnosis (e.g. due to a voltage .
automatic, regardless of the fact that
drop). If the display persists, contact a The alarm can also be engaged by
the car's doors are locked or unlocked.
Fiat Dealership. pressing the "door lock" button,
When the ignition device is set to
located on the door external handle.
ENGINE, the Sentry Key® system ALARM SYSTEM
identifies the code transmitted by the For further information, see the
ALARM ACTIVATION "Passive Entry" paragraph in the
key. If the code is recognised as valid,
The alarm goes off in the following "Doors" chapter.
the Sentry Key® system enables
cases: The system emits a visual and acoustic
motor starting.
When the ignition device is brought wrongful opening of warning (where provided) and enables
back to STOP, the Sentry Key® doors/bonnet/boot (perimeter door locking.
system deactivates the control unit protection); The activation of the alarm is preceded
controlling the motor, thus preventing operation of starting device with a by a self-diagnosis stage: if a fault is
its starting. key which is not validated. detected, the system emits a further
For the correct motor starting Activation of the alarm triggers the acoustic warning.
procedures, see the instructions in the acoustic warning and the direction If, after the alarm is switched on, a
"Starting the motor" chapter in the indicators. second acoustic warning is emitted,
"Starting and driving" section. wait about 4 seconds and switch off
WARNING The immobilizer function is the alarm by pressing the button ,
IRREGULAR OPERATION check that the doors, bonnet and boot
provided by the Sentry Key®system,
If, during starting, the key code is not are closed correctly and then reactivate
which is automatically activated when
correctly recognised, the icon is you get out of the car taking the the system by pressing the button .
displayed on the instrument panel electronic key with you and locking the If the alarm emits an acoustic warning
(see the instructions in the "Warning doors. even when the doors, bonnet and boot
lights and messages" chapter in the
are correctly closed, an anomaly has
"Knowing the instrument panel"
WARNING The alarm is adapted to occurred in system operation: in this
section). This condition leads to the
meet requirements in various countries. case, contact a Fiat Dealership.
motor switching off after 2 seconds. In
this case, bring the ignition device to

26
Locking doors without alarm insertion DISARMING THE ALARM button will light up to notify the locking.
is also always possible by locking the To completely deactivate the alarm With doors locked, press the button
doors through the emergency locking (e.g. during a long period of car again to unlock them. The LED on
procedure. For more information see inactivity), close the doors using the the button will go out to notify the
"Emergency opening and closing" in emergency locking manoeuvres unlocking.
the "Doors" chapter. described in the "Doors" chapter.

WARNING If the doors are unlocked by WARNING If the batteries of the key
putting the metal insert into the driver with the remote control run out or the
side door lock, the alarm, if previously system fails, the alarm can be switched
enabled, is not disabled. It will be off by placing the ignition device switch
possible to disable the alarm by turning in the ENGINE position.
the ignition device switch to ENGINE,
or by pressing button on the remote DOORS
control. 16 F0S1098
LOCKING / UNLOCKING
DOORS FROM THE
TURNING THE ALARM Opening the door
INSIDE
OFF The door can be opened by pressing
Central locking / unlocking
Press the button. The following the button (B) fig. 17 located above
Where provided, the "Autoclose" each door. If the function is present,
operations are performed:
function automatically activates the pressing the button on either door
two brief flashes of the direction
automatic locking of the doors on opens the door and unlocks the other
indicators (where provided);
exceeding the speed of 20 km/h. If it is doors and the boot. The function must
two brief acoustic signals (where
not present, use the respective control have been activated via the instrument
provided);
(A) fig. 16 located on the centre panel display menu or the Uconnect™
doors are unlocked.
dashboard to lock/unlock the doors. system (see "Settings" in the "Vehicle
For versions with Passive Entry
Where provided, the "Autoclose" mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia"
function, the alarm can be switched
function can be activated/deactivated section).
off by the key holder by pressing the
via the Uconnect™ system (see
door opening button on the external
"Doors & Locks" in the "Vehicle Mode"
handle. For further information, see
paragraph in the "Multimedia" section).
the "Passive Entry" paragraph in the
"Doors" chapter. In any case, the doors can be locked
by pressing the button (A) on the
centre dashboard. The LED on the

27
 be locked and cannot be opened from to facilitate access to the rear seats

KNOWING YOUR CAR

outside any more. and getting out of the car. See the
"Seats" chapter in this section for more
Door unlocking from the outside
information.
Press the opening button on the
IMPORTANT The front passenger seat
key. Then pull the handle (E) fig. 19 on
belt is fitted on the rear door. If the
one of the two doors to enter the car.
seat belt of the front seat passenger
VERSION "3+1" - is fastened, it must be unfastened and
OPENING/CLOSING fully retracted it before opening the rear
17 F0S1099
THE REAR DOOR ON door.
PASSENGER SIDE IMPORTANT The front seat passenger
Press button (B) fig. 17 three times (where provided) must always make sure the door is
in two seconds to open the door in Opening closed before fastening the seat belt.
motion at speeds above 5 km/h (to
To open the rear door on passenger Closing
prevent spontaneous opening of the
side, firstly open the respective front Close the rear door first and then the
door while in motion). At speeds below
door using handle (E) fig. 19 (opening front door.
5 km/h, the door will open when the
from the outside) or button (B) fig. 17
button is pressed for the first time. The PASSIVE ENTRY
(opening from the inside).
red LED around the button will light up 4)

when the door is locked and it will turn Then open the rear door using the
internal handle (A) fig. 18. The Passive Entry system can identify
off when the door is unlocked. the presence of an electronic key near
LOCKING / UNLOCKING the doors.
DOORS FROM THE The system lets you lock/unlock the
OUTSIDE A doors (and the tailgate) without having
Locking from the outside to press any button on the electronic
With the doors closed, press the key.
button on the key. If the system identifies the electronic
The door lock can be activated also key detected outside the car as a valid
with all doors open and the boot open. one, the key holder can simply pull the
handle (E) fig. 19 on one of the two
When the button on the key is 18 F0S1339
doors to deactivate the alarm and open
pressed, all the locks are closed,
the door. The other doors and the boot
including that of the open boot. When NOTE It is recommended to fold
will be unlocked.
the open door or boot is closed, it will the front passenger seat forward

28
 WARNING After pressing the "door Once all the doors are closed, the
locking" button (B) , you need to wait FOBIK-Safe system performs a check
two seconds before the doors can inside and outside the car to verify the
be unlocked again using the door presence of enabled electronic keys.
handle (E). It is therefore possible
If one of the electronic keys is detected
to check whether the car is locked
inside the car and no other active
correctly by pulling the door handle
electronic key is detected outside
within 2 seconds. The doors will not be
the car, the FOBIK-Safe function
unlocked again. The doors and tailgate
automatically unlocks all the car doors.
19 of the car can still be locked from the
F0S1100 The FOBIK-Safe function will also
outside by pressing the button on
intervene if the electronic key is left
If the function is present, by pressing the electronic key or from the inside by
inside the boot. When the boot is
the button on the driver's door it is pressing the (A) fig. 16 placed on the
closed, if the electronic key is detected,
possible to open the driver's side door centre dashboard.
the system will unlock the boot.
only, leaving the other doors and the
If, on the other hand, one or more
boot locked, or to open the driver's PREVENTION AGAINST electronic keys are found inside the
side door by unlocking the other doors INADVERTENT LOCKING OF passenger compartment, locking the
and the boot according to the mode THE KEY INSIDE THE CAR doors with another key will disable the
set using the display menu on the (FOBIK-SAFE) operation of the keys from the inside.
Uconnect™ system (see "Settings" in The key is provided with an automatic In this case, the FOBIK-Safe function
the "Vehicle mode" paragraph in the door unlocking function to avoid leaving will not detect the disabled keys if
"Multimedia" section). the electronic key inside the car left inside the car. To re-activate their
Door locking accidentally. correct operation, press the button
To lock the doors, proceed as follows: There are three situations that activate on the remote control.
make sure that you have the the FOBIK-Safe system:
NOTES
electronic key and are close to the A lock request made with a valid
electronic key while the door is open. The car will not unlock the doors
driver's or the passenger's door; if one of the following situations is
press the button (B) fig. 19 on the A lock request made by pressing the
door lock button on the outside handle present:
handle: this will lock all doors and the
(B) fig. 19 while a door is open. the doors have been locked by
tailgate. Locking the doors will also
A lock request made by pressing means of the emergency lock using the
activate the alarm (where provided).
the door lock button (A) fig. 16 on the door opening button (B) fig. 17 on the
centre dashboard while a door is open. door panel;

29
 an electronic key close to the car has detected inside when it is locked, the It thereby prevents the opening of

KNOWING YOUR CAR

been detected outside. tailgate will unlock again and the lights the doors from inside the passenger
flash twice. compartment, serving as an obstacle
Access to the boot
to break-in attempts.
If the car is provided with Passive
Entry function, while approaching the WARNING Before driving make sure We recommend that you activate the
tailgate with an enabled electronic key, the tailgate is closed correctly. device each time you park your car.
press the electric door opening button Activating the device
located under the handle (F) fig. 20, Locking the doors using button on The device is activated on all doors by
grasp this last and lift the boot tailgate. boot pressing button on the key twice
(where provided) in rapid succession or, for cars with
If the system identifies a valid electronic Passive Entry, by pressing the lock
key on the outside of the car, by button on the exterior handle of the car.
pressing the button (G) fig. 20 the The direction indicators flash 3 times to
tailgate can be locked with all doors let you know that the device is active.
and the boot itself. If one or more of the doors are not
closed correctly, the device will not
WARNING Boot opening is disabled activate, thus preventing a person from
while the car is moving. getting stuck inside the passenger
compartment by entering the car
20 F0S1102
System activation/deactivation through, and then closing, the open
The Passive Entry system can be door.
WARNING Where provided, the alarm
system will be temporarily disabled activated/deactivated using the display Deactivating the device
only for the boot area. After closing menu or on the Uconnect™ system The device disengages automatically:
the boot, the alarm system will be (see "Settings" in the "Vehicle mode" when the doors are unlocked
reactivated again. paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). (pressing button on the key with
DEAD LOCK DEVICE remote control);
For vehicles not equipped with a (where provided) when the ignition device is set to
Passive Entry system, use the remote ENGINE;
14)
control to open the boot. by pressing the door opening button
This safety device inhibits the operation on the outside handle in the case of a
of the interior buttons of the car and car equipped with the Passive Entry
WARNING With the car locked, if the the door lock/unlock door button. system.
tailgate only is unlocked, if a key is

30
The horn is still active even when the Opening and locking pawl (A) fig. 21 using the key inside the
ignition device is in the OFF position. doors in the event of remote control.
power failure
EMERGENCY CLOSING
AND OPENING If the 12V battery of the car is flat, the A
doors can still be opened or locked as
If the electronic key does not work, e.g.
they are equipped with an additional
if the battery of the key is low, you can:
power supply.
unlock the car using the mechanical
key inside the electronic key by acting Opening the doors
on the pawl located on the driver's You can open the door in the following
door. See the "Emergency opening ways:
of the doors from outside" paragraph with the doors locked, press the
below. door opening button (E) fig. 19 on the 21 F0S1195

Lock the car by pressing the door external handle three times within 2
open button (B) fig. 17 placed on the seconds. Emergency opening of the doors
inner door panel for about 5 seconds Turn the pawl (C) placed on from the inside
keeping the ignition device in STOP the driver's door fig. 24 using the If the electronic key does not work,
position and the door open. mechanical key located inside the for example if the electronic key or the
The car will lock all the doors and the electronic key. 12V battery of the car is low, the doors
tailgate after about 5 seconds. Press the internal door opening can still be opened from the inside by
button three times (B) fig. 17 in two pulling the emergency lever (D) fig. 22
The LED on the door button (B) fig. 17
seconds. located on each door.
and on the centre dashboard (A) fig. 16
will light up to notify the locking. Locking the doors
When the last door is closed the car will The doors can be locked following the
be locked. emergency locking manoeuvre. See
The car can be locked from any door, the "Emergency closing and opening"
respecting the manoeuvre described paragraph described above.
above. NOTE See the "Emergency closing and
5) opening" paragraph described above.
RESET
Resetting the door is automatic for a 22 F0S1101
certain number of times after which
it must be done manually using the

31
 Emergency opening of the doors

KNOWING YOUR CAR

the keys inside the car. The emergency
from the outside locking manoeuvre disables the FOBIK-
If the electronic key does not work Safe function.
(e.g. if the battery of the electronic
key is low) or if the power supply fails SEATS
completely, you can still open the
C FRONT SEATS
doors from the outside by proceeding
as follows: A 15) 16)

remove the cap (B) fig. 23 present on 6)

the external handle on the driver's side 24 F0S1282
Forward/rearward adjustment
inserting the mechanical key inside the
electronic key in the slot (A); Lift lever (A) fig. 25 and push the seat
forwards or backwards: in the driving
WARNING position, you should be able to rest
your arms on the rim of the steering
14) By engaging the Dead Lock device it is
wheel.
possible to open the doors from inside
the car only by acting on the emergency
handle (D) fig. 22. Therefore, make sure
that there is no-one on board before
getting out.

IMPORTANT
23 F0S1281

open the door using the mechanical 4) The operation of the recognition system
depends on various factors, such as,
key (A) inside the electronic key by for example, any electromagnetic wave
turning the pawl anticlockwise (C) 25 F0S1103
interference from external sources (e.g.
fig. 24 on the outside handle on the mobile phones), the charge of the battery
driver's side. in the electronic key and the presence of 17)

metal objects near the key or the car. In

these cases it is still possible to unlock Height adjustment
the doors by using the metal insert in the (for versions/markets, where provided)
electronic key (see description on the Operate lever (B) fig. 26 to lift or lower
following pages). the rear part of seat to achieve the
5) After locking the car by emergency
most comfortable driving position.
manoeuvre, make sure you do not leave

32
 Driver side and passenger side, than or equal to 4.5°C. This function
C with position memory is activated/deactivated on the
To bring back the seat in its initial Uconnect™ system (see "Settings" in
B position proceed as follows: the"Vehicle mode" paragraph in the
slide the seat back by pushing in the "Multimedia" section).
lower part of the backrest as indicated REAR SEATS
in fig. 27, taking care not to lift the EXTENDING THE BOOT
backrest into the vertical starting
18)
position. In this way, slide the seat to
26 F0S1295 the locked position (movement 4); 7)

now lift the backrest (movement 5) The separate rear seats allow partial
Backrest angle adjustment into the vertical starting position until fig. 28 or total fig. 29 boot extension.
Rotate the lever (C) fig. 26. you feel the click;
Reclining the backrest
7)
WARNING Using lever (D) fig. 27 before
locking the seat in its initial position will
To fold the backrest over, adjust lever
cause the initial seat position to be lost.
(D) fig. 27 (movement 1) and push
In this case the position of the seat
the backrest forwards until it locks
must be restored through lengthwise
(movement 2).
adjustment lever (A) fig. 25.
Then release lever (D) and, pushing on
the backrest, slide the seat forward 28
(movement 3). Heated seats F0S1345

(where provided)
Heated seats can only be activated by
soft touch controls on the Uconnect™
system with the ignition device in the
START position.
Auto On comfort
(where provided)
The electric heated steering wheel
is switched on automatically
27 F0S1365 whenever the motor is started and 29 F0S1346
the external temperature is lower

33
 Partial extension (50/50) Total extension the lock click. Also check that the seat

KNOWING YOUR CAR

(for versions/markets, where provided) Tilting the rear seat completely belts do not get stuck between the
Proceed as follows: forwards allows maximum loading backrest and the interior moulding.
remove the parcel shelf, by releasing volume.
it from its two side pins and pulling it Proceed as follows:
out; remove the parcel shelf, by releasing WARNING
remove the rear seat head restraints it from its two side pins and pulling it
(where provided); see the "Head out; 15) All adjustments must be made with the
restraints" chapter in this section; remove the rear seat head restraints car stationary and engine stopped.
16) If a side bag is fitted, it is dangerous
check that the seat belt is fully (where provided); see the "Head
to use seat covers not available from
extended and not twisted; restraints" chapter in this section; Lineaccessori MOPAR®.
act on the buttons (A) fig. 30 (one check that the belt straps are 17) After releasing the adjustment lever,
on each side) to unlock the left or right correctly extended and not twisted; always check that the seat is locked on the
portion of the backrest and accompany operate the levers (A) fig. 30 and guides by trying to move it back and forth.
the backrest on the cushion. (B) to release the backrests and guide If the seat is not locked into place, it may
unexpectedly slide and cause the driver to
them onto the cushion. lose control of the car.
18) Make sure the backrests are properly
WARNING To return the backrest to secured at both sides to prevent them
its correct position, we recommend from moving forward, in the event of sharp
braking, with possible impact with of the
operating from the outside through the passengers.
doors.

Repositioning seat backrests IMPORTANT

Raise the backrests and push them
6) The fabric upholstery of the seats has
30 F0S1200 back until the locking click of both been designed to withstand long-term
retainers is heard. wear deriving from normal use of the car.
WARNING To return the backrest to Position the seat belt buckles upwards Some precautions are however required.
its correct position, we recommend and set the cushion to the normal use Avoid prolonged and/or excessive rubbing
operating from the outside through the position. against clothing accessories such as
metal buckles and Velcro strips which, by
doors. applying a high pressure on the fabric in a
WARNING When returning the backrest small area, could cause it to break, thereby
to its normal position, make sure that it damaging the upholstery.
is correctly fastened and that you hear

34
7) Before tilting the backrest, remove any side of the two supports and lower the
objects on the seat cushion. head restraint. WARNING

19) All adjustments must be carried out

HEAD RESTRAINTS only with the car stationary and motor
stopped. Head restraints must be adjusted
19) so that the head, rather than the neck,
rests on them. Only in this case they can
FRONT protect your head correctly.
Adjustment 20) To make the best use of the head
Headrests can be adjusted in height. restraint's protective action, adjust the
backrest so that you are sitting upright and
Upward adjustment: raise the head keep your head as close as possible to the
restraint until it clicks into place. head restraint.
32 F0S1110
Downward adjustment: press button
(A) fig. 31 and lower the head restraint. The particular shape of the head
STEERING WHEEL
restraint deliberately interferes with the
correct support of the rear passenger’s 21) 22)

back on the backrest in order to force

ADJUSTMENTS
them to lift the head restraint for correct
The steering wheel can be adjusted
use.
both in height and in depth.

WARNING If the rear seats are used,

always set the head restraints in the
"completely raised" position.
31 F0S1105

Removal
20)
To remove the rear head restraints
REAR press buttons (A) fig. 32 at the side of
Upward adjustment (usage the two supports simultaneously and
condition): raise the head restraint lift them out upwards. The rear head 33 F0S1106
until it clicks into place. restraints must be lifted out with the
Downward adjustment: press at the backrest released and tilted toward the To carry out the adjustment move the
same time buttons (A) fig. 32 at the passenger compartment or with the lever (A) fig. 33 downwards in position
tailgate open. (1), then adjust the steering wheel to

35
 the most suitable position and then REAR-VIEW mirror is automatically set for daytime

KNOWING YOUR CAR

lock it in this position moving the lever MIRRORS use.
(A) again in position (2).
INTERIOR MIRROR DOOR MIRRORS
The mirror is fitted with a safety device 23)

WARNING that causes its release in the event of a Proceed as follows:

violent impact with the passenger. select the mirror using selector (B)
21) All adjustments must be carried out Lever (A) fig. 34 can be used to move fig. 35;
only with the car stationary and motor the mirror to two different positions: adjust the mirror using the joystick (A)
stopped. normal or antiglare. fig. 35 in the four directions.
22) It is absolutely forbidden to carry
out any after-market operation involving
steering system or steering column
modifications (e.g.: installation of
anti-theft device) that could badly affect
performance and safety, invalidate
the warranty and also result in non-
compliance of the car with type-approval
requirements.

34 F0S1107 35 F0S1108

ELECTROCHROMIC Folding the mirrors

REAR-VIEW MIRROR When required (for example when
(where provided) the mirror causes difficulty in narrow
Some versions have an electrochromic spaces ) it is possible to fold the mirrors
mirror with automatic anti-glare manually moving them from the open
function. position (1) fig. 36 to the closed
There is an ON/OFF button position (2).
on the lower part of the mirror
for activating/deactivating the
electrochromic function. When the
function is active, a LED on the mirror is
active. When reverse is engaged, the

36
 EXTERNAL LIGHTS switched on, they remain off as long
as the electric parking brake (EPB) is
The left stalk (A) fig. 37 operates most engaged or the gearbox is in the P
of the exterior lights. (Parking) position.
With the ignition device in ENGINE
position and the propulsion system not
active, the daytime running lights are
switched off.
The daytime running lights are also
36 F0S1109 temporarily deactivated when the
direction indicators are activated.
When the direction indicators are
WARNING deactivated, the daylight running lights
37 F0S1111 are reactivated.
23) As door mirrors are curved, they may With the bonnet open, the daytime
The exterior lights can only be switched
slightly alter the perception of distance. running lights on the bonnet are
While driving the mirrors must remain in on when the ignition device is at
switched off.
position (1). ENGINE.
In some versions, if one of the daytime
Turning on the light may vary the
running lights fails, all the daytime
brightness of the instrument panel: its
running lights on the side where the
brightness is regulated by an external
failure is present are switched off.
light sensor
(e.g. when entering a tunnel during the AUTOMATIC LIGHTING
day, it lights up as if it were night, etc.). CONTROL (AUTOLIGHT)
In daylight, the brightness of the - DUSK SENSOR
instrument panel remains at maximum, This is an infrared LED sensor that
while at night, it can be adjusted. works in conjunction with - the
rain sensor and is located on the
DAYTIME RUNNING
windscreen. It is able to detect
LIGHTS (DRL)
variations in outside lighting based
24) 25)
on the light sensitivity set in the
The daytime running lights (DRL) are menu of the Uconnect™ system
activated with the ring (B) fig. 37 in (see "Settings" in the "Vehicle mode"
the AUTO position and in daylight paragraph in the "Multimedia" section).
conditions. The first time the ignition is The higher the sensitivity, the lower the

37
 amount of external light needed to PARKING LIGHTS

KNOWING YOUR CAR

switch the lights on. With the ignition device turned to
Activation STOP, turning the ring (B) from the
With the ignition device in the ENGINE AUTO position to position will light
up the side/tail lights and number plate
position, turn the ring (B) fig. 37 to
the AUTO position to activate the lights. Warning light lights up on
"Automatic lighting control" function. the instrument panel.
This automatically switches on the If the side lights are left on and the
side/tail lights and dipped beam driver side door is opened, a buzzer
headlights in case of low external light sounds and the display shows a 38 F0S1112

or DRL in daytime driving conditions. dedicated message warning the driver

Turn the ring to position to switch to that the car is being left with the lights With rear fog lights on, the warning
manual dipped beam mode. on. The buzzer stops when the driver light on the instrument panel will come
side door is closed. on at the same time.
In the event of a sensor malfunction,
the side/tail lights, dipped beam REAR FOG LIGHT MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS
headlights and licence plate lights are With ignition device in the ENGINE To activate the fixed main beam
automatically activated. position, press button (C) fig. 38 to headlights, with the ignition device in
switch the light on/off. The rear fog the ENGINE position, push left lever
WARNING The sensor cannot detect light switches on only when the dipped (A) fig. 37 towards the dashboard. The
the presence of fog. These lights must headlights are on. To switch off the ring (B) must be turned to AUTO with
therefore be switched on manually in rear fog lights, press the button (C), the dipped beam headlights on, or it
these circumstances. switch off the dipped beam headlights should be turned to position . The
or turn the ignition device to the STOP warning light on the instrument
position. panel switches on. The main beam
DIPPED BEAM
headlights are deactivated bringing
HEADLIGHTS
the lever back to the central stable
With the ignition device turned to
position. Warning light switches off
ENGINE, turn the ring (B) fig. 37 to .
in the instrument panel.
If dipped headlights are activated, the
daytime running lights switch off and AUTOMATIC MAIN BEAM
the side lights and dipped headlights HEADLIGHTS
switch on. The warning light In order not to dazzle other road users,
switches on in the instrument panel. the lights are automatically deactivated
when approaching cars travelling in the

38
opposite direction or when following a When the speed of 40 km/h is "Lane Change" function
car travelling in the same direction. exceeded again, the function is If you wish to signal a lane change,
This function is enabled via the activated automatically again. place the left stalk in the unstable
Uconnect™ system (see "Settings" in If the lever is pulled again in this position for less than half a second.
the"Vehicle mode" paragraph in the condition, to request main beam The direction indicator on the side
"Multimedia" section). headlight deactivation, the function selected will be activated for 5 flashes
Turn the light switch to the AUTO remains off and the main beam and then go out automatically.
position (B) fig. 37. The first time the headlights switch off.
COURTESY LIGHTS
main beam headlights are activated To deactivate the automatic function
The function can be enabled and
(pushing the left stalk towards the rotate the light switch ring to position
timed using the "Settings" menu of the
dashboard), the function is activated .
Uconnect™ system (see "Settings" in
(warning light comes on in the
FLASHING THE the"Vehicle mode" paragraph in the
instrument panel).
HEADLIGHTS "Multimedia" section).
If the main beam headlights are actually Pull the left lever towards the steering When the doors are unlocked, the
on, the warning light will also come wheel, to the unstable position; when side/tail lights and puddle lights come
on in the instrument panel). released it returns automatically to on for the time set in the menu.
When the speed is higher than 40 km/h the stable, central position. With main Once any door is opened, the lights
and the function is active, the lights beam headlights on, the warning light remain on for a further 180 seconds, or
switch off if the lever is taken again to on the instrument panel will come for a further 10 seconds after the door
the stable central position. on at the same time. is closed.
When the speed is lower than 15 km/h
and the function is active, the function DIRECTION INDICATORS "FOLLOW ME HOME"
switches the main beam headlights off. Take the left stalk to the (stable) DEVICE
If the fixed main beam headlights are position: This allows the space in front of the car
operated quickly again (taking the lever upwards: activates the right to be lit for a set time.
again to the stable central position and direction indicator;
Activation
taking it back in a few seconds on the downwards: activates the left
With the ignition device turned to STOP
fixed main beam headlight position), direction indicator.
or removed, pull the stalk towards the
the warning light will switch on Warning light or will blink
steering wheel within 2 minutes from
in the instrument panel and the main on the instrument panel. The
when the motor is turned off.
beam headlights will be switched on direction indicators are switched off
automatically when the steering wheel Each time the stalk is moved, the lights
constantly until the speed exceeds stay on for an extra 30 seconds up to
40 km/h. is straightened.

39
 a maximum of 210 seconds; then the Activating the alarm or hazard lights will

KNOWING YOUR CAR

lights are switched off automatically. disable the welcome light feature.
Also, each time the stalk is operated, LIGHT BEAM DIRECTION
the warning light on the The correct aiming of the headlights is
instrument panel switches on. The important for the comfort and safety
display shows a message and the time of not only the driver but all other road
set for the function. users. This is also covered by a specific
The warning light comes on rule of the highway code.
when the stalk is first moved and stays The headlights must be correctly
on until the function is automatically aligned to guarantee the best visibility 39 F0S1113
deactivated. Each movement of the conditions for all drivers while travelling
stalk only increases the amount of time Position 0: one or two people in the
with headlights on.
the lights stay on. front seats
Contact a Fiat Dealership to have the
Position 1: 4 people
Deactivation headlights checked and adjusted.
Position 2: 4 people + load in
Hold the stalk pulled towards the Check the light beam alignment luggage compartment
steering wheel for more than 2 seconds every time the load or its distribution Position 3: Driver + maximum load
or turn the ignition device to the changes. allowed stowed in the boot
ENGINE position.
HEADLIGHT ALIGNMENT
WELCOME LIGHT CORRECTOR WARNING Check the headlight
(where provided) This device works with the ignition alignment each time the weight of the
Depending on the version, with the device in the ENGINE position and the load transported changes.
ignition device in the STOP position, dipped headlights on.
an animated sequence of front lights ADJUSTING THE
Headlight alignment adjustment
may can be shown when the doors HEADLIGHTS ABROAD
To adjust, press the buttons or
of the car are unlocked. Then they
fig. 39 on the control display located on Cars with LED headlight do not need
light up fixed. To enable the function
the left side of the dashboard (left-hand headlight adjustment when driving in
set the courtesy lights in a state other
drive versions). countries with opposite traffic.
than OFF on the Uconnect™ system
The adjustment position is shown on Halogen headlights, if fitted on the car,
(see "Settings" in the "Vehicle mode"
the display: are adjusted for driving in the country
paragraph in the "Multimedia" section).
where the car was originally purchased.
Only the direction indicators will light up
In this case, when travelling in countries
when only the tailgate is unlocked.
with opposite driving direction, to avoid
dazzling the drivers on the other side

40
of the road, you need to cover areas of during the day; where it is not compulsory, to avoid draining the 12V battery. On
the headlight according to the Highway the use of daytime running lights is some versions, the lights switch on and
code of the country you are travelling permitted. off only when the front driver side door
in: fig. 40 (front right headlight), fig. 41 25) Daytime running lights cannot replace is opened or closed.
dipped beam headlights while driving
(front left headlight). at night or through tunnels. The use
of daytime running lights is governed CEILING LIGHT TIMING
by the highway code of the country in Ignition
which you are driving. Comply with legal
requirements. Two different switching-on modes are
provided:
when the doors are unlocked, a timer
INTERIOR LIGHTS will be activated for about 27 seconds;
FRONT CEILING LIGHT move the ignition device to STOP
Switch fig. 42 can assume three to activated a timed sequence of
different positions: approximately 27 seconds.
40 F0S1223
(A) light always off; Switching off
(B) the light turns on and off when Three modes are provided for
the doors are opened or closed; switching off:
(C) light permanently on. when all the doors are locked, a 10-
second timer is activated. This timing
will stop when the ignition device is
turned to the ENGINE position;
locking of the doors:
the interior lights are turned off after
15 minutes to preserve the 12V battery,
even if the switch fig. 42 is in position
41 F0S1224
(C).
BOOT COURTESY LIGHT
WARNING 42 F0S1114 (where provided)
The lamp comes on automatically when
24) The daytime running lights are an WARNING Before getting out of the the boot is opened and goes out when
alternative to the dipped headlights while car, make sure that the switch is in it is closed.
driving during the daytime in countries the central position: ensure that lights
where it is compulsory to have lights on are off with the doors closed in order

41
 WINDOW WASHING wiper is 10 seconds, independently With the ring nut turned to the LO or HI

KNOWING YOUR CAR

of the car speed. In position , the position, the smart washing function is
26) 27)
pause time between two strokes is set not carried out.
The right stalk controls windscreen and according to the car speed: when the
rear window wiper/washer operation. speed increases, the time between two WARNING If the stalk is activated for
WINDSCREEN WIPERS strokes decreases. In position LO less than half a second, only the screen
WITH AUTOMATIC or HI, the windscreen wiper moves washer jet is activated. Do not prolong
WIPING continuously, i.e. without a pause the activation of the "Smart Washing"
8) 9)
between two strokes. function for more than 30 seconds.
When the car is stationary, if the
The ring (A) fig. 43 can be set to the
windscreen wiper is active in the HI
following positions: MIST function
position, it automatically switches to
Windscreen wiper off Move the stalk upwards (unstable
LO continuous slow flick operation.
Automatic wiping - slow flick position) to activate the MIST
Continuous fast flick can be reactivated
Automatic wiping - fast flick function: operation is limited to the
by moving the ring to a position other
(according to the car speed) time for which the stalk is held in this
than HI and then back into HI, or by
position. When released, the stalk will
LO Constant slow flick moving the car.
return to its default position and the
HI Constant fast flick “Smart washing” function windscreen wiper automatically stop.
Pull the stalk towards the steering NOTE This function does not activate
wheel (unstable position) to operate the the windscreen washer; windscreen
windscreen washer. washer fluid will not therefore be
Keep the lever pulled to activate sprayed onto the windscreen. To spray
both the windscreen washer jet windscreen washer fluid onto the
and the windscreen wiper with a windscreen, the washing function must
single movement; the latter turns on be used.
automatically if you keep the lever
RAIN SENSOR
pulled for more than half a second. The
(where provided)
43 F0S1237 operation of the windscreen wiper
terminates three flicks after the stalk is 10) 11)

10) released; a final cleaning stroke several This is located behind the interior
With the ring nut (A) fig. 43 in position seconds later completes the wiping rear-view mirror fig. 44, in contact with
, the windscreen wiper is not operation. the windscreen and can measure the
activated. In position , the pause time amount of rain and, consequently,
between the strokes of the windscreen manage the automatic wiping mode of

42
the windscreen in accordance with the WARNING Keep the glass in the sensor restored. The failure of the sensor is
amount of water on the screen. area clean. indicated by the symbol lighting up
The rain sensor will be activated when on the display.
the ignition device is ENGINE. If no rain AUTOMATIC WIPING If the rain sensor malfunctions, the
is detected, the wiper will not carry Automatic wiping can be selected wiper mode can be modified according
out any strokes. If it is raining, the by selecting the rain sensor from the to the requirements. The malfunction
windscreen wiper moves according to display menu (see "Display screens" signal remain active during the
the amount of rain measured by the in the "Display" paragraph in the operation time of the sensor or until the
sensor. "Knowing the instrument panel" device is reset.
section) or on the Uconnect™ system When the car is stationary, if the
(see "Settings" in the "Vehicle mode" windscreen wiper is moving at
paragraph in the "Multimedia" section) maximum speed, it automatically
and turning the ring (A) fig. 43 in moves to a reduced speed. HI mode
position or . can be reactivated by moving the ring
These will be used to set the sensibility to a different position from and
level of the rain sensor: in position , then back or by moving the car.
the sensor has a lower sensitivity and To deactivate automatic wiping, turn
the windscreens will activate when the ring (B) to a position other than or
44 F0S1287 there is a significant amount of water . This deactivation prevents unwanted
on the windscreen, while in position , activation of the wipers when the car is
The device is able to recognise, the windscreen wipers will be activated started (i.e. when the windscreen glass
and automatically adjust itself in the by a minimum amount or measured is being washed by hand or the wipers
presence of the following conditions: rain. are stuck to the screen by ice).
presence of dirt on the surface (e.g. The activation of the automatic wiping
salt, dirt, etc.); Inhibition
will be notified to the driver by a single Moving the ignition device switch to
presence of streaks of water caused stroke.
by the worn windscreen wiper blades; the STOP position, leaving the ring nut
The same stroke will be visible every (A) in position or , when the car is
difference between day and night.
time the sensor sensitivity is increased, next started (ignition device switch to
The rain sensor will be deactivated only by rotating the ring nut from position
when the ignition device is turned to the ENGINE position), no wiping cycle
to position . occurs for system protection reasons.
STOP.
The "Smart Washing" function activates This temporary inhibition prevents
the normal washing cycle, after which unwanted activation of the wipers
the automatic wiping function is when the car is started (i.e. when the

43
 windscreen glass is being washed by stroke for each two strokes of the

KNOWING YOUR CAR

hand or the wipers are stuck to the windscreen wiper; IMPORTANT
screen by ice). With the ring in position , the wiper
8) Never use the screen wiper to remove
It is possible to reactivate the automatic active and reverse gear engaged, the
layers of snow or ice from the windscreen
wiping mode in three ways: wiper is activated in synchronous glass. In such conditions, the wiper
by turning the ring to the position mode. may be subjected to excessive stress
and then returning it to the or With the ring in position , the rear and the motor cut-out switch, which
window wiper is stopped. prevents operation for a few seconds, may
position;
intervene. If operation is not restored,
by moving the stalk upwards to the NOTE If automatic wiping mode is contact a Fiat Dealership.
MIST position; active and the sensor does not detect 9) Do not operate the windscreen wiper
upon exceeding the 5 km/h speed water, the rear window wiper will stays with the blades lifted from the windscreen.
and the sensor detects rain. still when the ring is turned to position 10) Do not activate the rain sensor when
. washing the car in an automatic car wash.
REAR WINDOW WIPER / 11) Make sure the device is switched off if
WASHER Push the stalk towards the dashboard there is ice on the windscreen glass.
This operates only with the ignition (rocking position) to activate the rear
device at ENGINE. window washer jet. Keep pushing
the lever to automatically activate PROGRAMMING THE
The ring (B) fig. 43 can be set to the
following positions: both the rear window washer jet and CLIMATE CONTROL
Wiper off
the rear window wiper with a single SYSTEM
movement. Releasing the stalk will
Intermittent wiping (where provided)
activate three strokes, as described for
Continuous wiping The system provides two types
the windscreen wiper.
Rear Window Wiper of remote climate control system
Turn the ring to (B) fig. 43 to operate programming:
the rear window wiper: WARNING timely start of the climate control
continuous: when the ring is in system: this can be activated through
position ; 26) If the window needs to be cleaned,
the dedicated smartphone app (where
intermittent: when the ring is in make sure the device is turned off or the provided). Refer to the "Connected
ignition device is in the STOP position. Services - Uconnect Services" chapter
position and the windscreen wiper
27) Driving with worn windscreen/rear in the "Multimedia" section.
wiper is stopped; window wiper blades is a serious risk, Programming of the climate control
synchronous: when the ring is in because visibility is reduced in bad
system with start time: This can be
position and the windscreen wiper is weather.
activated either through the dedicated
moving or set to AUTO. In this mode,
smartphone app (where provided) or
the rear window wiper makes one

44
by programming a start time using the heated windscreen where fitted) are How to start climate control system
Uconnect™ system (see "ENGINE" also activated. programming
in the"Vehicle mode" paragraph in the Select the programming function on
Programming the climate control
"Multimedia" section). the dedicated app (where provided.
system with start time
Failed climate control Refer to the "Multimedia" section) to
Select a time to start climate control
system programming start the climate control system on-
system programming using the
messages demand or select an climate control
Uconnect™ system or the dedicated
If the on-demand or programmed system programming start time on the
app (refer to the "Multimedia" section);
climate control system switch-on fails Uconnect™ system or dedicated app
the passenger compartment climate
or ends early, dedicated messages will (refer to the "Multimedia" section).
control system will remain active unless
be displayed on the instrument panel the ignition device is pressed; The doors of the car will lock, the
display. climate control system programming
The on-demand starting and
will start and the car will go into
How to use the programming of the climate control
ENGINE mode. If the climate control
climate control system system can be successful in the
system is started on-demand, the car
programming functions following conditions:
will remain in ENGINE mode for 15
Starting the climate control system Doors closed
minutes; if the climate control system is
Select the programming function on Bonnet closed
programmed to start at a certain time,
the dedicated app (where provided. Boot closed
the car will remain in ENGINE mode.
Refer to the "Multimedia" section). Hazard lights not active
Alarm not active NOTES
The passenger compartment climate In case of motor malfunction/fault,
control system will remain active for 15 Adequate 12V battery state of
charge the climate control system
minutes unless the ignition device is programming will be disabled.
pressed. Ignition device in the STOP position
Transmission in P position For safety reasons, both when the
This function can be activated twice climate control system is started on-
after which it is necessary to turn the If the start on-demand function has
not been activated twice demand or programmed with start
ignition device to ENGINE to allow time, the wipers are disabled when the
turning on the climate control system If the key is not inside the car
(necessary condition for programming function is active. For safety reasons,
app (where provided) on-demand the windows are disabled when the
again. the climate control system with start
time) climate control system is started on-
If the ambient temperature is lower demand.
than 4.5 °C when the function is In case of activation of the climate
started, the electric defrosters (heated control system on-demand, the sunroof
rear window, heated mirrors and and soft top are also disabled.

45
 Two 15-minute cycles of climate CLIMATE CONTROL use device (C) to adjust the diffuser

KNOWING YOUR CAR

control system operation are possible SYSTEM to the desired position (up / down / left
after which the ignition device must / right);
be turned to the ENGINE position to PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT AIR Central air vents
perform new start cycles.
DIFFUSERS (A) fig. 47 - Adjustable and directable
How to finish programming the central vents:
Side air diffusers
climate control system without use device (B) to adjust the diffuser
(A) fig. 45 - Fixed side air diffuser (driver
driving the car to the desired position (up / down / left
and passenger side).
If the climate control system starts / right);
up on time, select the end of charging
function on the dedicated app (where
provided. Refer to the "Multimedia"
section) or wait for the end of the start
cycle (about 15 minutes).
In case of programming the climate
control system with start time, finish
charging through the programming
function on the dedicated app (where
provided. Refer to the "Multimedia" 45 F0S1123
47 F0S1125
section).
How to stop climate control system
programming and drive the car
Programming can be interrupted
with time or start the climate control
system on time by moving the ignition
device to the START position. A
dedicated message will appears on the
instrument panel.
46 F0S1124

(B) - Adjustable side vents:

46
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
CONTROLS ON THE CLIMATE CONTROL FRONT PANEL

A B C D E F G H I

48 F0S1218

A. introduced air temperature up/down button B. climate control compressor on/off button C. air to feet button D. air to body
button E. window demisting/defrosting button F. rapid window defrosting/demisting on/off button G. heated rear window on/off
button H. internal air recirculation on/off button I. fan speed adjusting button

47
 CONTROLS ON Uconnect™ 10.25" SYSTEM DISPLAY

KNOWING YOUR CAR

(where provided)

49 F0S1219

There are graphic buttons on the Uconnect™ system that let you turn on the functions described in this paragraph.

48
CONTROLS ON Uconnect™ 7" SYSTEM DISPLAY
(where provided)

Off

50 F0S2069

There are graphic buttons on the Uconnect™ system that let you turn on the functions described in this paragraph.

49
 Description of the You can select the combination of When the outside temperature is low,

KNOWING YOUR CAR

controls several modes by pressing the buttons recirculation could be switched off (air
Air temperature in sequence. drawn from the outside) to prevent the
adjustment windows misting up.
Fan speed adjustment
Press the (A) fig. 48button: Press button (I) to increase/decrease To guarantee good air quality inside
press downwards: decrease the fan speed: the passenger compartment, every 15
temperature; minutes of recirculation, the system
press downwards: decrease speed;
press upwards: temperature rise. takes in air from outside for 1 minute
press upwards: increase speed.
By repeatedly pressing the (A) button and then returns to recirculation.
The speed is displayed on the A/C
upwards or downwards the HI screen of the Uconnect™ system. A Climate control
(maximum air temperature) and LO specific fan level can be selected by compressor
(minimum air temperature) functions are Press button (B) fig. 48 to
pressing the button :
switched on respectively. To turn these activate/deactivate the compressor.
functions off, ask for a numerical air maximum fan speed: all bars are lit
up; Switching off the compressor remains
temperature. stored even after the ignition device has
minimum fan speed: one bar is lit
Air distribution selection up. been turned to the STOP position.
You can manually set one of the
Air recirculation
following air distributions by pressing WARNING With the compressor off, air
the (C), (D), (E), (F) fig. 48 buttons on The air recirculation can be switched
cannot be introduced to the passenger
the dashboard or the graphic buttons on/off by pressing the button (H)
compartment with a temperature
located on the Uconnect™ system fig. 48.
lower than the external temperature.
display: Moreover, under certain environmental
Airflow at central and side WARNING The engagement of the conditions, windows could mist up
dashboard vents to ventilate the chest recirculation system makes it possible rapidly since the air is not dehumidified.
during the hot season. to reach the required heating/cooling
Airflow to the front and rear footwell conditions faster. It is, however,
Heated rear window
vents. This air distribution setting heats inadvisable to use it on rainy/cold days,
demisting/defrosting
the passenger compartment most or with low external temperatures, as
Press button (G) fig. 48 to
quickly, giving a prompt sensation of it would considerably increase the
activate heated rear window
warmth. possibility of the windows misting up
demisting/defrosting.
inside rapidly (especially if the climate
Air flow towards windscreen. Whenever the ignition device switches
control system is off).
Maximum windscreen defrosting. to the START position, the function
switches off automatically after approx.

50
10 minutes the first time it is activated. HEATER automatically (but can be reactivated
The following activations have a The heater activates automatically manually, if necessary).
duration of 5 minutes. depending on the environmental NOTE Some climate control system
If this function is provided, pressing conditions and with ignition device in functions may be unavailable in “Turtle”
the button also activates the START position. mode, in which case the LEDs on the
demisting/defrosting of door mirrors System maintenance buttons of the climate control system
and heated vents (where provided). controls will flash.
4)

In winter, the climate control system

WARNING Do not apply stickers to the must be turned on at least once a
inside of the heated rear window over IMPORTANT
month for about 10 minutes.
the heating filaments, to avoid damage
Before summer, have the system 4) The system uses R1234yf coolant,
that might cause them to stop working
checked at a Fiat Dealership. which does not pollute the environment
properly.
OPERATING in the event of accidental leakage. Under
no circumstances use R134a and R12
SWITCHING THE LIMITATIONS fluids, which are incompatible with the
CLIMATE CONTROL With the car in "SHERPA" or "TURTLE" components of the system.
SYSTEM OFF/BACK ON mode, climate control limitations are
Switching off the climate control automatically introduced to preserve
system the range.
Press the A/C button (B) fig. 48. In "SHERPA" mode, the climate control
system and the mirror and seat heater
With climate control system off:
are deactivated (but can be manually
air recirculation is on, thus isolating
reactivated, if necessary).
the passenger compartment from the
The "TURTLE" mode:
outside;
the compressor is off; Range from 8 to 24 km: The heated
the fan is off; rear window, mirrors, windscreen and
the heated rear window can be seats are deactivated automatically
activated/deactivated. (but can be reactivated manually, if
necessary).
Switching on the climate control Range lower than 8 km: The climate
system control system is deactivated, the fan
To turn the climate control system back and quick defrosting may be activated.
on press the A/C button (B) fig. 48. The heated rear window, mirrors,
windscreen and seats are deactivated

51
 AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

KNOWING YOUR CAR

CONTROLS ON THE CLIMATE CONTROL FRONT PANEL

51 F0S1126

A. temperature up/down button B. AUTO function activation button (automatic operation) C. climate control compressor on/off
button D. air to feet button E. air to body button F. window demisting/defrosting button G. rapid window defrosting/demisting
on/off button H. heated rear window on/off button I. internal air recirculation on/off button L. climate control system on/off
button M. fan speed adjusting button

52
CONTROLS ON Uconnect™ 10.25" SYSTEM DISPLAY
(where provided)

Comfort

52 F0S1127

There are graphic buttons on the Uconnect™ system that let you turn on the functions described in this paragraph.

53
 CONTROLS ON Uconnect™ 7" SYSTEM DISPLAY

KNOWING YOUR CAR

(where provided)

Off

53 F0S2070

There are graphic buttons on the Uconnect™ system that let you turn on the functions described in this paragraph.

54
Description of the compressor on/off, compatibly with In this way the system operates
controls environmental conditions; completely automatically to adjust the
Description variation of set temperature; temperature, quantity and distribution
The automatic climate control system heated rear window of the air introduced into the passenger
maintains comfort inside the passenger activation/deactivation. compartment. It also manages the air
compartment and compensates for The amount of air introduced into the recirculation system and the enabling
possible variations in outside weather passenger compartment is not affected the air conditioning compressor.
conditions. by car speed; it is electronically During automatic operation, you
The reference temperature is 22°C for controlled by a fan. can change the set temperatures,
optimal comfort management. The temperature of the air sent is activate/deactivate the rear window,
The automatically controlled always automatically controlled activate/deactivate the compressor and
parameters and functions are: according to the temperature set on the recirculation at any time by using
air temperature at the driver/front the display (except for when the system the relevant buttons; the system will
passenger side vents; is off or in certain conditions when the automatically change the settings to
air distribution at the driver/front compressor is not running). adjust to the new requirements.
passenger side vents; The system allows the following to be In this way the climate control system
fan speed (continuous variation of the set or adjusted manually: will continue to automatically manage
air flow); air temperature; all functions except for those that have
compressor engagement (for fan speed has 7 positions; been manually adjusted. The fan speed
cooling/dehumidifying the air); air distribution; is the same in all the zones of the
air recirculation. compressor enabling; passenger compartment.
All these functions can be adjusted rapid defrosting/ demisting function; Air temperature
manually by operating the system and air recirculation; adjustment
selecting one or more functions and heated rear window; Press the (A) fig. 51button:
modifying their parameters. system deactivation.
press downwards: decrease
Manual selections always have higher Operating mode temperature;
priority than automatic settings and The climate control system can press upwards: temperature rise.
are stored until the AUTO button is be activated in different ways: it is By repeatedly pressing the (A) button
pressed, except for cases in which the advisable to press the AUTO button upwards or downwards the HI
system intervenes for safety reasons. and press the button (A) fig. 51 to set (maximum air temperature) and LO
The following operations do not the desired temperatures. (minimum air temperature) functions are
deactivate the AUTO function: switched on respectively. To turn these
recirculation on/off;

55
 functions off, ask for a numerical air Fan speed adjustment To restore automatic system control

KNOWING YOUR CAR

temperature. Press button (M) to increase/decrease after one or more manual adjustments,
Air distribution selection the fan speed: press the AUTO button.
You can manually set one of the press downwards: decrease speed; Air recirculation
following air distributions by pressing press upwards: increase speed. The air recirculation can be switched
the (D), (E), (F), (G) fig. 51 buttons on The speed is displayed on the A/C on/off by pressing the button (I) fig. 51.
the dashboard or the graphic buttons screen of the Uconnect™ system. A
located on the Uconnect™ system specific fan level can be selected by
WARNING The engagement of the
display: pressing the button :
recirculation system makes it possible
Airflow at central and side maximum fan speed: all bars are lit to reach the required heating/cooling
dashboard vents to ventilate the chest up; conditions faster. It is, however,
during the hot season. minimum fan speed: one bar is lit inadvisable to use it on rainy/cold days,
Airflow to the front and rear footwell up. or with low external temperatures, as
vents. This air distribution setting heats it would considerably increase the
the passenger compartment most WARNING To restore automatic possibility of the windows misting up
quickly, giving a prompt sensation of control of the fan speed after a manual inside rapidly (especially if the climate
warmth. adjustment, press the AUTO button. control system is off).
Air flow towards windscreen.
Maximum windscreen defrosting. AUTO button When the outside temperature is low,
You can select the combination of When the AUTO button is pressed the recirculation could be switched off (air
several modes by pressing the buttons climate control system is automatically drawn from the outside) to prevent the
in sequence. adjusted in the corresponding zones: windows misting up.
In AUTO mode, the climate control quantity and distribution of the In automatic operation inside air
system automatically manages the air introduced into the passenger recirculation will be controlled
air distribution. The air distribution, compartment; automatically by the system according
when manually set, is displayed on the climate control compressor; to outside environmental conditions.
Uconnect™ system A/C screen. air recirculation;
Climate control
cancelling any previous manual
compressor
settings.
Press button (C) fig. 51 to
If a manual intervention is made on activate/deactivate the compressor.
the air distribution or on the fan speed Switching off the compressor remains
the climate control system is no longer stored even after the ignition device has
controlling all functions automatically. been turned to the STOP position.

56
To restore automatic control of that might cause them to stop working HEATER
compressor engagement, press again properly. The heater activates automatically
button (C) or the AUTO button (B) depending on the environmental
fig. 51. SWITCHING THE conditions and with ignition device in
CLIMATE CONTROL the START position.
WARNING With the compressor off, air SYSTEM OFF/BACK ON System maintenance
cannot be introduced to the passenger Switching off the climate control 5)
compartment with a temperature system
In winter, the climate control system
lower than the external temperature. Press the OFF button (L) fig. 51.
must be turned on at least once a
Moreover, under certain environmental With climate control system off: month for about 10 minutes.
conditions, windows could mist up air recirculation is on, thus isolating
rapidly since the air is not dehumidified. Before summer, have the system
the passenger compartment from the checked at a Fiat Dealership.
outside;
Heated rear window the compressor is off; OPERATING
demisting/defrosting the fan is off; LIMITATIONS
Press button (H) fig. 51 to the heated rear window can be With the car in "SHERPA" or "TURTLE"
activate heated rear window activated/deactivated. mode, climate control limitations are
demisting/defrosting. The climate control system control unit automatically introduced to preserve
Whenever the ignition device switches stores the temperatures set before the the range.
to the START position, the function system was switched off and restores In "SHERPA" mode, the climate control
switches off automatically after approx. them when any button of the system is system and the mirror and seat heater
10 minutes the first time it is activated. pressed. are deactivated (but can be manually
The following activations have a reactivated, if necessary).
Switching on the climate control
duration of 5 minutes. The "TURTLE" mode:
system
If this function is provided, pressing Range from 24 to 8 km: The heated
To switch on the climate control
the button also activates rear window, mirrors, windscreen and
system in fully automatic mode press
demisting/defrosting of door mirrors seats are deactivated automatically
the AUTO button (B) fig. 51.
and heated vents (where provided). (but can be reactivated manually, if
necessary).
Range lower than 8 km: The climate
WARNING Do not apply stickers to the
control system is deactivated, the fan
inside of the heated rear window over
and quick defrosting may be activated.
the heating filaments, to avoid damage
The mirror, windscreen and seat heater

57
 are deactivated (but can be manually

KNOWING YOUR CAR

reactivated, if necessary).
NOTE Some climate control system
functions may be unavailable in “Turtle”
mode, in which case the LEDs on the
buttons of the climate control system
controls will flash.

IMPORTANT 54 F0S1095 55 F0S1177

5) The system uses R1234yf coolant, Press and hold the button for a few WINDOW
which does not pollute the environment seconds and the window winds down OPENING/CLOSING BY
in the event of accidental leakage. Under automatically. Where provided, keeping MEANS OF A KEY WITH
no circumstances use R134a and R12
the button raised for a few seconds, REMOTE CONTROL
fluids, which are incompatible with the
components of the system. will automatically wind the window up. (where provided)
CLOSING WITH PASSIVE On some versions, the windows can be
ENTRY opened/closed by holding the unlock
ELECTRIC WINDOWS ( ) / lock ( ) buttons pressed,
(where provided)
28) 29) On some versions equipped with respectively.
They work with the ignition device in Passive Entry, pressing the door lock ANTI-PINCH DEVICE
the ENGINE position and for about button (C) fig. 55 the windows close (where provided)
three minutes after the ignition device automatically as long as the lock button According to the versions, the car is
has been turned to the STOP position. is pressed by the user. equipped with an anti-pinch safety
When one of the front doors is opened function for the raising of the front
this operation is disabled. windows.
The electric window control buttons This safety system can recognise the
are located on the armrest of the door presence of any obstacle during the
panel and activate fig. 54: window closing movement. If this
(A) Opening/closing of the left window. occurs, the system stops the window's
(B) Opening/closing of the right movement and reverts it, depending on
window. its position.

58
This device is also useful if the windows by personal objects getting caught in the
are activated accidentally by children mechanism or by being hit by it directly.
on board the car. 29) When leaving the car, always set the
The anti-pinch safety function is ignition device in the STOP position and
take the electronic key with you to avoid
activated both during the manual and the risk of injury of people still on board A
the automatic operation of the window. due to accidental operation of the power
When the anti-pinch system is windows.
activated the window travel is 30) If the anti-pinch protection intervenes
three consecutive times in one minute or
immediately interrupted. Then the
is faulty, the automatic closing operation
window stroke is automatically of the window is inhibited, only allowing it 56 F0S1269
inverted. in "steps"; the button is released for the
30)
subsequent manoeuvre. In order to restore SUNROOF
the correct operation of the system, the (where provided)
ELECTRIC WINDOWS respective window must be wound down.
31)
SYSTEM INITIALISATION
If power supply is interrupted when 12) 13) 14)
ROOF To move the sunshade, follow the
the window is moving, the electric
window automatic operation must be FIXED GLASS SUNROOF instructions in “fixed glass roof”.
reinitialised. The initialisation procedure (where provided) Opening
described below must be carried out The roof comprises a wide fixed Press button (A) located near the front
with the doors closed and for each glass panel and a manually-operated ceiling light pressed fig. 57, to move
door: sunshade. The blind can be used in the the roof to “vent” position. With the roof
fully close the window to be "all closed" or "all open" positions. open in “vent” position, hold button (A)
initialised, with manual operation; To open the blind, grab the handle, pressed again to move the roof to all
after the window has reached the press the tooth (A) fig. 56 and move it open position.
upper end of travel, hold the up button to the completely open position.
down for at least 3 seconds. To close it, grab the grip and move the
blind to the closed position until catch
(A) is attached.
WARNING

28) Improper use of the electric windows

can be dangerous. Before and during their
operation, ensure that any passengers are
not at risk from the moving glass either

59
 after full closing, wait for the sunroof

KNOWING YOUR CAR

motor to stop. WARNING

EMERGENCY OPERATION 31) When leaving the car, make sure

A B If the electrical device for moving the to take the key with you to avoid the
roof fails, the sunroof can be moved risk of injury to those still inside the
manually proceeding as described car due to accidental operation of the
sunroof. Improper use of the roof can be
below: dangerous. Before and during operation,
always check that no-one is exposed to
the risk of being injured by the moving
57 F0S1330 sunroof or by objects getting caught or hit
by it.
Closing
Press button (B) fig. 57 from the all
IMPORTANT
open position: the front glass panel will
move into the “vent” position. Press
12) You are advised to use the sunroof
button (B) again to reach the all closed only at "vent" position if a transverse roof
position of the roof. rack is fitted.
58 F0S1331
13) Do not open the sunroof if there is
ANTI-PINCH DEVICE
snow or ice on it: you may damage it.
The sunroof has an anti-pinch safety for manual activation remove the 14) Be careful not to hit objects on the roof
system capable of detecting the protective cap (A) fig. 58 from its rack when you open the tailgate.
presence of an obstacle whilst the roof housing which is located on the internal
is closing. When this happens, the covering behind the sunshade
system stops and the movement of the take the hex wrench provided from
roof is immediately reversed. the tool bag in the boot
INITIALISATION insert the key provided into housing
PROCEDURE (B) fig. 58and turn it clockwise to open
the roof or anticlockwise to close the
The sunroof must be reinitialised after
roof.
disconnecting the 12V battery or if the
corresponding protective fuse is blown.
Proceed as follows:
keep the button (B) fig. 57 pressed
so that the roof closes completely in
stages

60
SOFT TOP SOFT TOP MOVEMENT
32) 33) 34)
(where provided)
The cabrio versions are provided with 15) 16) 17)
A B
an automatically actuated electric soft
top. WARNING The motor may overheat
The soft top can be opened and closed if the soft top is repeatedly operated
using the controls inside the car within a short space of time, thus
located near the ceiling light or the causing the overheating protection to
remote control buttons. The soft top inhibit system operation. Wait for a
60
can also be closed using the "Passive minute and repeat. F0S1317

Entry" system.
Closing
The soft top can be automatically Opening Press button (B) fig. 60 from the all
opened from the closed position to the By pressing the button (A) located open position, the soft top will move
spoiler position, and from this position near the front fig. 60 ceiling light for into the “spoiler” position. By pressing
to the all open position fig. 59. more than half a second, the soft the button again (B) the soft top can be
top will automatically move to the all closed for more than half a second
"spoiler" position (automatic opening). (automatic closing). From the "spoiler"
By pressing the button for a shorter position, by pressing the button for
time, the soft top will move "jerky" to a shorter time, the soft top will move
the "spoiler" position (manual opening). "jerky" to the all closed position (manual
With the soft top automatically open closing). From the all open position to
in “spoiler” position, hold button (A) the "spoiler" position, only automatic
pressed again to move the soft top to movement is allowed.
59
all open position. From the "spoiler"
F0S1268
position until all open, only automatic Opening the tailgate with top all
movement is allowed. open
Suggestions
Press the tailgate opening button (F)
it is advisable to close the soft top
fig. 61 once to automatically close the
when the car is parked. The closed soft
roof to spoiler position. The tailgate can
top effectively protects the car from
be opened in spoiler position.
bad weather and from theft;
it is advisable to put valuables in the
boot and lock the lid even when the
soft top is closed.

61
 The soft top can be operated at any Do not keep the soft top folded for

KNOWING YOUR CAR

temperature in the range from -18 to a long time: this could cause folds and
+80 °C. creases in the fabric.
If required, remove the 12V battery Before moving the soft top, check
with the soft top either open or closed, that there is enough room to carry out
but NOT while it is moving. the operation and that there are no
Do not fix roof racks to the soft top obstacles or people close to its moving
and do not travel with objects resting parts.
on the open top. The cooled air flow into the
61 F0S1102
The activation of the heated rear passenger compartment may decrease
windscreen, upon request by the if the automatic climate control system
OPERATION BY MEANS OF user, is carried out only if the soft is on and the soft top is not completely
REMOTE CONTROL top is completely closed. If the soft closed.
The remote control can only be used top is closed incorrectly, the heated With the soft top open and the car
with the ignition device in the STOP rear window will not function and the travelling, the voice recognition system
position and the doors closed. corresponding warning light will not may not recognise voice commands
The soft top can only be moved using turn on. because of the background noise:
the remote control when it is between When the soft top is opened using with the soft top closed and at a high
the all closed position and the spoiler the relevant control, if the heated rear speed, the voice function for number
position. It is not possible to move windscreen had been engaged it is dialling may not be recognised.
the soft top if it is between the spoiler automatically deactivated and the ANTI-PINCH DEVICE
position and the all open position. warning light switches off The soft top has an anti-pinch safety
Do not remove ice from the soft top system capable of detecting the
Continuously pressing the button
with a sharp item. presence of an obstacle during the
on the key, the roof opens and stops
To prevent damage, do not use closing movement: if this happens, the
in any position when the button is
scrapers or sprays to remove ice from system intervenes and the movement
released.
the heated rear window. of the soft top is immediately reversed
WARNINGS Do not put objects on the soft top: into opening.
The horizontal and vertical parts of they could fall if the it is operated, After five consecutive activations of the
the soft top can be operated at any causing damage and injury. anti-pinching function in one minute,
speed lower than 100 and 80 km/h It is advisable to cover the soft top the soft top must be recalibrated. For
respectively. with a protective sheet if the car is left recalibration, see the "Initialisation
parked in the open for a long time. procedure" paragraph.

62
CLOSING WITH PASSIVE ENTRY take the key (A) fig. 63 provided and as described in the “Boot” chapter
(where provided) located in the boot in combination with of the “Knowing your car” section,
If the car is equipped with Passive the tool bag or the Fix&Go kit; then manually move the soft top as
Entry function, by pressing the door described above.
lock button (C) fig. 62 the soft top will To restore the automatic movement
close as long as the user holds down conditions, apply to Fiat Dealership.
the lock button. INITIALISATION
PROCEDURE
WARNING The soft top can only be A The soft top must be reinitialised after
moved from "Passive Entry" when disconnecting the 12V battery or if the
the soft top is between the all closed corresponding protective fuse is blown.
position and the spoiler position. It is Proceed as follows:
not possible to move the soft top if it is 63 F0S1311
with the ignition device in the
between the spoiler position and the all ENGINE position, keep the opening
open position. fit the key in position, visible from
button pressed until the soft top is
inside the boot beneath the parcel shelf
completely open;
in the point shown in fig. 64;
when the soft top is completely
turn: clockwise to open the soft top;
open, keep the button pressed for at
anticlockwise to close it.
least 2 seconds;
keep the closing button pressed until
the soft top is completely closed;
once the all closed position has been
reached, continue to press the button
until the soft top makes a full opening
and closing run.
62 F0S1177 If the soft top is already initialized, the
A user can perform a new initialisation by
EMERGENCY OPERATION the following steps:
If the buttons fail, the soft top can 64 F0S1344
keep the opening button pressed
be moved manually proceeding as until the soft top is completely open;
described below: If the tailgate fails to open because the
when the soft top is completely
12V battery is flat, or following a fault
open, keep the button pressed for at
in the tailgate electric lock, perform the
emergency tailgate opening procedure

63
 least 30 seconds (to force the loss of re-position the backrest correctly; the

KNOWING YOUR CAR

initialisation); Wind Stop is locked between the seat
keep the closing button pressed until and parcel shelf.
the soft top is completely closed;
FRONT SPOILER
once the all closed position has been
The car is provided with a front spoiler
reached, continue to press the button
which can be raised to improve
until the soft top makes a full opening
aerodynamic comfort inside the
and closing run.
passenger compartment.
WIND STOP To lift the spoiler, release the catch
The Wind Stop fig. 65 is designed to by means of the slider (A) moving it to 67 F0S1320

improve driving comfort, by reducing position (2) as shown in fig. 66

air turbulence in the passenger It is advisable to raise the spoiler when
With the spoiler raised, take care not to
compartment when travelling with the the horizontal segment of the top
move the slider (A) from position (1) to
soft top down. is open and at speeds faster than
position (2).
To use the Wind Stop fig. 65: 50 km/h.
With the top completely open, it is
advisable to keep the spoiler lowered
to limit wind noise inside the passenger
1 compartment.
Raising the spoiler will reduce the flow
2 of air to the rear seats.
A WASHING/CLEANING
THE SOFT TOP
66 F0S1319 18) 19) 20) 21) 22) 23) 24) 25)

65 F0S1318 Use of specific products is

To lower the spoiler, press and move recommended for washing the soft top
Release the backrest of the rear seat the slider to position fig. 67 to lock it cloth.
(single or split). once the slider’s catch is positioned The soft top fabric is treated with a
Attach the Wind Stop by inserting inside its housing (1) fig. 66. special water-repellent, waterproof
the central part inside the rear screen product. The water-repellent properties
guard, with the concave part in the will degrade in time with exposure to
direction of the passenger, as shown in the weather elements. Observe the
fig. 65; following instructions.

64
Remove as much dirt from the surface Use common, care mild stain removers 18) Bird droppings and plant resins must
of the soft top with a soft brush or that can be purchased from car be washed off immediately and thoroughly
vacuum cleaning before washing cleaning product ranges to remove from the soft top as the acid they contain
it. This operation will considerably more stubborn stains. Apply by blotting is particularly aggressive.
19) Never use high-pressure washing
improve the final result. (never rubbing) directly on the area of
systems.
In lack of specific products, use water the stain. 20) When using steam washers or
and neutral soap applied with a sponge high-pressure water washers, maintain
(preferably in the shade) for washing. a suitable distance and do not exceed a
Rinse the soft top with clean water after WARNING maximum temperature of 60°C. Damage,
alterations and water infiltration may
having eliminated all the stains. occur if the distance is too small and the
Hand washing is recommended; 32) Keep hands away from the top pressure is too high.
modern automatic washing systems mechanism while opening and closing the 21) If a water jet is used, direct away
equipped with soft brushes which top or if the top stops in a position before from the edges of the fabric and the rear
completing the cycle to prevent damage window frame to prevent water infiltration.
do not apply excessive pressure and and injury. 22) Never use alcohol, petrol, chemical
employ specific soft top products may 33) Keep children away from the area in products, detergents, stain removers, wax,
be used. which the top is folding during opening or solvents and "wash and polish" products.
Leave the car in the shade after closing operations. 23) Rinse immediately to remove soap
washing avoiding direct sunlight. 34) When leaving the car, turn the ignition to prevent stains. Repeat the operation if
device to STOP and always take the needed.
Waterproofing the soft top electronic key with you to avoid the risk of 24) Follow the instructions on the
Use specific waterproofing products for injury due to accidental operation of the waterproofing product container for
soft top. Improper use may be dangerous. perfect results.
fabric soft tops. Before and during operation, always check 25) The rubber seals on the soft top
Interior soft top fabric that no-one is at risk of being injured by must be cleaned exclusively with water.
the moving soft top or by objects getting If you notice that this trim is dry or is
Remove dust with a soft brush. Avoid caught and dragged by it.
using hard brushes made of synthetic sticking, apply talcum powder or products
specifically for rubber trim (silicone spray).
material to prevent damaging the fabric
beyond repair. IMPORTANT
Clean the surface with a microfibre
cloth or soft sponge dipped in a 15) Never open the top in presence of
snow or ice to prevent damage.
solution of water and neutral soap.
16) Do not place objects on the rear
Clean the entire surface, including the window shelf to prevent damage while the
zones where cleaning is not needed, to top is closing.
prevent staining. 17) Loads may not be secured on the roof.

65
 BOOT fig. 68 if a valid key is detected near the

KNOWING YOUR CAR

rear of the car.
35) 36)
A handle (B) fig. 69 is provided inside
ELECTRIC HANDLE the tailgate to make it easier to close.
(SOFT TOUCH)
The tailgate can be opened at any time
if the doors are unlocked.
To open it, enable the handle, opening
one of the front doors or unlocking the
doors with the remote control. 68 F0S1102

Operate the electric handle (F) fig. 68

to open the tailgate. Opening the tailgate with soft top
To release the lock with the remote all open
control, press button . Pressing the tailgate opening one-
69 F0S1332
For cars with the Passive Entry touch button (F) fig. 68 to automatically
system, even if the doors are locked, close the soft top to spoiler position. EMERGENCY TAILGATE
the boot can be opened using the The tailgate can be opened in spoiler OPENING
electric handle (F) with a valid key position. To open the tailgate from the inside if
detected near the rear of the car. the 12V battery in the car is flat or the
To close, use the handle located WARNING It is not possible to open electric lock on the tailgate is faulty,
inside the tailgate. the boot if the soft top has not been proceed as follows:
If the tailgate is not shut properly the initialised. Carry out the soft top take out the rear head restraints;
dedicated instrument panel or colour initialisation procedure as described in tilt the backrests;
display warning light (where provided) the section "Initialisation procedure" in to unlock the tailgate mechanically,
will switch on. the chapter "Soft top" in this section. working from the inside of the boot,
remove the protective yellow cap and
CLOSING then use lever (A) fig. 70.
To close, lower the tailgate by pressing
near the lock until you hear it click.
For cars equipped with the Passive
Entry system, the boot and all doors
can be locked with the button (G)

66
 inside a special bag, placed in the move the lever (B) fig. 73 leftwards as
boot. shown in the figure;

WARNING

35) Never exceed the maximum permitted

load in the boot; see the “Technical
specifications” section. Also make sure
that the objects you place in the boot have
70 F0S1312 been properly secured, to avoid them from
being thrown forward consequent to sharp
CARGO BOX (mode braking and injuring your passengers. 73 F0S1146
2 cable and mode 3 36) Be careful not to hit objects on the roof
cable) rack when you open the tailgate.
raise the bonnet completely: the
Cargo box for Mode 2 cable operation is facilitated by the presence
The car is equipped with a "Mode 2" BONNET of two gas springs which hold it the all
230 Volt AC (A) fig. 71 charging cable open position.
located inside a special box placed in 37) 38) 39)
Do not tamper with the gas shock
the boot. OPENING absorber and accompany the bonnet
Proceed as follows: while lifting it.
pull the lever (A) fig. 72 in the CLOSING
direction indicated by the arrow; To close, lower the bonnet to
approximately 20 centimetres from
the motor compartment then let it
drop. Make sure that the bonnet
is completely closed and not only
fastened by the locking device by trying
to open it. If it is not perfectly closed,
71 F0S1265 do not try to press the bonnet down
but open it and repeat the procedure.
Cargo box for Mode 3 cable IMPORTANT Always check that the
(optional) bonnet is closed correctly to prevent
72 F0S1129
The car may be equipped with a
"Mode 3" charging cable , located

67
 it from opening while the vehicle is INTERIOR FITTINGS
KNOWING YOUR CAR
travelling.
STORAGE
COMPARTMENTS
40)
WARNING
Lower compartment
37) Be very careful not to allow scarves, To open the bottom drawer, pull the
neck ties and other loose articles of lever (A) fig. 74. The flap opens down
clothing from touching, even accidentally,
any moving parts. This may cause the automatically.
clothing to be pulled into the part, resulting 75 F0S1131

in serious risk to the wearer.

38) For safety reasons, the bonnet must WARNING On both sides of the
always be properly closed while driving.
Therefore, make sure that the bonnet passenger side sun visor there is a
is properly closed and that the lock is label advising that it is compulsory to
engaged. If you discover that the bonnet deactivate the airbag if a rear facing
is not perfectly closed while driving, stop child restraint system is fitted. Always
immediately and close the bonnet in the comply with the instructions on the sun
correct manner.
visor (see the "Supplementary Restraint
39) Use both hands to lift the bonnet.
Before lifting, check that the windscreen 74 F0S1130 System (SRS) - Airbag" chapter in the
wiper arms are not raised from the "Safety" section).
windscreen, that the car is stationary and SUN VISORS
that the parking brake is applied. They are located at the sides of the USB INPUT
interior rear-view mirror (fig. 75). (where provided)
They can be adjusted forwards and The car can be equipped with three
sideways. USB ports. The port located on
To direct the visor laterally, detach the the dashboard ((A) fig. 76) for data
visor from the interior rear-view mirror transfer to the Uconnect™ system
side support and turn it towards the and for charging external devices, the
side window. USB port inside the central console
Courtesy mirrors are located on the ((B) fig. 77) and on the dashboard,
back of the sun visors. next to the smartphone holder (where
provided) (D) fig. 78 for charging
external devices only.

68
 WARNING After using a USB charging COMPARTMENT ON
port, we recommend disconnecting the CENTRAL TUNNEL
device (smartphone), always removing
the cable from the port of the car first,
never from the device. Cables left
flying or connected incorrectly could
compromise correct recharging and/or
the USB socket condition.

76 F0S1137 NOTE The USB port handles

data transmission from the Pen
Drive/Smartphone, etc. and slow 79 F0S1133
recharging of an external device, which
is not guaranteed as it depends on the In the central tunnel there is a storage
device type/brand. compartment. To access it, grab the
handle (A) fig. 79 and push the cover
POWER SOCKET
back. A second USB port is provided
This is located on the central console
inside the compartment on some
and only works with the ignition device
versions.
in the ENGINE position. To use it, open
cap (C) fig. 77.
77 F0S1132
On versions provided with "smoker's
kit" optional equipment, the cigar lighter
is fitted instead of the power socket.
D
WARNING Do not connect devices
with power higher than 180W to the
socket. Do not damage the socket by
using unsuitable adaptors.

78 F0S1228

69
 FRONT ARMREST the control mutes the system, a long

KNOWING YOUR CAR

(where provided) press turns it off.
(B) - e-MODE. push or pull the lever
to select the different driving modes
(NORMAL, RANGE, SHERPA).

81 F0S1134

80 F0S1328

There may be an armrest with 83 F0S1136

integrated storage compartment
between the front seats. SMARTPHONE MOUNT
To access the compartment, pull the (CRADLE)
lever upwards (A) fig. 80 and lift the (where provided)
armrest. There is a mount (A) fig. 84 on the
CUP HOLDERS / CANS 82 F0S1135 dashboard for your smartphone;
AND HOLDERS always use it in order to interact with
On the central tunnel there are two There is also a storage compartment your smartphone safely.
cup/can holders, a retractable one on on the back (C) fig. 82.
the front part of the armrest ((A) fig. 81) VOLUME AND "e-MODE"
and one on the back ((B) fig. 82). ADJUSTMENT
To access the front cup holder/can CONTROLS A
holder open the door using the handle There are the following controls (fig. 83)
(A) fig. 81. on the central console:
(A) - VOL: Turn the wheel up or down
to turn volume up or down of the
Uconnect™system. A short press on
84 F0S1210

70
WIRELESS CHARGING (A) fig. 86indicating the state of the progress after having placed the phone
SYSTEM– WCPM wireless charging system: in the charging compartment.
(Wireless Charge Pad "Your phone is being charged" blue
Module) LED: this is displayed when the mobile Correct positioning of the mobile
(where provided) phone is positioned correctly in the phone
The wireless charger system is wireless charging compartment and the To start charging wirelessly correctly,
activated automatically when a mobile system is activated correctly; make sure your mobile phone is
phone Qi® standard compatible is "Phone fully charged" green LED: positioned completely within the green
placed in the storage compartment (A) this is displayed when the phone has dotted area in fig. 86 with the display
in fig. 85 on the central tunnel. completed charging its battery (if facing up and that the device does not
suitable to transmit the information); cover the alert LED (A).
"Object not allowed" red LED: this Correct positioning: see fig. 87 (the
is displayed when a phone that is not LED identifies the positioning limit of
enabled for wireless charging or an the device);
object that is not permitted (e.g. the incorrect positioning: see fig. 88;
ignition key) is placed (e.g. ignition key,
credit card, a coin);
"System error" red LED: this appears
when there is a malfunction in the
wireless charger system;
85 F0S1138
"System not active" LED off: there
If the mobile phone is removed from are no objects in the compartment
the housing during the wireless and/or the ignition device of the car in
charging phase, this will automatically the OFF position and/or the doors are
be interrupted. not all closed correctly and the motor is
not on. 86 F0S1360
The wireless charging system is
enabled when the car is in running
condition and the vehicle battery is WARNING Do not place contactless
sufficiently charged. cards (RFID), credit cards or metal
By interacting with the wireless charger objects in the charging compartment.
system and placing the mobile phone
in the specific housing, the user will WARNING Not all mobile phone covers
be informed by means from LED guarantee the correct charging of
the phone. Check that charging is in

71
 ROOF RACK/SKI
KNOWING YOUR CAR
WARNING
RACK
41) 42) 43) 41) Fully comply with the regulations in
force concerning maximum clearance.
26) 27)
Never exceed the maximum permitted
FASTENERS loads (see "Technical specifications"
section).
The fasteners are located in the zone 42) Evenly distribute the load and take
indicated in fig. 89. into account, when driving, the increased
Two use the attachments, two responsiveness of the car to side wind.
87 F0S1361
threaded nuts (A) are provided, which After travelling for a few kilometres, check
to ensure that the fixing screws for the
can be reached when the door is open. attachments are well tightened.
43) Before driving, make sure that the
transversal bars have been fitted properly.

IMPORTANT

26) The use of transversal roof bars

prevents the use of the sunroof, because
the latter, while opening, interferes with the
bars. Therefore do not move the sunroof if
88 F0S1362 transversal bars have been fitted.
89 F0S1336
27) The maximum load on the roof rack is
50 kg.
WARNING WARNING Follow the instructions
contained in the assembly kit carefully.
40) Do not travel with the storage Assembly must be performed by
compartments open: they may injure the qualified personnel.
front seat occupants in the event of an
accident.
WARNING Travelling with the rack/ski
rack fitted impacts on the life of the
high-voltage battery.

72
RED SPECIAL
SERIES
(where provided)
Some components of the
car underwent antimicrobial
treatments, as detailed below. No
specific precautions are required
for the normal use of the car and
components treated with biocide
substances.
The boot mat was treated with a
biocide substance having antiviral
properties based on the active
ingredient Silver Chloride.
The seat fabrics were treated with
a biocide substance having antiviral
and antibacterial properties based on
the active ingredient Alkyl (C12-C16)
Dimethylbenzyl Ammonium Chloride.
The steering wheel upholstery was
treated with biocide substances having
antibacterial and antifungal properties
based on the active ingredients Zinc
Pyrithione and Thiabendazole.
The air cleaner of the climate control
system was treated with a biocide
substance having antibacterial and
antiviral properties based on the active
ingredient Dimethyltetradecyl[3-
(trimethoxysilyl)propyl]ammonium
chloride.

73
 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
This section of the handbook provides INSTRUMENT PANEL
all information that is useful for getting FEATURES.................................. 75
to know, interpreting, and using the DISPLAY ..................................... 76
instrument panel correctly. WARNING LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES ................................ 84

74
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
 

B B

A A

D C
90 F0S1070

A. Warning lights B. Engaged gear, seat belt status and status of driver assistance and active safety systems notification area C.
Speedometer D. Multi-function dial indicator: speedometer and driver assistance system indication

75
 DISPLAY
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL MAIN SCREEN
A B

D
OFF

I C
L

H D
G F E
91 F0S1071

The main screen fig. 91 shows the following information:

A. Driving assistance system in operation indicator B. Traffic sign and speed limit indicator C. Driving style indicator D. Signalling
symbols E. Distance travelled indicator F. Compass G. Temperature indicator H. Warning symbols I. High-voltage battery state
of charge and range

76
A - Driving assistance and active B - High-voltage battery charge settings) and an indicator that indicates
safety system notifications state of charge and range any changes in expected range:
This position displays the status by means of an up arrow and
icons of the various functions (where A B a blue bar if the current driving style
provided), such as ACC (Adaptive increases the range;
Cruise Control), AEB Control by means of a down arrow and
(Autonomous Emergency Brake a red bar if the current driving style
Control) or Lane Control, active safety decreases the range.
systems, such as ESC (Electronic In case the driving style does not
Stability Control), TSR (Traffic Sign change the range, no graphic signals
Recognition) and ISA (Intelligent Speed are displayed.
Assist) and thumbnails of the driving aid C - Failure icons
systems. 92 F0S1072 All failure icons are displayed in this
Refer to the "Starting and Driving" position. In case of multiple failures, the
section for more information about In this position the state of charge of display will be in succession.
driving assistance systems. the high-voltage battery is indicated D - External temperature
Refer to the "Safety" section for more by a percentage and a vertical bar The external temperature is displayed
information about active safety devices. of height proportional to the state of in °C or °F depending on the display
charge of the battery (A) fig. 92. Both settings.
indications are coloured according to Notifications bar
the state of charge:
The lower part of the display is
range greater than 24 km: blue reconfigurable via the display menu.
range between 24 km and 16 km:
The following information can be
yellow
displayed on the left hand side: external
range lower than 16 km: red
temperature (default setting), time,
When charging via a power socket, date, compass (where provided) and
the vertical bar is coloured green and car speed repeat (where provided).
the symbols and (B) fig. 92 In the centre zone: odometer (default
appear. The height of the vertical bar is setting), Audio information (where
proportional to the state of charge of provided), Phone information (where
the battery. provided), time, external temperature,
The estimated remaining range is date, compass (where provided) and
indicated by a numerical value (in km car speed repetition (where provided).
or miles, depending on the display

77
 On the right side: time (default setting), (B): Alternative display of the state position, which can also be displayed

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

odometer, external temperature, date, of charge indicator and charging at the top of the display.
compass (where provided), car status conditions of the high-voltage battery. H - Odometer
(ON, OFF, RUN). Kilometres or miles travelled
E - Multifunctional dial indicator B (depending on the display settings) are
and driving assistance system displayed in position (H) fig. 91.
notifications I - Amber notification or failure
indication icons
The amber notification icons (e.g. brake
A B
pedal pressure request) or failure signal
A C icons are displayed in succession (in
case of several notifications) in position
70
(I) fig. 91.
94 F0S1075 L - Energy management
km/h km/h
Through the display customisation
Pressing and releasing the controls on functions (see "Display Settings"
the steering wheel / will open section), the energy management can
93 F0S1074 an alternative display that indicates the be displayed on the graduated scale (L)
driving mode instead of speed. The fig. 91:
The following are displayed in this driving style is indicated in real-time by
position: "POWER": the left side of the
a cursor that can be positioned in the indicator turns orange in proportion to
(A) fig. 93The current speed and following areas (see fig. 94):
whether one of the speed control the power required by the electric
(A) "CHARGE": regeneration mode. motor.
systems (Cruise Control, Adaptive (B) "ECO": energy-saving driving.
Cruise Control, Traffic Sign Recognition "CHARGE": the right side of the
(C) "POWER": more energy-efficient indicator turns turquoise in proportion
and Intelligent Speed Assist) is active. performance driving.
The round bar also provides visual to the amount of regeneration of the
F - "Compass (where provided) high-voltage battery.
signals for particular states of the For versions with Uconnect™ system
selected speed control system. Refer "ECO": the indicator turns orange
with integrated navigator, in position (F) and turquoise to indicate energy-saving
to the "Starting and Driving" section fig. 91 the direction the car is travelling
for more information about driving driving.
in is shown in real-time.
assistance systems.
G - Speedometer
The instantaneous speed of the car
(in km/h or mph) is displayed in this

78
M - Gear engaged notifications, CONTROL BUTTONS DISPLAY PAGES
headlight alignment and SBR (Seat These are located on the left side of the You can navigate through the following
Belt Reminder) steering wheel fig. 95. main and detail screens using the
In position (M) fig. 91 the following They can be used to scroll through the controls on the left side of the steering
information is displayed: display screens. wheel:
driving mode ("NORMAL", "RANGE", Screenshot list
"SHERPA");
gear engaged (D, N, R, P); Main screen
headlight alignment; By pressing and releasing /
electrical system readiness at start- the user can choose to display:
up ("READY") warning; the multifunction dial indicator
showing the speed of the car
SBR (Seat Belt Reminder) system
or:
notifications. Refer to the “SBR system”
the use of motor power or the
chapter in the “Safety” section for more
state of charge of the high-voltage
information. battery
95 F0S1139
N - TSR and ISA system indication
(where provided) / : Press and release the Trip A/B
Traffic Signal Recognition (TSR) speed buttons to access the main menu and Press and release / :
limit alerts set on the Intelligent Speed to scroll the menu and the submenus Trip A
Assist (ISA) system are shown in rightwards or leftwards. / Trip B
position (N) fig. 91. After selecting the desired screen,
O - Cruise Control / Adaptive Driver assist
press the or button to access
Cruise Control / Speed Limiter any detail screens.
/ Intelligent Speed Assist target Vehicle info
OK: Press the button to interact with
speed setting Press and release / :
the screens. Press the button once
(where provided) Tyre pressure
to confirm your selection. Hold the
The desired speed signal, set on Cruise Service (scheduled servicing)
button pressed for 1 second to reset
Control, Adaptive Cruise Control, the displayed/selected functions.
Speed Limiter and Intelligent Speed Audio repeat
Assist systems is displayed in position
(O) fig. 91. Phone repeat

Repeat navigation

79
 following driving aid systems in area (A)

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Recorded messages fig. 97:
CC (Cruise Control)
/ Tutorials Co-Driver with Follow to Stop or Co-
Driver with Stop&Go;
Settings
Lane Control;
In the case of multiple screens,
TSR (Traffic Sign Recognition);
indicates the presence of screens ISA (Intelligent Speed Assist).
to the right and/or left of those As more recent notifications are shown,
displayed. It is possible to navigate 96 F0S1077 previous notifications are overwritten.
between the pages by pressing
the / arrows or the dots on The screen can be used to show the
the page. following items: "Current consumption",
"Average consumption", "Distance",
Trip computer
"Average speed", "Travel time".
The "Trip computer" page (fig. 96) can
The sizes are displayed in "km"/"mi"
be used to view several parameters
and "km/h"/"mph" depending on the
relating to the operational status
display settings.
of the car. This function has two
separate memories, "Trip A" and Both values can be reset: press and
"Trip B", where the data for the car's hold down the OK button on the 97 F0S1078

"complete journeys" (trips) is recorded steering wheel.

independently from each other. NOTE The total consumption cannot For some driving assistance devices,
be reset. pop-up warnings are marked in yellow
Press the or button to switch
The instantaneous consumption or red at the bottom of the screen
from "Trip A" to "Trip B" and vice versa.
bar can take the following colours depending on the type of warning (B)
depending on energy consumption: fig. 98.
Orange: very high consumption;
Yellow: high consumption;
Light green: low consumption;
Dark green: very low consumption.
Driver assist
The screenshot shows messages and
visual indication of the status of the

80
 Phone repeat Repeat navigation
106 km/h D (where provided) (where provided)
This screen repeats the information This screen repeats the instructions
75 % POWER
displayed on the Uconnect™ system provided by the Uconnect™ system
while interacting with a paired phone navigator. The display can be
(see example screen in fig. 99). The pictogram or map.
216 following information is shown: Refer to the "Multimedia" section for
km
RANGE
Call status; more information.
23° C 123456 km
connected phone status (battery
Recorded messages
98 F0S1266 state of charge, network reception,
This screen displays the recorded
incoming/outgoing call notification,
Refer to the "Starting and Driving" messages and pop-ups previously
received text messages notification);
section for more information about displayed by the user (fig. 100).
recent call list.
driving assistance systems. (A) Symbol (where provided)
The system stores the last 10
received messages marked "read" (B) Message
Vehicle info
The screen shows the following or "unread". The user can select the
information: desired message using the steering
Tyre pressure wheel controls / and open it by %

Service (scheduled servicing) pressing the OK button on the steering

wheel.
Press the or button to switch
between the "Tyre pressure" screen
and the "Service" screen.
Audio repeat
(where provided) 100 F0S1085

This screen repeats the audio playback

information shown on the Uconnect™ Tutorials
system: The Tutorials function is available on
FM/DAB radio; the car to obtain essential information
Media (USB, Bluetooth®); on some of its features. The Tutorials
99 F0S1083
Android Auto, Apple CarPlay, Baidu also provides tips in the form of pop-
Carlife. Refer to the "Multimedia" section for ups shown on the instrument panel
Refer to the "Multimedia" section for more information. display during the journey.
more information.

81
 By selecting the corresponding icon Screen settings: Setting the Brakes

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

in the instrument panel menu, you can displays at the top of the display. Hold'n Go: enable/disable.
access an environment where the user Electric vehicle settings: Brake maintenance: electric
will be able to: "READY" pop-up display, parking brake EPB engagement.
activate/deactivate the display power/recharge indicator display, Auto Park Brake: enable/disable
suggestions; the activation/deactivation motor start tones. electric parking brake automatic
is done by ticking the item "User's Guide" display: engagement.
corresponding to the type of enable/disable. Safety and Assistance
suggestions you want to receive from Language: this sets the display Acoustic alert volume: off, low
the system; language. level, medium level, high level.
view stored suggestions: selecting Screen brightness (on 8 levels). Lane Control alert volume: early,
this item will allow you to view the Automatic Trip B reset: medium, delayed.
suggestions previously proposed to the enable/disable. Lane Control strength: low,
user while driving; Phone Repeat: enable/disable. medium, high.
view in-depth information (not Repeat navigation: map/ Intelligent Speed Limiter:
available with the car in motion): pictograms/disable. confirmation, automatic.
through this menu you will be able to Units of measurement: metric/ Traffic Sign Assist: enable,
consult the in-depth information on the imperial. disable.
functions available on board. Customisable sizes: Speed, Distance, Traffic Sign Assist alert: off,
Consumption, Pressure, Temperature. visual, visual and acoustic.
Settings
Date and Time New speed limit zone detection:
This screen allows you to customise
Time adjustment. off, visual, visual and acoustic.
the displays and notifications on the
Format adjustment: 12 Autonomous Emergency Brake
display and the various functions of the
hours/24 hours. Control (AEB): off/active braking
car.
Date setting. only/active braking with alert.
NOTE The tachograph components are
Safety Autonomous Emergency
illustrated below. The menus may vary
Passenger airbag: Brake Control (AEB) sensitivity:
depending on the equipment of the car.
enable/disable. near/medium/far.
NOTE Some settings may be managed Park Assist: acoustic, acoustic
Speed alarm: volume
using the Uconnect™ system (see and visual.
adjustment.
"Settings" in the "Vehicle mode" Volume Rear Park Assist: near,
SBR (Seat Belt Reminder):
paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). medium, far.
enable/disable.
Display

82
 Attention Assist warning: Power level setting: 1 to 5.
enable, disable. Start pairing process: start the
Mirrors and windscreen wipers procedure.
Rain sensor: enable, disable. Engine shutdown procedure: start
Lights the procedure.
Dipped beam sensitivity: 1 to 3.
Follow me Home: 0, 30, 60, 90
seconds.
Automatic main beam: enable,
disable.
DRL (Daytime Running Lights):
enable, disable.
Cornering lights: enable,
disable.
Dipped beam auto power off:
enable, disable.
Doors & Locks
Automatic locking: enable,
disable.
Automatic unlock on exit:
enable, disable.
Dipped beam when closing:
enable/disable.
Remote door unlocking: all
doors, driver doors.
Passive Entry: enable, disable.
Scheduled charging
Programming settings: list of
days of the week.
Passive Entry: list of days of the
week.
Activate programming: yes, no.

83
 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL GENERAL WARNINGS
WARNING Warning lights are accompanied by a specific message and/or sound when implemented on the instrument panel.
These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to
the information contained in the Owner Handbook, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
information in this section in the event of a failure indication.

WARNING The failure indicators appearing on the display are divided into two categories: very serious and less serious failures.
Serious faults are indicated by a repeated and prolonged warning "cycle". Less serious faults are indicated by a warning "cycle"
with a shorter duration. The instrument panel warning light will stay on until the cause of the malfunction is eliminated.

84
WARNING LIGHTS ON INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red warning lights
 
Warning light What it means

SEAT BELTS REMINDER

The warning light switches on constantly with the car stationary and the driver's side or passenger
side seat belt (when the passenger is present) not fastened.
The warning light will flash and a buzzer will sound if the car is in motion and the front seat belts are
not correctly fastened.
For permanent deactivation of the acoustic signal (buzzer) of the SBR (Seat Belt Reminder) system
contact a Fiat Dealership. The system can be reactivated at any time using the Setup Menu.

AIRBAG FAILURE
The warning light switches on when the ignition device is brought to the ENGINE position, but it
should switch off after a few seconds.
The warning light stays on constantly if there is a fault in the airbag system. On some versions the
display shows the dedicated message.
44) 45)

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE FAILURE / LOW BRAKE FLUID / ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
APPLIED
The warning lights switch on when the ignition device is brought to the ENGINE position, but it
should switch off after a few seconds.

Electric parking brake failure

The warning light flashes in conjunction with the yellow symbol when the electric parking brake
fails.
Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

Low brake fluid level

The warning light flashes together with the yellow symbol when the level of the brake fluid in the
reservoir falls below the minimum level, possibly due to leaks in the circuit. On some versions the
display shows the dedicated message.
46)

85
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
Warning light What it means

Electric parking brake on

The warning light switches on when the parking brake is engaged.
On certain versions, if the car is moving the acoustic warning will also sound.
WARNING If the warning light turns on while driving, check that the parking brake is not engaged.

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING FAILURE

The warning light switches on when the ignition device is brought to the ENGINE position, but it
should switch off after a few seconds.
If the warning light stays on, on some versions along with a dedicated message on the display, you
may not have power steering and the effort required to operate the steering wheel could be notably
increased; steering is, however, possible. In this case, contact a Fiat Dealership.
If the warning light switches on while driving (on some versions, together with a dedicated message
on the display) you may not have steering assistance. Although it will still be possible to steer
the vehicle, the effort needed to operate the steering wheel could be increased: contact a Fiat
Dealership as soon as possible.
WARNING In some circumstances, factors independent of the electric power steering could cause
the warning light on the instrument panel to switch on. In this case, stop the car immediately (if you
are moving), stop the motor for about 20 seconds (taking the ignition device to the STOP position)
and then restart the motor ("READY" status). If the warning light stays on, contact a Fiat Dealership.
WARNING The steering must be initialised after disconnecting the 12V battery. The warning light
turns on to indicate this. To carry out this procedure, slowly turn the steering wheel all the way from
one end to the other or drive in a straight line for about a hundred metres.
Amber warning lights
 
Warning light What it means

ESC SYSTEM
The warning light switches on when the ignition device is brought to the ENGINE position, but it
should switch off after a few seconds.

ESC system activation

Flashing of the warning light while driving indicates the intervention of the ESC system.

86
Warning light What it means

ESC system failure

If the warning light does not switch off or stays on while driving, on some versions along with a
dedicated message on the display, contact a Fiat Dealership.

Hill Holder failure

This warning light switches on, on some versions together with a dedicated message on the display,
in the event of a Hill Holder system failure.
In this case, contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

PARTIAL / TOTAL DEACTIVATION OF ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS

The turning on of the warning light indicates that some safety systems have been partially
deactivated by a driver's request.

REAR FOG LIGHT

The warning light switches on when the rear fog light is turned on.

ABS FAILURE
The warning light switches on when the ignition device is brought to the ENGINE position, but it
should switch off after a few seconds. The warning light comes on, on some versions along with a
dedicated message on the display, when the system is inefficient or not available. In this case the
braking system maintains its efficiency unaltered but without the advantage of the ABS system.
Drive carefully and contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

iTPMS
(where provided)
Low tyre pressure
The warning light switches on constantly to indicate that the tyre pressure is lower than the
recommended value, in order to guarantee long tyre life and optical electrical energy consumption,
or to indicate a slow loss of pressure.
In this way the iTPMS warns the driver that one or more tyres may be flat and probably punctured.
In this case it is advisable to restore the correct pressure value. Once the normal operating
conditions of the car are restored, carry out the Tyre reset procedure.
WARNING Do not continue driving with one or more flat tyres as handling of the car may be
compromised. Stop the car, avoiding sharp braking and steering.

87
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
Warning light What it means

iTPMS failure/iTPMS temporarily deactivated

The warning light flashes for about 75 seconds and then stays on constantly (along with a dedicated
message on the display) to indicate that the system is temporarily deactivated or faulty. The system
goes back to normal operation when the operating conditions allow it. If this is not the case, carry
out the Tyre reset procedure after restoring the normal operating conditions.
If the malfunction warning persists, contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.
47) 48)

Green Warning Lights

 
Warning light What it means

SIDE/TAIL LIGHTS AND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS/FOLLOW ME HOME

Side/tail lights and dipped beam headlights
The warning light switches on when the side/tail lights or dipped headlights are turned on.

Follow Me Home
The warning light comes on, on some versions along with a dedicated message on the display,
when the "Follow me home" device is used.

LEFT DIRECTION INDICATOR

The warning light turns on when the direction indicator control stalk is moved downwards or,
together with the right indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pressed.

RIGHT DIRECTION INDICATOR

The warning light turns on when the direction indicator control stalk is moved upwards or, together
with the left indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pressed.

AUTOMATIC MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS

This warning light comes on when the automatic main beam headlights are activated.

88
Blue warning lights
 
Warning light What it means

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS

The warning light switches on when the main beam headlights are turned on.

Warning What it means

DISPLAY FAILURE
All warning lights flashing
In the event of an instrument panel display failure, all of the warning lights flash.

Message to have the warning light CONTROL SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT FAILURE
checked A control system warning light failure is indicated by a message on the instrument panel display.

WARNING

44) If the warning light does not switch on or stays on whilst driving when the ignition device is turned to ENGINE, a failure may have
occurred in the restraint systems. In this case the airbags or pretensioners may not be deployed in an impact or, in a lower number of cases,
they may be deployed accidentally. Before continuing, contact a Fiat Dealership immediately to have the system checked.
45) A failure of the warning light is indicated by the symbol appearing on the display or by the warning light blinking, depending on
the version. In this case, the warning light may not indicate a possible problem with the airbag restraint system. Before continuing, contact
a Fiat Dealership immediately to have the system checked.
46) If the warning light turns on when travelling (on certain versions together with the message on the display) stop the vehicle immediately
and contact Fiat Dealership.
47) If the system signals a pressure drop on a specific tyre, it is recommended to check the pressure on all four tyres. The iTPMS does not
relieve the driver from the obligation to check the tyre pressure every month; it is not to be considered a system to replace servicing or a safety
system. Tyre pressure must be checked with tyres cold. Should it become necessary for whatever reason to check pressure with warm tyres,
do not reduce pressure even though it is higher than the prescribed value, but repeat the check when tyres are cold.
48) The iTPMS cannot indicate sudden tyre pressure drops (for example when a tyre bursts). In this case, stop the car, braking with caution
and avoiding abrupt steering. The system only warns that the tyre pressure is low: it is not able to inflate them. Insufficient tyre inflation
increases electrical energy consumption, reduces the tread duration and may affect your ability to drive safely.

89
 INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING SYMBOLS

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Red Symbols
 
Symbol What it means

DOORS/BONNET/BOOT OPEN
The symbols on the display switches on, together with a dedicated message, on some versions,
when one or more doors, the tailgate or the bonnet are not properly closed. An acoustic warning is
also emitted with the doors open and the car in motion.

DOOR FAILURE
The symbol switches on in the failure to the front door locking system. Contact a Fiat Dealership.

AIRBAG FAILURE
The warning light switches on when the ignition device is brought to the ENGINE position, but it
should switch off after a few seconds.
The warning light stays on constantly if there is a fault in the airbag system. On some versions the
display shows the dedicated message.
44) 50)

VEHICLE CHARGING PROCEDURE FAILURE

This symbol is shown on the instrument panel display, with the vehicle stationary, in the case of a
fault during the high-voltage battery charging procedure.
failures in the charging system, in this case disconnect and then reconnect the charging cable
to the charging socket or, in the case of charging at a public charging station, look for another
power supply point. If the symbol and the message on the display continue to be displayed, contact
the Fiat Dealership.
failures in the public charging station (because it may have been deactivated or there may
be a failure). We recommend that you try charging your car at another public charging station. If the
symbol and the message on the display continue to be displayed, contact the Fiat Dealership.

HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY FAILURE

The symbol appears on the instrument panel display in case of high-voltage battery failure. Contact
a Fiat Dealership.

90
Symbol What it means

LOW HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY CHARGE

The symbol appears on the instrument panel display in case of state of charge of the high-voltage
battery. Contact a Fiat Dealership.

12V BATTERY CHARGING CONDITIONS / DC-DC CONVERTER FAILURE / LOGISTICS MODE

ACTIVATED / POWER SUPPLY MODE
The symbol lights up if the 12V battery and/or DC-DC converter fails to charge. Contact a Fiat
Dealership.

ELECTRIC SYSTEM FAILURE

The symbol appears on display of the instrument panel in case of electrical system failure. The
display will also show a dedicated message. Contact a Fiat Dealership.

PERFORMANCE LIMITATION
The symbol is shown on the instrument panel display if the acceleration of the car is limited due
to a reduction in electric motor performance. If the symbol remains on while driving, contact a Fiat
Dealership.
The heated seats will be switched off, if they are on. To switch them back on, press button again.
NOTE If the automatic dual-zone climate control system is turned on, it will be turned off
automatically.

ATTENTION ASSIST SYSTEM INTERVENTION

The symbol appears on display of the instrument panel if the Attention Assist system is activated.
The system, after estimating the driver’s drowsiness level, through specific events, suggests to the
driver to stop for a break, because continuing driving is risky. Stop to pause while driving, pulling
the car over in safe conditions.

EU eCall SYSTEM FAILURE

Switching on the symbol and/or a dedicated message indicates a failure in the EU eCall system. In
this case, an emergency call cannot be made. Go to a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible to have
the system repaired.

EU eCall SYSTEM BATTERY FAILURE

Switching on the symbol and/or a dedicated message indicates a failure of the EU eCall system
battery or a low state of charge of the battery. In the first case, it will not be possible to make the
emergency call, while in the second case the data transmission or connection may be subject to
limitations. Go to a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible to have the system repaired.

91
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
Symbol What it means

TRANSMISSION FAILURE
The warning light switches on when the ignition device is brought to the ENGINE position but it
should switch off after a few seconds.
The warning light comes on flashing, along with a dedicated message on the display and an
acoustic warning, to indicate transmission failure.

Amber symbols
 
Symbol What it means

EXTERNAL LIGHTS FAILURE

The symbol switches on to indicate a failure on the following lights: daytime running lights (DRLs);
parking lights; side/tail lights; direction indicators; rear fog light; reversing light; number plate lights;
stop lights.
The anomaly may be caused by a blown bulb, a blown protection fuse or an interruption of the
electrical connection.

BRAKE FAILURE
The symbol illuminates together with the red warning light flashing in the event of a brake system
failure or low brake fluid level.
Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE FAILURE

The symbol comes on in case of an electric parking brake failure.
Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

PARKING SENSOR FAILURE

(where provided)
The symbol is shown on the display together with a dedicated message if there is a fault in the
parking sensors.

RAIN SENSOR FAILURE

The symbol switches on in the case of failure of the rain sensor. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon
as possible.

92
Symbol What it means

AUTOMATIC MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS FAILURE

The symbol switches on to report a failure of the automatic main beam headlights. Contact a Fiat
Dealership as soon as possible.

TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION SYSTEM FAILURE (where provided)

The symbol comes on, on some versions together with a message, in the event of Traffic Sign
Recognition system failure.
Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

AUTONOMOUS EMERGENCY BRAKE CONTROL (AEB) SYSTEM DEACTIVATION

The symbol switches on if the Autonomous Emergency Brake Control (AEB) system has been
deactivated or if the system is obstructed/dirty/unavailable.

BLIND SPOT ASSIST FAILURE

The symbol lights up in case of failure of the Blind Spot Assist device. Contact a Fiat dealership as
soon as possible to have the failure repaired.

LANE CONTROL FAILURE

The symbol switches on in the case of failure of the Lane Control device. Contact a Fiat Dealership
as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.

POSSIBLE ICE ON ROAD

The symbol turns on when the external temperature falls to or below 3°C.
WARNING In the event of external temperature sensor failure, the digits that indicate the value are
replaced by dashes.

FIAT CODE SYSTEM FAILURE

The symbol switches on to indicate a failure of the Fiat CODE system. Contact a Fiat Dealership as
soon as possible.

BREAK-IN ATTEMPT
The symbol switches on when the ignition device is moved to the ENGINE position, along with the
displaying of a dedicated message, to report about a possible break-in attempt detected by the
alarm system.

93
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
Symbol What it means

SERVICE (SCHEDULED SERVICING) EXPIRED

When the scheduled servicing is nearly due ("scheduled service deadline"), the display will show the
symbol followed by the number of kilometres/miles until the car must be serviced. This is displayed
automatically, with ignition device at ENGINE, when there are 2000 km (or equivalent value in miles)
left before servicing or, for some markets, 30 days left before servicing. It is also displayed whenever
the ignition device is turned to ENGINE or, for some markets, every 200 km (or equivalent value in
miles).
Go to a Fiat Dealership, where the "Service Schedule" operations will be performed and the
message will be reset.

ATTENTION ASSIST SYSTEM FAILURE

The symbol lights up in case of failure of the Attention Assist device. Contact a Fiat dealership as
soon as possible to have the failure repaired.

AUDIO SYSTEM FAILURE

The symbol switches on to report a failure of the sound system.

INTELLIGENT SPEED ASSIST / SPEED LIMITER FAILURE

The symbol switches on in the case of failure of the Intelligent Speed Assist or of the Speed Limiter
device. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) FAILURE

(where provided)
The symbol lights up to indicate a failure of the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) failure.
Contact a Fiat Dealership.

AUTONOMOUS EMERGENCY BRAKE CONTROL (AEB) SYSTEM FAILURE

The warning light switches on to alert the driver that the Autonomous Emergency Brake Control
(AEB) system is not active due to sensor failure. Contact a Fiat Dealership.

KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO SYSTEM FAILURE

The symbol switches on in the event of Keyless Enter-N-Go system failure.

HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY DISCONNECTED

The symbol lights up to indicate that the high-voltage battery is disconnected from the system.
Contact a Fiat Dealership.

94
 Symbol What it means

DUSK SENSOR FAILURE

The symbol switches on along with a dedicated message on the display in the event of dusk sensor
failure. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

PRESS THE BRAKE PEDAL

This symbol turns on to indicate that the brake pedal must be pressed to enable starting.

PEDESTRIAN ACOUSTIC SIGNALLING SYSTEM FAILURE

This symbol is shown on the instrument panel display in case of failure of the pedestrian acoustic
warning. Contact a Fiat Dealership.

LOW WINDSCREEN WASHER LEVEL

The symbol appears for some seconds to indicate that the level of the windscreen washing fluid is
low.
Refill the liquid: to do this, see the "Checking levels" chapter in the "Maintenance and care" section.
Always use liquid with the features indicated in the "Fluids and lubricants" chapter in the "Technical
specifications" section.

Green Symbols
 
Symbol What it means

SYSTEM READY
READY
The symbol switches on to signal that the car is ready to start.

CHARGING CABLE CONNECTED

When this symbol is lit it indicates that the cable is connected to the charging port of the car, not
that the charging procedure is in progress.
The lighting of the symbol can also be displayed together with dedicated messages. These
messages will indicate the connection status to the charging port until fully charged.
IMPORTANT Starting the motor is not allowed until the charging procedure is complete.

HOLD 'N' GO
The symbol lights up when the "Hold 'n' go" function is active (automatic parking brake engaged).

95
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
Symbol What it means

ELECTRONIC CRUISE CONTROL ON

The symbol comes on when the electric Cruise Control system is on.

SPEED LIMITER ON
The symbol comes on when the Speed Limiter is on.

INTELLIGENT SPEED ASSIST SYSTEM ON

The symbol comes on when the Intelligent Speed Assist system is on.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACTIVATION

The symbol comes on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is on.

INTELLIGENT ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACTIVATION

The symbol comes on when the Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control system is on.

Blue symbols
 
Symbol What it means

DRIVING MODES
The instrument panel display shows the driving mode adopted (NORMAL, RANGE, SHERPA).

SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED

The symbol (in "km/h" or "mph", depending on the display settings) lights up when the speed limit
defined by the Speed Limiter is exceeded.

White symbols
 
Symbol What it means

HEADLIGHT HEIGHT
The symbol indicates the height of the dipped beam headlights, set to four levels (0-4) using buttons
and .

96
 Symbol What it means

ELECTRONIC CRUISE CONTROL READY

The symbol appears to indicate that the electronic Cruise Control is ready.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL READY

The symbol appears when the Adaptive Cruise Control is ready.

INTELLIGENT ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL READY

The symbol appears when the Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control is ready.

SPEED LIMITER READY

The symbol appears to indicate that the Speed Limiter is ready.

INTELLIGENT SPEED ASSIST READY

The symbol appears when the Intelligent Speed Assist is ready.

SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED

The (white) symbol switches on when the speed limit (e.g. 110 km/h) set through the menu of the
display is exceeded (the inner value updates according to the set speed).

Grey symbols
 
Symbol What it means

ELECTRONIC CRUISE CONTROL ON

The symbol appears when the electronic Cruise Control is turned on.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ON

The symbol appears when the Adaptive Cruise Control is on.

INTELLIGENT ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ON

The symbol comes on in the event of an Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control failure.

97
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
Symbol What it means
SPEED LIMITER ON
The symbol switches on if the Speed Limiter device is activated.

INTELLIGENT SPEED ASSIST ON

The symbol switches on if convenient the Intelligent Speed Assist is activated.

WARNING

49) If the warning light does not switch on or stays on whilst driving when the ignition device is turned to ENGINE, a failure may have
occurred in the restraint systems. In this case the airbags or pretensioners may not be deployed in an impact or, in a lower number of cases,
they may be deployed accidentally. Before continuing, contact a Fiat Dealership immediately to have the system checked.
50) A failure of the warning light is indicated by the symbol appearing on the display or by the warning light blinking, depending on
the version. In this case, the warning light may not indicate a possible problem with the airbag restraint system. Before continuing, contact
a Fiat Dealership immediately to have the system checked.

98
 SAFETY

The chapter that you are about to read ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS ......... 100
is very important: it describes the safety DRIVING ASSISTANCE
systems with which the car is equipped SYSTEMS ................................. 104
and provides instructions on how to OCCUPANT PROTECTION
use them correctly. SYSTEMS ................................. 114
SEAT BELTS ............................. 114
SBR (SEAT BELT REMINDER)
SYSTEM ................................... 115
PRE-TENSIONERS..................... 116
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..... 118
SUPPLEMENTARY RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS) - AIRBAG ............ 129

99
 ACTIVE SAFETY surface where the grip of the left and ESC (Electronic Stability

SAFETY
SYSTEMS right wheels varies, or on corners. Control) SYSTEM
The Electronic Braking Force The ESC system improves the
The car has the following active safety Distribution (EBD) system completes directional control and stability of the
systems: the system allowing the brake force to car in various driving conditions.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System); be distributed between the front and The ESC system corrects the car’s
DTC (Drag Torque Control); rear wheels. understeer and oversteer, distributing
ESC (Electronic Stability Control); the brake force on the appropriate
TC (Traction Control); System intervention
wheels. The torque supplied by the
PBA (Panic Brake Assist); A slight pulsing of the brake pedal and
motor can also be reduced in order to
HSA (Hill Start Assist); noise indicates the intervention of the
maintain control of the car.
ERM (Electronic Rollover Mitigation); ABS: this is completely normal when
the system intervenes. The ESC system uses sensors installed
Hold 'n'Go
on the car to determine the trajectory
For the operation of the systems, see 51) 52) 53) 54) 55) 56)
that the driver intends to follow and
the following pages. DTC (Drag Torque compares it with the car’s effective
ABS (Anti-lock Braking Control) SYSTEM trajectory. When the real trajectory
System) The DTC (Drag Torque Control) system deviates from the desired trajectory, the
This system, which is an integral part prevents the drive wheels from possibly ESC system intervenes to counter the
of the braking system, prevents one locking, which could happen, for car’s understeer or oversteer.
or more wheels from locking and example, if the accelerator pedal is Oversteer: occurs when the car
slipping in all road surface conditions, released suddenly in conditions of poor is turning more than it should with
irrespective of the intensity of the grip. respect to the angle of the steering
braking action, ensuring that the In this conditions, the exhaust braking wheel and the rear wheels lose grip.
car can be controlled even during effect could cause the drive wheels Understeer: occurs when the car is
emergency braking and optimising to slip, resulting in a loss of stability of turning less than it should with respect
stopping distances. the car. In these situations, the DTC to the angle of the steering wheel and
The system intervenes during braking system intervenes, restoring torque the front wheels lose grip.
when the wheels are about to lock, to the motor in order to conserve car System intervention
typically in emergency braking or low- stability and increase car safety.
The system intervention is signalled
grip conditions, when locking may be by the blinking of the instrument panel
more frequent.
warning light , to inform the driver
The system also improves control and that the car is in critical stability and
stability of the car when braking on a grip conditions. 57) 58) 59) 60) 61)

100
TC (Traction Control) that the car is in critical stability and slopes, activating automatically in the
SYSTEM grip conditions. following cases:
The system automatically operates 62) 63) 64) 65) 66) uphill: car stationary on a road with
in the event of slipping, loss of grip a gradient higher than 5%, motor
PBA (Panic Brake
on wet roads (aquaplaning) and running, brake pressed and the
Assist) SYSTEM
acceleration on slippery, snowy or transmission in N or D;
The PBA system is designed to downhill: car stationary on a road
icy roads, etc. on one or both drive
improve the car’s braking capacity with a gradient higher than 5%, motor
wheels. Depending on the slipping
during emergency braking. running, brake pressed and reverse
conditions, two different control
systems are activated: The system detects emergency braking gear engaged.
by monitoring the speed and force with When setting off, the ESC system
if the slipping involves both drive
which the brake pedal is pressed, and control unit maintains the braking
wheels, the system intervenes,
consequently applies the optimal brake pressure on the wheels until the
reducing the power transmitted by the
pressure. This can reduce the braking drive torque necessary for starting is
motor;
distance: the PBA system therefore reached, or in any case for a maximum
if the slipping only involves one of the
completes the ABS. of 2 seconds, allowing your right foot to
drive wheels, the BLD (Brake Limited
Differential) function is activated, Maximum assistance from the PBA be moved easily from the brake pedal
automatically braking the wheel system is obtained by pressing the to the accelerator.
which is slipping (the behaviour of a brake pedal very quickly. In addition, When the 2 seconds have elapsed,
self-locking differential is simulated). the brake pedal should be pressed without starting, the system is
This will increase the drive torque continuously during braking, avoiding automatically deactivated, gradually
transferred to the wheel that is not intermittent presses, to get the most releasing the braking pressure.
slipping. out of the system. Do not reduce
During this release stage, the typical
This function remains active even pressure on the brake pedal until
mechanical brake release noise can be
if the "Systems partially disabled" braking is no longer necessary.
heard, indicating that the car is about
and "Systems disabled" modes The PBA system is deactivated when to move.
are selected (see description in the the brake pedal is released.
following pages). 67) 68) 69)
ERM (Electronic Rollover
Mitigation) SYSTEM
System intervention HSA (Hill Start Assist) The system monitors the tendency of
The system intervention is signalled SYSTEM the wheels to rise from the ground
by the blinking of the instrument panel 70) 71) if the driver performs extreme
warning light , to inform the driver This is an integral part of the ESC manoeuvres like quick steering to avoid
system and facilitates starting on

101
 an obstacle, especially in poor road driver's door closed to the braking action on the individual

SAFETY
conditions. driver's seat belt not fastened driving wheels only. The other systems
If these conditions occur, the system the function is deactivated and the EPB remain enabled.
intervenes on the brakes and motor is automatically engaged. Activation of this mode is indicated by
power to reduce the possibility that the 73) the warning light on the instrument
wheels are raised from the ground. It panel switching on (on some versions,
is not possible to avoid tendency to DISABLING ACTIVE together with a message on the
roll over if the phenomenon is due to SAFETY SYSTEMS display).
reasons such as driving on high side Depending on the versions, there are
gradients, collision with objects or other 3 configurations for the active safety
cars. systems on the car:
72)
systems enabled;
systems partially disabled;
HOLD 'N' GO systems disabled.
It is an integral part of the ESC system
Systems enabled
and keeps the car braked in all
conditions. The Hold 'n' Go function All active safety systems are enabled.
can be activated from the panel in This mode should be used in most
NORMAL mode; it is always active in driving conditions. The system will be 101 F0S1140

RANGE and SHERPA modes. in "Systems enabled" mode every time

the motor is started. To restore the "Fully Enabled Systems"
If activated, after detecting that the car
mode of operation, press the button on
is stationary and the brake pedal has
WARNING You are advised to select the control display located on the left
been released, the Hold 'n' Go function
"Systems partially disabled" or side of the instrument panel (left-hand
keeps the vehicle braked. You can now
"Systems disabled" modes only for drive versions) again.
remove your foot from the brake pedal.
specific driving requirements. "Systems completely enabled" mode
When the driver lightly touches the
will automatically reactivate every time
accelerator pedal, the Hold 'n' Go
the motor is started.
function releases the brake again, Systems partially disabled
leaving the car free to move. By pressing the button (A) fig. 101 on
If the car is stationary and one of the the control display located on the left WARNING When travelling on snowy
following conditions required by the side of the instrument panel (left-hand roads with snow chains, it may be
Hold 'n' Go function is changed: drive versions) for less than 5 seconds, helpful to activate "Systems partially
while the car is running, it is possible to disabled" mode: in these conditions,
limit the intervention of the TC system slipping of the drive wheels when

102
moving off makes it possible to obtain compromise personal safety and the
better traction. WARNING safety of others.
60) For the correct operation of the ESC
51) If the ABS intervenes, this indicates system, the tyres must necessarily be of
Systems disabled that the grip of the tyres on the road is the same make and type on all wheels,
Pressing the button on the control nearing its limit: you must slow down to a in perfect condition and, above all, of the
panel on the left-hand side of the speed compatible with the available grip. prescribed type and size.
dashboard (left-hand drive versions) 52) To achieve maximum efficiency of the 61) ESC performance features must not
braking system, a settlement period of induce the driver to take unnecessary or
for more than 5 seconds completely about 500 km is required. During this time, unwarranted risks. Your driving style must
deactivates the ESC system, as well as avoid sudden, repeated and prolonged always be suited to the road conditions,
the ERM and FCW systems; the TC braking. visibility and traffic. The driver is, in any
system will be limited to braking action 53) The ABS cannot overrule the natural case, responsible for safe driving.
on the individual drive wheels. The laws of physics, and cannot increase the 62) For the correct operation of the TC
other systems remain enabled. grip available according to the condition of system, the tyres must of necessity be
the road. the same make and type on all wheels,
Activation of this mode is indicated by 54) The ABS cannot prevent accidents, in perfect condition and, above all, of the
the warning light on the instrument including those due to excessive speed prescribed type and dimensions.
panel switching on (on some versions, on corners, driving on low-grip surfaces or 63) TC performance features must not
together with a message on the aquaplaning. induce the driver to take unnecessary or
55) The capability of the ABS must never unwarranted risks. Your driving style must
display). be tested irresponsibly and dangerously, always be suited to the road conditions,
in such a way as to compromise personal visibility and traffic. The driver is, in any
WARNING If a speed of approximately safety and the safety of others. case, responsible for safe driving.
65 km/h is exceeded, the systems 56) For the correct operation of the ABS, 64) The TC system cannot overrule the
the tyres must of necessity be the same natural laws of physics, and cannot
will behave as described for "Systems make and type on all wheels, in perfect increase the grip available according to the
partially disabled" mode. condition and, above all, of the prescribed condition of the road.
type and dimensions. 65) The TC system cannot prevent
To restore the "Systems Enabled" 57) The ESC system cannot overrule accidents, including those due to
the natural laws of physics, and can’t excessive speed on corners, driving on
operating mode, press the button on increase the grip available according to the low-grip surfaces or aquaplaning.
the control display located on the left condition of the road. 66) The capability of the TC system
side of the instrument panel (left-hand 58) The ESC system cannot prevent must never be tested irresponsibly
drive versions) again. accidents, including those due to and dangerously, in such a way as to
excessive speed on corners, driving on compromise personal safety and the
"Systems enabled" mode will
low-grip surfaces or aquaplaning. safety of others.
automatically reactivate every time the 59) The capability of the ESC system 67) The PBA system cannot overrule
motor is started. must never be tested irresponsibly the natural laws of physics, and cannot
and dangerously, in such a way as to

103
 DRIVING The system warns the driver about

SAFETY
increase the grip available according to the
condition of the road. ASSISTANCE the presence of cars in the detection
68) The PBA system cannot prevent area by lighting up, on the relevant
accidents, including those due to SYSTEMS side, the warning light located on
excessive speed on corners, driving on
low-grip surfaces or aquaplaning. The car can feature the following the door mirror fig. 103, along with
69) The capability of the PBA system driving assistance systems: an acoustic warning (see "Blind spot
must never be tested irresponsibly Blind Spot Assist; alert" paragraph, "Visual and acoustic"
and dangerously, in such a way as to Autonomous Emergency Brake mode).
compromise the safety of the driver, the Control;
other occupants of the car or any other
road user. iTPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring
70) The HSA system is not a parking System);
brake; therefore, never leave the car Lane Control.
without having engaged the electric For the operation of the systems, see
parking brake and turned the motor off the following pages.
so that it is parked in safe conditions (for
further information read the "When parked" BLIND SPOT ASSIST
chapter in the "Starting and driving" SYSTEM
section).
74)
71) There may be situations on small
103 F0S1142
gradients (less than 8%), with vehicle The Blind Spot Assist system uses
laden, in which the Hill Start Assist system ultrasound sensors, located in the front
may not activate, causing a slight reversing Sensors
and rear bumpers (one for the rear side
motion and increasing the risk of collision The sensors are activated when the
with another vehicle or object. The driver - see fig. 102), to detect the presence
car is travelling at a speed greater than
is, in any case, responsible for safe driving. of cars in the rear side blind spots of
approximately 15 km/h (9 mph) and
72) The performance of a car with ERM the car.
must never be tested in imprudent or
are temporarily deactivated at a speed
dangerous ways, with the possibility of greater than approximately 140 km/h
putting the safety of the driver or other (84 mph).
people at risk. The detection area of the system
73) The intelligent technology of the Hold covers the blind spot of the rear-view
'n' Go function cannot overcome the
limits imposed by physical laws and only mirror. When the sensors are active the
works within the limits of the system. The system monitors the detection areas on
increased comfort offered by the Hold 'n' both sides of the car and warns the
Go function must never cause the driver to driver about the possible presence of
take risks that could compromise safety. cars in these areas.
102 F0S1288

104
While driving the system monitors the Do not cover the area in which the "Blind Spot Alert", "Visual" mode
detection area from three different input sensors are located with any object When this mode is active, system
points (side, rear and front) to check (e.g. adhesives, bike rack, etc.). activates only a visual warning to
whether a signal needs to be sent to The system may not recognise the the door mirror relating to the object
the driver. The system can detect the presence of long vehicles in the blind detected.
presence of a vehicle in one of these spot. "Blind spot alert", "Visual and
three areas. acoustic" mode
Rear view
When this mode is active, system
The system detects vehicles coming
WARNING The system does not signal activates a visual warning to the door
from the rear part of your car on both
the presence of fixed object (e.g. safety mirror relating to the object detected.
sides and entering the rear detection
barriers, poles, walls, etc.). However, If the direction indicator on the side
area with a difference in speed of less
in some circumstances, the system where an obstacle has been detected
than approx. 30 km/h (18 mph) with
may activate in the presence of these is activated, an acoustic warning is
respect to your car.
objects. emitted as well. When the acoustic
Overtaking vehicles warning is emitted, the Uconnect™
WARNING The system does not warn If another vehicle is overtaken (with a volume is also lowered.
the driver about the presence of cars difference in speed of less than about "Blind Spot Alert" function
coming from the opposite direction, in 15 km/h), the warning light on the door deactivation
the adjacent lanes. mirror of the corresponding side lights When the system is deactivated ("Blind
up. If the difference in speed between Spot Alert" mode at "OFF"), the system
the two vehicles is greater than about will not emit neither acoustic nor visual
Warnings 15 km/h, the warning light does not warnings.
For the system to operate correctly, light up. Startup status check
the bumper area where ultrasound
Operating Mode With the ignition device in the ENGINE
sensors are located must stay free from
The system can be position, if the system is enabled, the
water, snow, ice and dirt gathered from
activated/deactivated by operating on LEDs on the exterior mirrors will light up
the road surface. The system may be
the instrument panel display Menu, during the check phase. If the system
disturbed in case of adverse weather
or via the Uconnect™ system (for is working properly, they will switch off
conditions (rain, snow, hail, extreme
further information, see the dedicated after a few seconds.
heat, etc.) and in case of wet road
surface. In these cases, the system "Multimedia" section). The system will
may give some false signals or fail to store the operating mode running when
detect the vehicles. the motor was switched off. Each time
the car is started the previously stored
mode will be recalled and used.

105
 AUTONOMOUS is detected (limited braking). Signals Engagement / disengagement

SAFETY
EMERGENCY BRAKE and limited braking are intended to The Autonomous Emergency Brake
CONTROL SYSTEM (AEB allow the driver to react promptly, in Control can be deactivated (and then
Control) order to prevent or reduce the effects switched back on again) using the
(where provided) of a potential accident. Uconnect™ system (see "Settings"
75) 76) 77) 78) 79) In situations with the risk of collision, if in the"Vehicle mode" paragraph in
28) 29) 30) 31) 32)
the system detects no intervention by the "Multimedia" section), or using the
the driver, it provides automatic braking instrument panel (see "Settings" in the
This is a driving assistance system
to help slow the car and mitigate the "Display" paragraph in the "Knowing
consisting of a camera mounted in
potential frontal accident (automatic the instrument panel" section).
the middle of the windscreen fig. 104
braking). The system can be turned off even
capable of intervening in case of
If intervention by the driver on the brake with the ignition device in the ENGINE
vehicles, cyclists and pedestrians.
pedal is detected but not deemed position.
In the event of an imminent collision
sufficient, the system may intervene The system can be set to three
the system intervenes by automatically
in order to improve the reaction activation levels:
braking the car to prevent the impact or
of the braking system, therefore System active: the system (if active),
reduce its effects.
reducing vehicle speed further in addition to the visual and acoustic
(additional assistance in braking stage). warnings, provides limited braking,
The system will not intervene if the automatic braking and additional
driver takes control of the car and assistance in braking stage, where the
is recognised as being aware of the driver does not brake sufficiently in the
situation and possible collision. event of a potential frontal impact;
The car is equipped with the "creeping" System partially active: the system
function. It could then restart after a (if active) does not provide limited
few seconds from automatic stop. braking, but guarantees automatic
braking or additional assistance in
104 F0S1286 braking stage, where the driver does
WARNING After the car is stopped, the
brake callipers may be locked for about not brake at all or not sufficiently in the
The system provides the driver with event of a potential frontal accident.
2 seconds for safety reasons. Press the
audible and visual signals through The visual and acoustic warnings are
brake pedal if the car should advance
specific messages on the instrument deactivated, and will not be provided;
slightly.
panel display. System deactivated: the system
The system may lightly brake to warn does not provide visual and acoustic
the driver if a possible frontal accident warnings, limited braking, automatic

106
braking or additional assistance in The function is not active at speed With the system sensitivity set to "Far",
braking stage. The system will therefore above 5 km/h. the system will warn the driver of a
provide no indication of a possible The system is only active if: possible collision with the vehicle in
accident. it has been activated correctly; front when that vehicle is at a greater
it has not been deactivated using distance, thus providing the possibility
WARNING Visual signals will indicate the instrument panel or Uconnect™ of acting on the brakes more lightly
the direction of detection of the system menu; and gradually. This setting provides
obstacle (vehicles, pedestrians or the ignition device is in the ENGINE the drivers with the maximum possible
cyclists). position; reaction time to prevent a potential
car speed is higher than 5 km/h. accident.
Activation / deactivation The system sensitivity setting is kept
Changing the system sensitivity
in the memory when the motor is
If Autonomous Emergency Brake The sensitivity of the system can be switched off.
Control has been correctly activated, it changed through the Uconnect™
will be active each time the motor is system or instrument panel menu, Function temporarily not available
started. choosing from one of the following warning
The system is deactivated if this is three options: "Near", "Med" or "Far". If the warning light comes on and the
selected on the instrument panel or See the description in the "Multimedia" dedicated message is displayed,
Uconnect™ system menu. section for how to change the settings. a condition temporarily disabling
Following a deactivation, the system The default option is "Med". With this operation of the system may have
will not warn the driver about the setting, the system warns the driver of occurred. The main possible causes of
possible accident with the preceding a possible collision with the vehicle in this temporary blinding are weather-
vehicle, regardless of the setting front when that vehicle is at a standard related (heavy rain, fog, sun low down
selected. distance, between that of the other two on the horizon, etc.).
The system activation status will not settings. This setting offers the driver Although the car can still be driven in
be kept in the memory when the reaction time longer than that of the normal conditions, the system may be
motor is switched off: if the system "Near" setting but shorter than that temporarily not available.
is deactivated when the motor is of the "Far" setting in the event of a When the conditions limiting the
switched off, it will be active when it its potential accident. system functions end, this will go back
next started. By setting system sensitivity to "Near", to normal and complete operation.
After a deactivation, the system can the system warns the driver of a Should the fault persist, contact a Fiat
be reactivated from the Uconnect™ possible accident with the vehicle Dealership.
system or instrument panel menu. in front when that vehicle is a short
distance away.

107
 Warning of system disabling due to lane change by other vehicles; Vehicles with small dimensions

SAFETY
an obstruction vehicles travelling at right angles to and/or not aligned in the driving
If the dedicated message is displayed, the vehicle. lane
a condition disabling operation of System intervention might be The system cannot detect vehicles
the system may have occurred. The unexpected or delayed. The driver in front of the car but outside the
possible cause of this disabling is a must therefore be very careful, keeping camera's field of vision and may
camera obstruction. If an obstruction control of the car to drive in complete therefore not react in the presence of
is signalled, clean the area of the safety. small vehicles, such as motorbikes.
windscreen indicated in fig. 104 fig. 106.
and check that the message has WARNING In particularly complex
disappeared. Although the car can still traffic conditions, the driver can
be driven in normal conditions, the deactivate the system manually through
system is not available. the Uconnect™ system or the
When the conditions disabling the instrument panel.
system functions end, it will return
to normal and complete operation.
Driving close to a bend
Should the fault persist, contact a Fiat
When entering or leaving a wide bend,
Dealership.
the system may detect a vehicle that is
System Fault Message in front of you, but that is not driving in 106 F0S1182

If the system switches off and a the same lane fig. 105. In cases such
dedicated message is shown on the as these, the system may intervene. Pedestrian/cyclist detection
display, it means that there is a fault on While driving, when there is a risk of
the system. collision with a pedestrian or cyclist, the
In this case, it is still possible to drive system will display the relevant warning
the car, but you are advised to contact message indicating the direction of
a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. obstacle detection and, if necessary,
apply the brakes.
Driving in special conditions
In certain driving conditions, such as, Lane change by other vehicles
for example: cars suddenly changing lane, entering
driving close to a bend; the same lane as your car and this
vehicles with small dimensions 105 F0S1181 moving into the camera's field of vision,
and/or not aligned in the driving lane; may cause the system to intervene
fig. 107.

108
 CORRECT TYRE PRESSURE "Wheels" chapter in the "Technical
If no flat tyres are detected, the specifications" section).
outline of the car will be shown in the If the RESET is not carried out, in all
dedicated display screen. above cases, the warning light may
give false indications on one or more
LOW TYRE PRESSURE
tyres.
The system warns the driver if one or
more tyres are flat by switching on the To carry out the RESET procedure,
with the car stopped and the ignition
warning light on the instrument
device at ENGINE, use the Main Menu
panel and a warning message on
as follows:
107 F0S1183 the display, along with an acoustic
warning. go to "Vehicle info" and then to
Warnings "Reset tyre pressure";
This warning is displayed also when
The system has not been designed to press the "OK" and hold down (more
turning the engine off and on again until
prevent impacts and cannot detect than 2 seconds);
the RESET procedure is carried out.
possible conditions leading to an the display will show the procedure
accident in advance. Failure to take RESET PROCEDURE progress (with a graphic bar) till the
into account this warning may lead to The iTPMS needs an initial "self- RESET is completed.
serious or fatal injuries. learning" phase (with length depending At the end of the RESET procedure
In case of complex scenarios, on the driving style and road the display will show the "Reset
unexpected or unnecessary warnings conditions: optimal conditions being saved" message, indicating that the
or braking may occur. driving on a straight road at 80 km/h for self-learning has been started and you
at least 20 minutes) which starts when will hear an acoustic warning.
iTPMS (indirect Tyre the RESET procedure is carried out If the self-learning procedure of the
Pressure Monitoring manually. iTPMS system has not been carried out
System) The RESET procedure must be carried correctly, no warning is provided.
80) 81) 82) 83) 84) 85) out:
The car can be equipped with the OPERATING CONDITIONS
each time tyre pressure is modified;
iTPMS (indirect Tyre Pressure The system is active for speeds above
when even only one tyre is changed;
Monitoring System) which monitors the 15 km/h.
when tyres are rotated/inverted;
tyre inflation status thanks to wheel when the space-saver wheel is fitted. In a few situations such as sporty
speed sensors. Before carrying out the RESET driving, particular conditions of the road
procedure, inflate the tyres to the surface (e.g. icy, snowy, unsurfaced
rated pressure values specified in roads) the signalling may be delayed or
the inflation pressure table (see the

109
 partial in detecting the contemporary tarmacked road. If the indications

SAFETY
deflation of more than one tyre. persist, contact a Fiat Dealership.
Under special conditions (e.g. car ATTENTION ASSIST
loaded asymmetrically on one side, SYSTEM
towing a trailer, damaged or worn tyre, (where provided)
fitting the space-saver wheel, use
This is an auxiliary driving assistance
of the "Fix&Go" tyre repair kit, fitting
system that detects when the driver is
snow chains, fitting different tyres on
tired.
the axles) the system may provide
false indications or be temporarily ACTIVATION / DEACTIVATION 108 F0S1286
deactivated. The system can be
If the system is temporarily deactivated activated/deactivated via the "Settings" The (red) symbol appears on
the warning light flashes for about menu of the Uconnect™ system the instrument panel screen with a
75 seconds and then is continuously (see "Settings" in the"Vehicle mode" dedicated message suggesting the
on; at the same time, the display paragraph in the "Multimedia" section) driver to stop and take a break. An
shows a warning message and the or via the instrument panel (see acoustic signal is also emitted.
symbols "– –" will appear next to the "Settings" in the "Display" paragraph
If the driver accepts the suggestion
shape of the car next to each tyre. in the "Knowing the instrument panel"
provided by the system and stops for
This warning is displayed also after section).
a pause, by pressing the OK button
the engine has been switched off and SYSTEM INTERVENTION on the left side of the steering wheel,
then on again if the correct operating The system intervenes if the camera in the message will disappear from the
conditions are not restored. the middle of the windscreen fig. 108 display and the symbol will be
In the case of abnormal signals, it is detects that the driver is tired, based displayed in the dedicated area of the
recommended to perform the RESET on variations in car trajectory and instrument panel display up to the next
procedure. If the indications appear getting too close to the side of the time the motor is started/stopped.
again after a successful RESET, check road. If the driver ignores the warning
that the tyres used on all four wheels provided by the system and does
are the same and that the tyres are not stop, the message will remain on
not damaged. As soon as possible, the instrument panel display until the
refit the standard tyre instead of the OK button located on the left hand
space-saver wheel, remove the snow side controls of the steering wheel is
chains, if possible, check correct load
distribution and repeat the RESET pressed. The symbol , will remain
procedure by driving on a clean,

110
displayed in the dedicated area of the If the car continues going beyond the Activation conditions
instrument panel display. line of the lane without any intervention Once switched on, the system
IMPORTANT In the event of a system from the driver, the warning light becomes active only if the following
fault, the amber symbol appears on (or the icon on the reconfigurable conditions are met:
the instrument panel display together multifunction display) will be displayed the driver always keeps at least one
with a dedicated message. on the instrument panel to urge the hand on the steering wheel;
driver to bring the car back into the car speed ranges between 60 km/h
LANE CONTROL SYSTEM
limits of the lane. and 150 km/h;
DESCRIPTION
SYSTEM ON/OFF the lane is delimited at least on one
The Lane Control makes use of a
side;
camera located on the windscreen to When the car is started the system is
there are suitable visibility conditions;
detect the lane limits and calculate the disabled.
the road is straight or with wide
position of the car within such limits, To disengage the system, press the
radius bends;
in order to make sure that it remains (A) fig. 109 on the lever on the left
the direction indicator (lane
inside the lane. steering wheel twice. If the button is
departure) is not activated in the same
When the one of the lane lines is not pressed twice within 5 seconds,
lane departure direction as the vehicle.
detected and the car crosses it without the system will remain enabled.
the awareness of the driver (direction On some versions, a specific message
indicator off), the Lane Control system indicating disabling is shown on the WARNING The system does not apply
provides a tactile warning in form of display. the torque to the steering wheel when
torque applied to the steering wheel a safety system is activated (brakes,
(vibration) when the lane limit is ABS, ASR system, ESC system,
approached, thus advising the driver Autonomous Emergency Brake Control
that he must take an action to remain in (AEB) system, etc.).
the lane.
SYMBOLS AND MESSAGES ON
WARNING The torque applied to THE DISPLAY
the steering wheel by the system is The Lane Control also warns the driver
sufficient for the driver to notice it, when the car strays out of lane by
but always limited, so that they can displaying symbols and messages on
109 F0S1338
easily override it, and the driver always the instrument panel display.
maintains control of the car. The driver
can therefore turn the steering wheel as
required at all times.

111
 Versions with reconfigurable Exiting a lane with detection of If an obstruction is signalled, clean the

SAFETY
multifunction display both limits area of the windscreen by the interior
When the system is active and the lane When the system is active, the lane rear-view mirror and check that the
limits have not been detected, the lane lines on the display become white to message has disappeared.
lines are grey and a dedicated icon is indicate the successful detection of the Although the car can still be driven in
shown in the dedicated top area of the limits. normal conditions, the system may be
display. When both lane limits have been not completely available.
Exiting a lane with detection of a detected, the car shown in the graphic When the conditions limiting the
single limit icon on the display changes green and system functions end, this will go back
When the system is active and only, the system is ready. to normal and complete operation.
for example, the left lane limit has In accordance with the different Should the fault persist, contact a Fiat
been detected, the car icon is shown conditions detected, the system can Dealership.
in the dedicated area of the display; attract the attention of the driver by No hands on steering wheel
the system is ready to provide visual altering the lines that identify the lanes detection
warnings in the event of unintentional on the display. In particular, the system
If the system detects no hands from
exiting (direction indicator not activated) can alter their colour (from white to
the steering wheel during active system
of the lane to the left. yellow and vice versa), and make them
intervention, the system will produce an
When the system detects that the car flash. Equally, the system alters the
escalation of visual-acoustic warnings,
has approached the lane line, the left colour of the car icon shown on the
which will take 15 seconds to invite
line on the display turns yellow and display.
the driver to put the hands on the
the car icon shown on the display Changing the system settings steering wheel. If you do not put your
becomes yellow. The settings of the system can be hands on the wheel within this time, the
When the system detects that the car changed through the Uconnect™ system will disconnect and provide an
has approached the lane line and is system (see description in the additional warning for 5 seconds.
about to pass it, the left line on the dedicated supplement). System Fault Message
display (yellow) flashes and the car icon
System limited operation warning If the system switches off and a
shown on the display turns yellow.
33) 34) dedicated message is shown on the
The system operates in the same way, display, it means that there is a fault on
but mirrored, in the event of exiting the If the dedicated message is shown
on the display, a condition limiting the the system.
right lane when only the right lane limit
system operation may have occurred. In this case, it is still possible to drive
has been detected.
The possible reasons of this limitation the car, but you are advised to contact
are something blocking the camera a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.
view or a fault.

112
 Therefore, in this case the system must be above or from the rear, with respect to the
WARNING deactivated. normal size of the car.
80) If the iTPMS system signals a pressure 30) Operation can be adversely affected
74) The system is an aid for car driving, drop on the tyres, it is recommended to by any structural change made to the
it DOES NOT warn the driver about check the pressure on all four tyres. car, such as a modification to the front
incoming cars outside of the detection 81) The iTPMS does not relieve the driver geometry, tyre change, or a heavier load
areas. The driver must always maintain from the obligation to check the tyre than the standard load of the car.
a sufficient level of attention to the traffic pressure every month; it is not even to be 31) Incorrect repairs in the zone where the
and road conditions and for controlling the considered a replacement system for camera is mounted may interfere with its
trajectory of the vehicle. maintenance or a safety system. field of vision and reduce its performance
75) The system is an aid for the driver, 82) Tyre pressure must be checked with (e.g. application of fillers or glues to
who must always pay full attention while tyres cold. Should it become necessary for remove scratches). Go to a Fiat Dealership
driving. The responsibility always rests with whatever reason to check pressure with for any operation of this type.
the driver, who must take into account warm tyres, do not reduce pressure even 32) Do not tamper with nor operate on the
the traffic conditions in order to drive in though it is higher than the prescribed camera on the windscreen. In the event of
complete safety. The driver must always value, but repeat the check when tyres are a sensor failure, contact a Fiat Dealership.
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in cold. 33) The camera may have limited
front. 83) The iTPMS cannot indicate sudden or absent operation due to weather
76) The capability of the Autonomous tyre pressure drops (for example when a conditions such as: heavy rain, hail, thick
Emergency Brake Control system tyre bursts). In this case, stop the vehicle, fog, heavy snow, formation of ice layers on
must never be tested irresponsibly braking with caution and avoiding abrupt the windscreen glass.
or dangerously, in such a way as to steering. 34) Camera operation may also be
compromise personal safety and the 84) The system only warns that the tyre compromised by the presence of
safety of others. pressure is low: it is not able to inflate dust, condensation, dirt or ice on the
77) If the driver presses the accelerator them. windscreen glass, by traffic conditions
pedal fully or steers abruptly during 85) Insufficient tyre inflation increases (e.g. cars that are driving not aligned
system operation, the automatic braking electrical energy consumption, reduces the with yours, car driving in a transverse or
function may stop (e.g. to allow a possible tread duration and may affect your ability opposite way on the same lane, bend
manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle). to drive safely. with a small radius of curvature), by
78) The system intervenes on vehicles, road surface conditions and by driving
pedestrians and cyclists travelling in conditions (e.g. off-road driving). Make
the same lane. Animals and things IMPORTANT sure the windscreen is always clean. Use
(e.g. pushchairs) are not taken into specific detergents and clean cloths to
consideration. avoid scratching the windscreen. The
28) The system may have limited operation
79) If the car must be placed on a roller camera operation may also be limited or
or not work at all in weather conditions
bench for maintenance or if it is washed in absent in some driving, traffic and road
such as, low sun, heavy rain, hail, thick
an automatic car wash with an obstacle surface conditions.
fog, heavy snow.
in the front part (e.g. another vehicle, a
29) System intervention might be
wall or another obstacle), the system
unexpected or delayed when other cars
may detect its presence and activate.
transport loads projecting from the side,

113
 OCCUPANT SEAT BELTS Press button (C) fig. 110 to release the

SAFETY
PROTECTION belt.
All car seats are equipped with seat
Guide the belt while it is rewinding to
SYSTEMS belts with three anchorage points and a
prevent it from twisting. Through the
retractor. The reel mechanism operates
Some of the most important safety retractor, the belt automatically adapts
locking the belt in the event of sharp
equipment of the car comprise the to the body of the passenger wearing
braking or strong deceleration due to a
following protection systems: it, allowing freedom of movement.
collision.
seat belts;
This allows the belt strap to slide
SBR (Seat Belt Reminder) system;
freely and to adapt to the body
head restraints;
of the occupant. In the event of
child restraint systems;
front airbags and side bags. an accident, the belt will lock
reducing the risk of impact inside the
Read the information given the
passenger compartment and of being
following pages with the utmost care.
projected outside the car. The driver
It is of fundamental importance that
is responsible for respecting, and
the protection systems are used in the
ensuring that all the other occupants of
correct way to guarantee the maximum
the vehicle also respect, the local laws 110 F0S1201
possible safety level for the driver and
in force in relation to the use of the seat
the passengers. The retractor may lock when the car
belts.
For the description of the head restraint is parked on a steep slope: this is
Always fasten the seat belts before
adjustment, see the "Head restraints" perfectly normal. Furthermore, the
setting off.
chapter in the "Knowing your car" reel mechanism locks the belt if it is
section. USING THE SEAT BELTS pulled sharply or in the event of sudden
Always fasten the seat belts before braking, collisions and high-speed
setting off. bends.
The belt should be worn keeping the The rear seat is fitted with inertia seat
torso straight and rested against the belts with three anchoring points and a
backrest. retractor.
To fasten the seat belts, hold fastening
tongue (A) fig. 110 and insert it into WARNING For the rear door version,
buckle (B), until it clicks into place. the passenger side seat belt is installed
On removal, if the belt jams, let it on the rear side door. Always make
rewind for a short stretch, then pull it sure the door is closed before fastening
out again without jerking. the seat belt.

114
WARNING Wear the rear seat belts as SBR (SEAT BELT simultaneously with warning light
shown in fig. 111. REMINDER) SYSTEM flashing for about 105 seconds.
Once activated, this indication cycle
(where provided) stays active for the entire time if the
The SBR system warns the car is moving faster than 8 km/h or if
passengers of the front and rear (for reverse gear is not engaged or until the
versions/markets, where provided) seat belts are fastened.
seats if their seat belt is not fastened. If the car speed drops to less than
The system warnings unfastened seat 8 km/h or if reverse gear is engaged
belts with visual warnings (warning during the warning cycle, the tone will
lights on in the instrument panel and be interrupted and the warning light
icons on the display) and an acoustic switches on fixed.
warning (see the following paragraphs). If the entire time has not elapsed and
111 F0S1259
NOTE Contact a Fiat Dealership to reverse gear is not engaged, the
deactivate this acoustic warning indication cycle is reactivated as soon
WARNING When putting the back seat permanently. The acoustic warning can as the car speed exceeds 20 km/h
to its normal position, make sure the be reactivated at any time through the again.
seat belts are positioned so they are display Setup Menu. Operation of rear seat belt icons
ready to use. Seat belts warning light operation The icons are shown on the display
When the ignition device is turned to fig. 112.
86) 87) ENGINE, the warning light comes
on for a few seconds, regardless of the
status of the front seat belts. P
WARNING With car moving slower than 20 km/h,
if the driver side seat belt or the A B
86) Never press button (C) fig. 110 when passenger side seat belt (with POWER
travelling. occupant seated) is unfastened, the
87) Remember that in the event of an warning light stays on constantly.
accident, the rear seat passengers not As soon as a speed threshold of
wearing seat belts are exposed to a very
serious risk and also represent a serious 20 km/h is reached, with driver side
112 F0S1176
danger for the front seat occupants. seat belt or the passenger side seat
belt (with occupant seated) unfastened, The icons shown on the display
an acoustic warning is activated indicate:
A: rear left seat belt;

115
 B: rear right seat belt. The icons all stay off if all seat belts any changes to its original conditions

SAFETY
With the car travelling as speed lower (front and rear) are fastened when the will invalidate its efficiency.
than 20 km/h, if a rear seat belt is ignition device is set to the ENGINE If, due to unusual natural events
unbuckled, the icon stays on with fixed position. For the rear seats, the icons (floods, sea storms, etc.), the device
light for a total of approximately 65 will activate a few seconds after the has been affected by water or mud,
seconds. ignition device has been turned to have it replaced.
The icons are displayed according to ENGINE regardless of the status of the
the corresponding seat belts in the seat belts (even if the seat belts are all WARNING To obtain the highest
rear seats, and stay on for about 65 fastened). degree of protection from the action of
seconds from the last seat belt status All the icons will come on when at least the pretensioner, wear the seat belt
change: one belt changes from fastened to tight to the chest and pelvis.
if the seat belt is fastened the unfastened status or vice versa.
corresponding icon will be green;
PRE-TENSIONERS 88) 89) 90)
if the seat belt is unfastened the
corresponding icon will be red. The car is equipped with front and rear 35)

If the car is travelling at a speed seat belts pretensioners, that reduce LOAD LIMITERS
faster than 20 km/h and reverse is slack in the belts in the event of a To increase occupant safety, the
not engaged, if a rear seat belt is severe frontal collision. This guarantees retractors of the safety belts contain a
unbuckled, an acoustic warning the perfect adherence of the seat belts load limiter to dose the force acting on
is sounded when the icon blinks to the occupants' bodies before the the chest and shoulders during the belt
for approximately 35 seconds. restraining action begins. restraining action in the case of frontal
Successively, the acoustic warning is It is evident that the pretensioners have collisions.
deactivated and the icon lights up with operated when the belt withdraws
fixed light until the end of the entire towards the retractor. This car is also GENERAL WARNINGS
cycle. Furthermore, the icons lights up equipped with a second pretensioner FOR USING THE SEAT
for a few seconds whenever one of the (fitted in the kick plate area). Its BELTS
rear doors is opened. activation is signalled by the shortening 91)

of the metal cable. Seat belts are also to be worn by

WARNING As far as the rear seats A slight discharge of smoke may be pregnant women: the risk of injury in
are concerned, the SBR system will produced during the activation of the the case of collision is greatly reduced
only indicate whether the seat belts pretensioner which is not harmful and for them and the unborn child if they
are unfastened (red icon) or fastened does not involve any fire hazard. The are wearing a seat belt.
(green icon), not the presence of any pretensioner does not require any Pregnant women must position the
passengers. maintenance or lubrication: lower part of the belt very low down so

116
that it passes over the pelvis and under always use the seat belt with the
the abdomen (see fig. 113). strap well stretched and not twisted;
While pregnancy increases, the driver make sure that it is free to run without
must adjust both seat and steering obstructions;
wheel to have full control over the car check seat belt operation as follows:
(pedals and steering wheel should be attach the seat belt and pull it hard;
easily accessed). replace the seat belt after an
The maximum clearance should be accident of a certain severity even if
kept between the abdomen and the it does not appear to be damaged.
steering wheel. 114 F0S1251
Always replace the seat belt if the
pretensioners were deployed;
Each seat belt must be used by only prevent the retractors from getting
one person. Never travel with a child wet: their correct operation is only
sitting on the passenger's lap and guaranteed if water does not get inside
a single belt to protect them both replace the seat belt when it shows
fig. 115. In general, do not place any wear or cuts.
objects between the person and the
belt.
WARNING
113 F0S1258
88) The pretensioner may be used only
once. Contact a Fiat Dealership to have it
The seat belt strap must not be replaced after it has been deployed.
twisted. The upper part must pass 89) For maximum safety, keep the
over the shoulder and cross the backrest upright, lean back into it and
chest diagonally. The lower part must make sure the seat belt fits closely across
adhere to the pelvis (as shown in your chest and pelvis. Always fasten the
seat belts on both the front and the rear
fig. 114) rather than the abdomen of seats! Travelling without wearing seat belts
the passenger. Never use devices 115 F0S1252 will increase the risk of serious injury and
(clips, clamps, etc.) that hold the seat even death in the event of an accident.
belt away from your body. SEAT BELTS 90) Removing or tampering with seat
MAINTENANCE belt and pretensioner components is
strictly prohibited. Any intervention on
For keeping the seat belts in efficient these components must be performed
conditions, carefully observe the by qualified and authorised technicians.
following warnings: Always go to a Fiat Dealership.

117
 CHILD RESTRAINT characteristics of the child seats used

SAFETY
91) If the belt has been sharply pulled, for
example as the result of an accident, the SYSTEMS allow, you are advised to keep children
seat belt, together with the anchoring in rear facing child seats for as long
devices, the anchoring device fixing CARRYING CHILDREN as possible (at least until 3–4 years
screws and the pretensioner must be SAFELY
completely replaced. Even if the belt does
old), since this is the most protected
not present any exterior signs of wear or 92) 93) 94) 95) position in the event of a collision.
damage, it may have lost its restraining For optimal protection in the event The choice of the most suitable child
properties. of an impact, all occupants must be restraint system depends on the weight
seated and wearing adequate restraint and size of the child. There are various
IMPORTANT systems, including newborn and types of child restraint systems, which
children! can be secured to the car by means
35) Operations which lead to impacts, This prescription is compulsory in all of the seat belts or with the ISOFIX
vibrations or localised heating (over 100°C EC countries according to EC Directive anchorages.
for a maximum of six hours) in the area 2003/20/EC. It is recommended to always choose
around the pretensioners may damage or the restraint system most suitable for
deploy them. Contact a Fiat Dealership
Children below the height of 1.50
should intervention be necessary on these metres and up to 12 years must be the child; for this reason always refer to
components. protected with suitable restraint the Owner Handbook provided with the
systems and be seated on the rear child restraint system, to be sure that it
seats. is of the right type for the children it is
Statistics on accidents indicate that intended for.
the rear seats offer greater safety for For correct installation on the car, some
children. universal child restraint systems require
Compared with an adult, a child's head an accessory (base) sold separately
is larger and heavier in proportion to by the restraint system's producer.
their body and the child's muscular Therefore, FCA advises customers to
and bone structures are not fully check that their chosen child restraint
developed. Therefore, correct restraint system can be installed on their vehicle
systems other than adult seat belts by performing a trial installation, on the
are necessary, to reduce as much as vendor's premises, before purchase.
possible the risk of injuries in the event
of an accident, braking or sudden
manoeuvre.
Children must be seated safely
and comfortably. As far as the

118
 WARNING

92) SEVERE DANGER When a front

passenger airbag is fitted, do not install
rearward facing child restraint systems
on the front passenger seat. Deployment
of the airbag in a crash could cause fatal
injuries to the child regardless of the
severity of the collision. It is advisable to
always carry children in a child restraint
system on the rear seat, which is the
most protected position in the event of a
collision.
93) On the sun visor there is a label with
suitable symbols reminding the user that
it is compulsory to deactivate the airbag if
a rearward facing child restraint system is
fitted. Always comply with the instructions
on the passenger side sun visor (see the
"Supplementary Restraint System (SRS) -
Airbag" paragraph).
94) Should it be necessary to carry a child
on the passenger side front seat in a
rearward facing child restraint system, the
passenger side front airbag and side bag
must be deactivated through the display
main menu (see the "Display" chapter
in the "Knowing the instrument panel"
section), verifying deactivation by checking
whether the OFF LED has switched on
in the trim located on centre ceiling light.
Move the passenger's seat as far back
as possible to avoid contact between the
child restraint system and the dashboard.
95) Do not move the front or rear seat if
a child is seated on it or on the dedicated
child restraint system.

119
 In Europe the characteristics of child restraint systems are ruled by the regulation ECE-R44, dividing them into five weight

SAFETY
groups:
 
Group Age Weight groups Size class/Fixing

ISO/L1

Group 0 Indicatively up to 9 months Up to 10 kg in weight ISO/L2

ISO/R1

ISO/R1

Group 0+ Indicatively up to 2 years Up to 13 kg in weight ISO/R2

ISO/R3

ISO/R2

ISO/R3
Indicatively from 8 months to 4
Group 1 9-18 kg ISO/F2
years
ISO/F2X

ISO/F3

Group 2 Indicatively from 3 to 7 years 15 - 25 kg –

Group 3 Indicatively from 6 to 12 years 22 - 36 kg –

All restraint devices must bear the type-approval data, together with the control mark, on a label solidly fixed to the child
restraint system which must never be removed.
Lineaccessori MOPAR® includes child restraint systems for each weight group. These devices are recommended having been
specifically designed for Fiat vehicles.

120
INSTALLING A CHILD child’s chest and not the neck, and the
RESTRAINT SYSTEM lower part is snug on the pelvis not the
WITH SEAT BELTS abdomen.
96) 97) 98) 99)

The Universal child restraint systems

installed with the seat belts only are
type-approved on the basis of the ECE
R44 standard and are divided into
various weight groups.
116 F0S1253

WARNING The figures are indicative

and provided for assembly purposes Group 1
only. Fit the child restraint system Children weighing from 9 to 18 kg may 118 F0S1257

according to the instructions, which be transported in forward facing child

must be included. restraint systems fig. 117. Group 3
For children between 22 and 36 kg,
there are dedicated restraint systems
WARNING Following an accident of a
that allow the seat belt to be worn
certain importance, it is recommended
correctly.
to replace both the child restraint
The fig. 119 shows the correct child
system and the seat belt to which it
positioning on the rear seat.
was bound.

Group 0 and 0+
Infants up to 13 kg must be carried
117 F0S1255
with a rearward facing child restraint
system of the type shown in fig. 116 Group 2
which, supporting the head, does not
Children from 15 to 25 kg may be
induce stress on the neck in the event
restrained directly by the car seat belts
of sudden decelerations.
fig. 118.
The child restraint system is restrained
In this case, the child restraint system 119 F0S1256
by the car seat belts, as shown in
is used to position the child correctly
fig. 116 and it must restrain the child in Children over 1.50 m in height can
with respect to the seat belts so that
turn with its own belts. wear seat belts like adults.
the diagonal belt section crosses the

121
 INSTALLING AN ISOFIX

SAFETY
CHILD RESTRAINT A
SYSTEM
100) 101) 102) 103) 104)

The car is equipped with ISOFIX

anchorages (European standard which
makes the installation of the seats
quick and safe), on the rear seats and
on the front passenger seat.
The ISOFIX system lets you install the 120 F0S1321 122 F0S1254

ISOFIX child restraint system without

using the car seat belts but connecting WARNING Following an accident of a
them directly to the car seat with three certain severity, it is recommended to
anchorages in the car. replace both the child restraint system
Traditional child restraint systems and the ISOFIX anchorages. The other
can be fitted alongside ISOFIX child weight groups are covered by specific
restraint systems on different seats in ISOFIX child restraint systems, which
the same car. can be used only if specifically tested
To install an ISOFIX child restraint for this car (see list of cars provided
system, attach it to the two metal with the child restraint system).
anchorages (A) fig. 120 located in the 121 F0S1322

back of the passenger front seat and For any further details on
of the rear seats indicated by the WARNING The diagram is indicative installation/use, refer to the instruction
symbol in the point where the seat and for fitting purposes only. Fit the manual for the child restraint system.
cushion meets the backrest, remove child restraint system according to the
the parcel shelf and fix the upper SUITABILITY OF
instructions, which must be included.
strap (provided with the child restraint PASSENGER SEATS FOR
system) to the dedicated anchoring (B) i-SIZE CHILD RESTRAINT
NOTE When a Universal ISOFIX child SYSTEM USE
fig. 121 located at the bottom of the restraint system is used, only ECE R44
seat back. (where provided)
"ISOFIX Universal" (R44/03 or further
fig. 122 shows an example of a These child restraint systems, built and
upgrades) type-approved child restraint
Universal ISOFIX child restraint system type-approved according to the i-Size
systems can be used.
for weight group 1. (ECE R129) standard, ensure better

122
safety conditions to carry children on it from the car. Do not leave it unsecured
board a vehicle: inside the passenger compartment. In this
the child must be transported way, in the event of sudden braking or an
accident, it will not cause injuries to the
rearward facing until 15 months;
occupants.
child restraint system protection 99) After installing a child restraint system,
is increased in the event of a side do not move the seat: always remove the
collision; child restraint system before making any
the use of the ISOFIX system is adjustment.
promoted to avoid faulty installation of 100) Always make sure that the chest
section of the seat belt does not pass
the child restraint system; under the arms or behind the back of the
123 J0A0450
efficiency in the choice of the child child. In the event of an accident the seat
restraint system, which isn't made NOTE See the table shown on the belt will not be able to secure the child,
according to weight any more but with the risk of injury, including fatal injury.
following page to check whether your Therefore the child must always wear the
according to the child's height, is car is approved for installing i-Size child seat belt correctly.
increased; restraint systems. 101) Never use the same lower anchorage
compatibility between the car seats to attach more than one child restraint.
and the child restraint systems is 102) If a Universal ISOFIX child restraint
better: the i-Size child restraint systems system is not fixed to all three anchorages,
WARNING it will not be able to protect the child
can be considered as "Super ISOFIX";
this means that they can be perfectly correctly. In a crash, the child could be
96) Child restraint systems with Isofix seriously or fatally injured.
fitted in type-approved i-Size seats, but attachments are available for safe 103) Fit the child restraint system when
can also be fitted in ISOFIX (ECE R44) anchoring to the seat without using the the car is stationary. The child restraint
type-approved seats. car seat belts. For this type of seats see system is correctly fixed to the brackets
NOTE If your car seats are i-Size paragraph "Installation of an Isofix child when you hear the click. Follow the
restraint system" in this chapter. instructions for assembly, disassembly and
approved, the symbol shown in fig. 123
97) Incorrect fitting of the child restraint positioning that the Manufacturer must
will appear on the seats near the system may result in an inefficient supply with the child restraint system.
ISOFIX attachments. protection system. In the event of an 104) The diagram is indicative and for
accident the child restraint system may fitting purposes only. Fit the child restraint
become loose and the child may be system according to the instructions,
injured, even fatally. When fitting a restraint which must be included.
system for newborns or children, strictly
comply with the instructions provided by
the Manufacturer.
98) When the child restraint system is
not used, secure it with the seat belt or
with the ISOFIX anchorages, or remove

123
 Child restraint system installation

SAFETY
 
The following table provides guidelines on positioning child restraint systems on the car
seats. Each child restraint system position complies with the UNECE standards

 
Number of seats
3
Seat number 1 Airbag 4 6
Airbag ENABLED
DISABLED

Seat suitable for universal

rearward facing child restraint X NO YES (U) YES (U) YES (U)
systems

Seat suitable for universal

forward facing child restraint X YES (UF)(a) NO YES (UF) YES (UF)
systems

i-Size rearward facing seat X NO YES (i-U) NO YES ** (i-U)

i-Size forward facing seat X YES (i-UF) (a) NO NO YES** (i-UF)

Seat suitable for ISOFIX side

X NO NO NO NO
child restraint systems (L1| L2)

Seat suitable for ISOFIX

YES (Only R1 and YES (Only R1 and
rearward facing child restraint X NO NO
R2) * (IL) R2) ** (IL)
system (R1 | R2 | R3)

124
 Number of seats
3
Seat number 1 Airbag 4 6
Airbag ENABLED
DISABLED

Seat suitable for ISOFIX

forward facing child restraint X YES (IUF)(a) NO YES (IUF) YES (IUF)
system (F2 | F2X | F3)

Seat suitable for ISOFIX

YES (Only B2)
auxiliary child restraint X NO YES (Only B2) (IUF) YES (Only B2) (IUF)
(IUF) (a)
systems (B2/B3)
U = Position suitable for a "universal" child restraint system approved for this weight category.
UF = Position suitable for a "universal" forward facing child restraint system approved for this weight category.
IUF = Position suitable for an "ISOFIX" universal forward facing child restraint system approved for this weight category.
i- U = Position suitable for an i-Size "universal" rearward facing child restraint system.
i-UF = Position suitable for an i-Size "universal" forward facing child restraint system.
IL = Position suitable for specific listed ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS). These ISOFIX CRS are classified as "vehicle-specific", "restricted
use" and "semi-universal".
X = Not applicable. The seat is not approved for installation of child restraint systems.
* = Installation only possible by moving the seat backwards.
** = Installation only possible by moving the corresponding front seat forwards. In this configuration, the front seat must not be occupied.
(a) = With forward facing child restraint system, the seat must be positioned no more forward than the longitudinal halfway point.
NOTE It may be necessary to remove the head restraints when installing the seats.

125
 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS RECOMMENDED BY FIAT FOR YOUR CAR

SAFETY
In the markets for which they are available, Lineaccessori MOPAR ® offers a complete range of child restraint systems to be
fixed using the seat belt with three anchor points or the ISOFIX anchorages.
IMPORTANT FCA recommends fitting the child restraint system according to the instructions, which must be included.
 
Child restraint system
Weight group Child restraint system Type of child restraint system
installation

Peg Perego Primo Viaggio i-

Size
Fiat order code: 50290501
i-Size universal child restraint
system. It is installed in the
opposite direction to the direction
of travel with the mandatory use
Group 0+: from birth to 13 + + of the i-Size sub-base (can be
kg from 40 cm to 80 cm purchased together with the child
restraint system or separately) and
the ISOFIX anchorages of the car.
It must be fitted on the right rear
seat.
Peg Perego Base i-Size
Fiat order code: 50290505

126
 Child restraint system
Weight group Child restraint system Type of child restraint system
installation

Peg Perego Viaggio FF105

Fiat order code: 50290502

i-Size approved child restraint

system. It must be installed on the
car absolutely together with the
Peg Perego Base i-Size sub-base
Group 0+/1: from 9 to 18 + + (to be purchased separately or
kg, from 67 cm to 105 cm
together with the Peg Perego
Primo Viaggio i-Size child restraint
system). It must be fitted on the
right rear seat.

Peg Perego Base i-Size

Fiat order code: 50290505

127
 SAFETY
Child restraint system
Weight group Child restraint system Type of child restraint system
installation

It can only be fitted facing

forwards, using the three-point seat
Peg Perego Viaggio 2 3 Shuttle belt and the ISOFIX anchorages
Group 2: from 15 to 25 Plus collezione 500 (where of the vehicle, if present. Fiat
kg, from 95 cm to 135 cm provided) recommends installing it using
Fiat order code: 50290503 the ISOFIX anchorage points of
the car. Advisable, it should be
fitted on the rear outer seats.

It can only be fitted facing

forwards, using the three-point seat
Peg Perego Viaggio 2 3 Shuttle belt and the ISOFIX anchorages
Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg Plus collezione 500 (where of the vehicle, if present. Fiat
from 136 cm to 150 cm provided) recommends installing it using
Fiat order code: 50290503 the ISOFIX anchorage points of
the car. Advisable, it should be
fitted on the rear outer seats.

128
Main recommendations to carry Never carry children on your lap, SUPPLEMENTARY
children safely even newborns. No-one can hold a RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Install the child restraint systems child in the case of a collision.
on the rear seat, which is the most If the car has been involved in a road (SRS) - AIRBAG
protected position in the event of a accident, replace the child restraint The car may be equipped with:
collision. system with a new one. In addition, front driver airbag;
Keep children in rearward facing and depending on the type of child front passenger airbag;
child restraint systems for as long as restraint system installed, replace the driver and passenger front side
possible, until 3–4 years old if possible. ISOFIX anchorages or the seat belt with bags for pelvis, chest and shoulder
If the passenger's front airbag which the child restraint system was protection;
is deactivated always check the connected. window bags for head protection of
dedicated warning light on the trim The rear head restraint can be front seat passengers and rear side
located on the dashboard to make sure removed if needed to install a child seat passengers.
that it has actually been deactivated. restraint system. The head restraint 105) 106) 107) 108) 109) 110)
Carefully follow the instructions must always be present in the car and
supplied with the child restraint system. fitted if the seat is used by an adult FRONT AIRBAGS
Keep the instructions in the car along passenger or a child sitting in a child 111)

with the other documents and this restraint system without backrest. The front (driver and passenger)
handbook. Do not use second-hand airbags protect the front seat
child seats without instructions. occupants in the event of head-on
Only one child is to be strapped crashes of medium-high severity, by
into each restraint system; never carry placing the cushion between the
two children using one child restraint occupant and the steering wheel or
system. dashboard.
Always check that the seat belts do Therefore non-activation of airbags in
not rest on the child’s neck. other types of collisions (side impacts,
Always check that the seat belt is rear shunts, roll-overs, etc.) does not
well fastened by pulling on it. indicate a system malfunction.
While travelling, do not let the child An electronic control unit will make
sit incorrectly or unfasten the belts. the bag inflate in the event of a frontal
Never allow a child to put the belt's impact.
diagonal section under an arm or The bag will inflate instantaneously
behind their back. placing itself between the front
occupants body and the structures

129
 which could cause injury. It will deflate fills most of the space between the fig. 125: this bag has a larger volume

SAFETY
immediately afterwards. steering wheel and the driver and than the driver's.
Front airbags are not a replacement of between the dashboard and the
but complementary to the seat belts, passenger.
which you are recommended to always The airbags are not deployed in the
wear, as specified by law in Europe and event of minor frontal impacts (for
most non-European countries. which the restraining action of the seat
In the event of a collision, someone not belts is sufficient). Seat belts must
wearing a seat belt could move forward always be worn. In the event of a
and come into contact with a bag frontal collision, they ensure the correct
which is still opening. The protection positioning of the occupant.
offered by the bag is compromised in Driver's side front airbag 125 F0S1147
these circumstances.
112)
The front airbags may not be deployed Passenger's front airbag and child
This consists of an instantly
in the following cases: frontal impact restraint systems
inflating bag contained in a special
against highly deformable objects not
compartment A in the centre of the 113)
involving the front surface of the car
steering wheel fig. 124. Rearward facing child restraint systems
(e.g. wing collision against guard rail);
must NEVER be fitted on the front
in the case of the car wedging under
seat with an active passenger side
other cars or protective barriers (e.g.
bag since in the event of a collision
under trucks or guard rails).
the airbag deployment may cause fatal
Failure to activate in the conditions injuries to the transported child.
described above is due to the fact
ALWAYS comply with the instructions
that they may not provide any
on the label stuck on both sides of the
additional protection compared with
sun visor (fig. 126).
seat belts, so their activation would
be inappropriate. In these cases,
non-deployment does not indicate a 124 F0S1145

system malfunction.
The driver's and passenger's front Passenger front airbag
airbags have been designed and This consists of an instantly
calibrated to protect front seat inflating bag contained in a special
occupants wearing seat belts. At compartment in the dashboard
their maximum inflation, their volume

130
 108) If the car is scrapped, have the It is advisable to always carry children in
system deactivated at a Fiat Dealership. a child restraint system on the rear seat,
109) Pretensioners, front airbags and which is the most protected position in the
side bags are deployed according to event of a collision.
different logics on the basis of the type of
collision. Failure to activate one or more of
the devices does not indicate a system
malfunction.
110) Should an accident occur in which
any of the safety devices are activated,
take the car to a Fiat Dealership to have
126 F0S1261 the activated devices replaced and to have
the whole system checked.
111) Do not apply stickers or other objects
WARNING on the steering wheel, on the dashboard
in the passenger side airbag area, on
the side upholstery on the roof and
105) The front airbags and/or side bags on the seats. Never put objects (e.g.
may be deployed if the car is subject to mobile phones) on the passenger's side
heavy knocks or accidents involving the dashboard since they could interfere with
underbody area, such as for example correct inflation of the airbag and also
violent shocks against steps, pavements cause serious injury to the passengers.
or low obstacles, the car falling in big holes 112) The airbag must be able to inflate
or dips in the road. without obstruction in the event of
106) A small amount of dust will be deployment. It is therefore recommended
released when the airbags are deployed. not to drive with the body bent forward,
The dust is not harmful and does but to sit up resting your back and
not indicate the beginning of a fire. shoulders on the backrest of the seat.
Furthermore, the surface of the deployed Adjusting the position of the seat so that
bag and the interior of the car may be you can reach and manoeuvre the steering
covered by a dusty residue: this may wheel comfortably with your arms slightly
irritate skin and eyes. Wash with mild soap bent being as far away as possible from
and water in the event of exposure. Every the steering wheel. Being too close to
control, repair and replacement operation the steering wheel when the airbag is
concerning the airbags must only be deployed may cause serious injury.
carried out at a Fiat Dealership. If the car is 113) When there is an active passenger
scrapped, have the system deactivated at airbag, DO NOT install rearward facing
a Fiat Dealership. child restraint systems on the front seat.
107) Every control, repair and replacement Deployment of the airbag in a crash
operation concerning the airbags must could cause fatal injuries to the child
only be carried out at a Fiat Dealership. regardless of the severity of the collision.

131
 Passenger's front airbag and child restraint systems: WARNING

SAFETY

127 F0S1025

132
Deactivating the SIDE BAGS - WINDOW Window bag
passenger side airbags: BAGS These consist of two "curtain" bags
front airbag and front To help increase occupant protection housed behind the side upholstery
side bag in the event of a side collision, the car of the roof fig. 130 and covered with
114) 115) 116) is equipped with front side bags (for finishing elements, which protect the
(where provided) versions/markets, where provided) and heads of front and rear occupants and
Warning light (A) fig. 128 indicates that window bags (where provided). of rear side seat occupants in the event
the front passenger airbag and the Side bags protect occupants from of a side collision thanks to a wide bag
front side bag (where provided) are side-on crashes of medium/high deployment area.
active. In this case, it is forbidden to severity by placing the bag between
install a rearward-facing seat on the the occupant and the internal parts of
passenger seat. the side structure of the car.
Warning light (B) fig. 128 indicates the Non-activation of side bags in other
deactivation of the front passenger types of collisions (front collisions, rear
airbag and the front side bag (where shunts, roll-overs, etc.) is not a system
provided) and remains lit until they are malfunction.
reactivated. Side bag
These comprise two instantly inflating
bags located in the front seat backrests 130 F0S1149

fig. 129, which protect the pelvis, chest

Warnings
and shoulder area of the occupants
in the event of a side collision of In the event of a side collision, the
medium/high severity. system provides best protection if the
passenger sits on the seat in a correct
position, thus allowing correct window
bag deployment.
128 F0S1148 117) 118) 119) 120) 121) 122) 123) 124) 125) 126) 127)

128)

WARNING To manually deactivate the

passenger side front airbag and the
front side bag (where provided), see the
"Display" chapter in the "Knowing the
instrument panel" section. 129 F0S1289

133
 SAFETY
that it is deactivated by checking the stationary and hit by another car even if
WARNING dedicated warning light on the instrument the motor is switched off. Therefore, even
panel. Move the passenger's seat as if the car is stationary, when an active front
114) In some versions, in the event of far back as possible to avoid contact passenger airbag is fitted, DO NOT install
a failure of the LED (located on the between the child restraint system and the rearward facing child restraint systems
dashboard. on the front passenger seat. Deployment
centre ceiling light), the warning light
117) If the warning light does not of the airbag following a collision could
on the instrument panel turns on and the
switch on or stays on whilst driving when cause fatal injuries to the child. Therefore,
passenger side airbags are deactivated.
the ignition device is turned to ENGINE, a always deactivate the passenger side
115) The warning light indicates the airbag when a rearward facing child
failure may have occurred in the restraint
passenger airbag protection status. If restraint system is installed on the front
systems. In this case the airbags or
the warning light is off, passenger side passenger seat. The front passenger seat
pretensioners may not be deployed in an
protection is active: to deactivate it, use must also be positioned back as far as
impact or, in a lower number of cases,
the Setup Menu (in this case the LED possible in order to prevent the child
they may be deployed accidentally.
lights up). When the car is started (ignition restraint system from coming into contact
Contact a Fiat Dealership immediately to
device turned to in the ENGINE position), with the dashboard. Immediately reactivate
have the system checked.
the warning light turns on for about 8 the passenger airbag as soon as the child
seconds, provided that at least 5 seconds 118) Malfunction of the warning light
is indicated by the activation of an airbag restraint system has been removed. Also
have elapsed from when it was switched remember that, if the ignition device is
off. If the passenger airbag protection is failure symbol and a dedicated message
on the instrument panel display (or, for set to STOP, none of the safety devices
activated after 8 seconds, the warning (airbags or pretensioners) will be deployed
light will go out. If not, contact a Fiat versions where provided, by the activation
of a blinking generic failure warning light). in the event of collision. Non-deployment
Dealership. If the motor is started/stopped in such cases does not indicate a system
again in less than 5 seconds the warning In this case, the warning light may not
indicate a possible problem with the airbag malfunction.
light may remain off. In this case, to check 123) Do not wash the seats with water or
correct warning light operation, switch the restraint system. Contact a Fiat Dealership
immediately to have the system checked. pressurised steam (wash by hand or at
motor off, wait for at least 5 seconds automatic seat washing stations).
and switch the engine on again. The 119) Do not use seatcovers on front seats
featuring side airbags. 124) The airbag deployment threshold
warning light may light up with various is higher than that of the pretensioners.
intensity levels depending on the car 120) Do not travel with objects in your lap,
in front of your chest or held in your mouth For collisions in the range between the
conditions. The intensity may also vary two thresholds, it is normal for only the
during the same key cycle. On moving the (e.g., pipe, pencil etc.). They could cause
severe injury if the airbag is deployed in a pretensioners to be activated.
ignition device to the ENGINE position, 125) Do not affix rigid objects to the coat
the warning light switches on for 8 crash.
121) If the car has been stolen or in the hooks or support handles.
seconds. Afterwards, in the event of active 126) The airbag does not replace seat
passenger airbag protection, the warning case of attempt to steal it, if it has been
subjected to vandalism or floods, have belts but increases their efficiency.
light goes out. Furthermore, since front airbags are not
the airbag system checked by a Fiat
116) If a child must be carried on the front deployed in low-speed frontal impacts,
Dealership.
seat in a rearward facing child restraint side impacts, rear shunts or roll-overs, the
system, it is compulsory to deactivate the 122) With the ignition device at ENGINE,
airbags may be deployed when the car is passengers are protected only by the seat
passenger side front airbag, making sure

134
belts which must therefore be fastened at
all times.
127) Do not rest your head, arms or
elbows on the door, on the windows or
in the window bag area to prevent injury
during deployment.
128) Never lean your head, arms or
elbows out of the window.

135
 STARTING AND DRIVING
STARTING AND DRIVING
We have now reached the "heart" of ENGINE STARTING .................... 137 CHARGING FROM PUBLIC
the car: let's see how to use the car to WHEN PARKED ......................... 140 CHARGING STATION (DC)
its full potential. SPEED LIMITER ......................... 142 PROCEDURE - MODE 4 ............. 203
We will look at how to drive it safely CHARGE CABLE EMERGENCY
ELECTRONIC CRUISE
in any situation, so that it can be a CONTROL ................................ 143 UNLOCK................................... 204
welcome companion, with our comfort CHARGING FUNCTIONS ............ 204
CO-DRIVER SYSTEM ................. 145
and our wallets in mind. "eCoasting" mode (ENERGY
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM .............. 165
SAVING) ................................... 206
SIDE DISTANCE WARNING
SYSTEM ................................... 169 "eBraking" MODE
(HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY
TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION..... 172
CHARGING) .............................. 207
INTELLIGENT SPEED ASSIST...... 174
ONE-PEDAL DRIVING................. 207
®
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP TOWING TRAILERS.................... 207
CAMERA .................................. 175 MOPAR® CONNECT.................. 208
DRIVING TIPS............................ 176
CHARGING ............................... 178
POWER SOURCES THAT CAN
BE USED .................................. 182
ALTERNATING CURRENT (AC)
CHARGING AT HOME ................ 197
QUICK DOMESTIC CHARGING
PROCEDURE FROM THE
WALLBOX CHARGING
STATION .................................. 200
CHARGING PROCEDURE
FROM PUBLIC CHARGING
STATION (AC)............................ 201

136
ENGINE STARTING motor. The system will remain in
“recovery” condition. If the engine does
Before starting the car, adjust the P READY

not start, contact a Fiat Dealership.

seat, the interior rear view mirrors, the 75 % POWER

door mirrors and fasten the seat belt Starting the motor with
correctly.
The transmission must be in the P
216
0km/h
insufficiently charged
electronic key battery
If the ignition device does not respond
(Park) or N (Neutral) position. Press km
RANGE CHARGE

the brake to shift to a gear when the 23° c NW 123456 km

when the ignition device button is
transmission is in position P (Park). pressed or the car doors must be
NOTE The brake pedal must be 131 F0S1089 unlocked using the metal insert
pressed while shifting. supplied with the key, it could mean the
WARNING If the "READY" message battery of the electronic key may not
Starting the engine does not appear on the instrument be sufficiently charged. Therefore, the
129)
panel despite the correct start-up system does not detect the presence
The gearbox must be in position P or procedure, contact a Fiat Dealership. of the electronic key on board the car
N. Proceed as follows: and displays a dedicated message. In
fully depress the brake pedal without IMPORTANT If start-up is requested this case, place the rear end of the key
touching the accelerator; with the transmission in a position (on the side where the 500 logo is
press the ignition device to take it other than N without the brake pedal located) next to the moulding on the
to the START position. Hold it fully pressed, the display will show a bottom of the console fig. 132 and
depressed for a couple of seconds. dedicated message (see “Warning press the start button.
At the end of the procedure, an lights and messages” chapter in the
acoustic warning will be heard and the "Knowing the instrument panel"
message "READY" will appear on the section). In this case, repeat the
instrument panel display to indicate starting manoeuvre, pressing the brake
that the electric traction system of the pedal.
car has started. When the "READY" IMPORTANT If start-up is requested
message appears, the car is ready to but the transmission is faulty, carry out
go. the “Delayed start-up” procedure (see
"Warning lights and messages" chapter
in the "Knowing the instrument panel" 132 F0S1225

section). Turn the ignition device to the

START position for at least 7 seconds
with the brake pressed to start the

137
 PEDESTRIAN ACOUSTIC Never try to engage P (Park) when the

STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING SYSTEM car is moving. Apply the parking brake
The car is provided with a pedestrian when leaving the car in position P
acoustic warning system. This (Park).
system uses different sounds to warn When parking on flat surfaces, you can
pedestrians of the approach of the first shift the transmission to P (Park)
car. The acoustic warning system is and then apply the parking brake.
provided with a speaker located in the When parking on sloping roads, apply
motor compartment. The system is the parking brake before shifting the
automatically activated when a gear 133 F0S1090 transmission to P (Park). For added
other than P (Park) is engaged and safety, turn the front wheels towards
remains active as long as the car is 36) the kerb.
travelling at a speed of 25 km/h or less. NOTE Hold the brake pedal pressed NOTE Refer to the gear position shown
Any malfunction of the acoustic while changing from the P (Park) on the instrument panel display and
warning system is indicated by the position. check that it indicates P (Park).
yellow symbol on the display. NOTE If all button LEDs are lit when the 135) 136) 137) 131) 138) 133) 134)

ONE-SPEED GEARBOX ignition device is in ENGINE position,

R (Reverse)
The New 500 uses a one-speed contact a Fiat Dealership.
The car can be moved backwards
gearbox to transmit the power 130) 131) 132) 133) 134)
in this position. Select position R
developed by the electric motor. The Transmission ratios (Reverse) only with the car at a
one-speed gearbox is operated by standstill.
Press required button to engage the
push buttons instead of the traditional
gear. N (Neutral)
gear lever.
NOTE To select a gear, the brake pedal You can start the car with this gear
The buttons (A) fig. 133 are located on
must be pressed. engaged. Apply the parking brake and
the lower dashboard.
NOTE After selecting a gear, wait a few move the transmission to position P
moments to allow the selected gear to (Park) if you wish to exit the car.
be engaged before accelerating. 139)

P (PARK) D (DRIVE)
Selecting P (Park) integrates the Use this gear driving in towns and on
functionality of the parking brake by motorways.
locking the transmission. It is advisable
to start the car in this gear engaged.

138
Car movement D (Drive), N (Neutral) or R (Reverse),
To move the car, from position P press the car speed is less than 3 km/h and WARNING
the brake pedal and, select the desired the user requests the car to be turned
off by turning the ignition device to the 129) The brake servo is not active until the
gear using the control panel (1) fig. 133
engine is started, so you would need to
on the dashboard: D to move forwards STOP position. apply much more force than usual to the
or R to engage reverse. The display will Gear engagement inhibition brake pedal.
show the gear engaged. 130) Only engage a gear while keeping the
This system prevents shifting the brake pedal fully pressed.
In "NORMAL" driving mode, when transmission from position P (Park) or
the brake pedal is released, the car 131) The unexpected movement of the
N (Neutral) if the brake pedal has not car could injure the occupants or people
starts moving forwards or backwards been previously pressed. With ignition nearby. As a general rule, do not get out
("creeping" effect). The accelerator device in the ENGINE position: of the car when it is in "READY" mode.
should not be pressed in this case. Before leaving the car, always apply the
the brake pedal must be pressed parking brake, put the transmission in
Automatic shift to P function in order to shift the transmission from the P (Park) position and turn the ignition
The function automatically put the position P (Park) to positions R, N or D; device to the STOP position. In this mode,
transmission in P (Park) if there is any to shift the transmission from position the transmission remains locked in position
indication that the driver may leave N (Neutral) to positions R or D the P (Park), thus preventing any accidental
movement of the car.
the car while the transmission is in D brake pedal must be pressed.
132) When you get out of the car, always
(Drive), N (Neutral) or R (Reverse). Stopping the engine turn the ignition device to the STOP
position and lock all the doors.
Operation with the ignition device The system automatically engages
133) NEVER leave children unattended
to the ENGINE position P (Park) when the car is shut down inside the car, let alone leave the car with
The Auto Park function is activated (ignition device in STOP position). the doors unlocked in a place that children
when the transmission is in position D To stop the engine at speeds higher can access easily. Children may seriously,
(Drive), N (Neutral) or R (Reverse) and than 2.5 km/h hold the button of the or even fatally, injure themselves. Also
ensure that children do not inadvertently
the following conditions are detected: ignition device pressed or press it three operate the electric parking brake, the
Seat belt not fastened times in a row within a few seconds. brake pedal or the transmission button.
Brake pedal released The ignition device is in the ENGINE 134) Do not leave the electronic key inside
Accelerator pedal released position. or near the car (or in a place accessible to
Driver's door open children). A child could activate the electric
window winders, other controls or even
Car speed is below 3 km/h. start the car.
Operation with the ignition device 135) Never use position P (Park) instead of
to the STOP position the electric parking brake. Always engage
the electric parking brake when parking the
The Auto Park function is activated
when the transmission is in position

139
 WHEN PARKED
STARTING AND DRIVING
vehicle to avoid the acciental movement of
the vehicle.
136) If the P (Park) position is not When parking and leaving the car,
engaged, the car could move and injure proceed as follows:
people. Before leaving the car, make sure with your foot on the brake pedal,
that the transmission is in position P and put the transmission to position P and,
that the electric parking brake is engaged.
if you are on a sloping road, leave the
137) Putting the transmission to a position
different from P (Park) or N (Neutral) wheels steered. Before releasing the
without pressing the brake is dangerous. brake pedal, wait until P appears on
The car could quickly accelerate forwards the display;
or backwards. You risk losing control apply the electric parking brake and 134 F0S1091

of your car and crash into something stop the motor;

or someone. Only engage a gear while IMPORTANT Always check that the
keeping the brake pedal fully pressed. block the wheels with a wedge or a
electric parking brake is applied before
138) When you get out of the car, always stone if the car is parked on a steep
leaving the car.
remove the ignition key and lock all the slope. Do not leave the ignition device
doors. in the ENGINE position to prevent IMPORTANT In addition to parking
139) Do not put the gear in N (Neutral) running down the 12V battery. the car with the parking brake always
and do not stop the motor when driving engaged, the wheel steered, chocks or
on a downhill road. This type of driving IMPORTANT NEVER leave the car
stones positioned in front of the wheels
is dangerous and reduces the possibility before having put the transmission in P.
(when on a steep slope), you must
of intervening in the case of variation of
ELECTRIC PARKING always put the transmission in P (Park).
the road traffic or surface. You risk losing
control of your car and causing accidents. BRAKE (EPB)
The electric parking brake (EPB) WARNING Should the 12V battery of
guarantees better use and optimal the car be faulty, to unlock the electric
IMPORTANT performance compared to a manually parking brake the battery must be
operated parking brake. The electric replaced. The parking brake can be
36) Failure to observe the following parking brake features a switch,
precautions can have serious engaged in two ways: manually by
consequences for the transmission. Put
located on the central tunnel (A) pressing the switch on the central
the transmission in the P (Park) position fig. 134, a motor with calliper for each tunnel fig. 134; automatically in "Safe
only when the car is completely stationary; rear wheel and an electronic control Hold" or "Auto Park Brake" conditions.
engage R (Reverse) or disengage only module.
when the car is completely stationary.
Keep the brake pedal fully pressed before
engaging any gear.

140
Engaging the parking brake unavailable; in this case braking is pressing the switch on the central
manually controlled by the motors. tunnel and shifting the transmission to
position P (Park) at the same time.
140) 141) 142) The brake lights (stop) will also
automatically switch on in the same After disengaging the electric parking
Briefly pull the switch located on the
way as for normal braking with the use brake, the warning light on the
central tunnel to manually engage the
of the brake pedal. instrument panel and the LED on the
electric parking brake when the car is
switch turn off.
stationary. Release the switch on the central
tunnel to stop the braking action with If the warning light on the
Noise may be heard from the rear of
the car in motion. instrument panel remains on with the
the car when engaging the electric
If, through this procedure, the car is electric parking brake disengaged, this
parking brake.
braked until a speed below 3 km/h indicates a fault: in this case contact a
With the electric parking brake Fiat Dealership.
engaged, the warning light on the is reached and the switch is kept
instrument panel and the LED on the pulled, the parking brake will definitively
switch turn on. engage. WARNING Never use position P
(Park) instead of the electric parking
A slight movement of the brake pedal
WARNING Driving the car with the brake.Always engage the electric
may be detected when engaging the
electric parking brake engaged, or parking brake when parking the car to
electric parking brake with the brake
using it several times to slow down the prevent injury or damage caused by the
pedal pressed.
car, may cause severe damage to the unexpected movement of the car.

WARNING With the EPB failure warning braking system.

ELECTRIC PARKING
light on, some functions of the electric
Disengaging the electric parking BRAKE OPERATING
parking brake are deactivated. In this
brake manually MODES
case the driver is responsible for brake
activation and car parking in complete The ignition device must be ENGINE The electric parking brake may operate
safety conditions. position in order to manually release as follows:
the parking brake. Moreover, you need "Dynamic operating mode": this
to press the brake pedal, then press mode is enabled by pulling the switch
If, under exceptional circumstances,
the switch on the central tunnel briefly. continuously whilst driving;
the use of the brake is required with
Noise may be heard from the rear of "Static engagement and release
the car in motion, keep the switch on
the car and a slight movement of the mode": with the car stationary, the
the central tunnel pulled as long as the
brake pedal may be detected during electric parking brake can be activated
brake action is necessary.
disengagement. by pulling the switch on the central
The warning light may switch on tunnel once.
with the hydraulic system temporarily Each automatic parking brake
engagement can be cancelled by
141
 On the other hand, press the switch (see "Settings" in the"Vehicle mode"

STARTING AND DRIVING

and the brake pedal at the same time paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). WARNING
to disengage the brake;
SAFE HOLD 140) In the case of parking manoeuvres
"Drive Away Release": (where
It is a safety function that automatically on roads on a gradient, the front wheels
provided) the electric parking brake must be steered towards the pavement
engages the electric parking brake in
will automatically disengage with the (when parking downhill), or in the opposite
the event of a dangerous condition for
driver side seat belt fastened and the direction if the car is parked uphill. Block
the car. the wheels with a wedge or a stone if the
detection of an action performed by the
driver to move the car (forward gear or If: car is parked on a steep slope.
the car speed is below 3 km/h; 141) Never leave children alone in an
reverse gear);
The transmission is not in the P unattended car; make sure that when you
"Safe Hold": if the car speed is lower move away from the car, you have the
than 3 km/h and the transmission (Park) position; electronic key with you.
is not in P (Park) position and the the driver's seat belt is not fastened; 142) The electric parking brake must
driver intention of leaving the car is the driver side door is open; always be engaged when leaving the car.
detected, the electric parking brake will no attempted operation of the brake
automatically engage to hold the car in pedal or of the accelerator pedal;
the electric parking brake engages SPEED LIMITER
safety conditions;
"Auto Park Brake": if the car speed automatically to prevent car movement. (where provided)
is below 3 km/h, the electric parking The Safe Hold function can be
DESCRIPTION
break will automatically engage when temporarily disabled by pressing the
switch located on the central tunnel This device allows the speed of the car
the transmission is in P (Park) position. to be limited to values which can be set
The LED on the switch located on the and the brake pedal at the same time,
with the car stationary and the driver by the driver.
central tunnel fig. 134 switches on
side door open. The maximum speed can be set both
together with the warning light with car stationary and in motion. The
on the instrument panel when the Once disabled, the function will activate
again when the car speed reaches minimum speed that can be set is
parking brake is engaged and applied 30 km/h.
to the wheels. Each automatic parking 20 km/h or the ignition device is
moved to STOP and then the ENGINE When the device is active, the car
brake engagement can be cancelled
position. speed depends on the pressure
by pressing the switch on the central
at the accelerator pedal, until the
tunnel and shifting the transmission to
programmed speed limit is reached
position P (Park) at the same time.
(see "Speed limit programming"
The mode can be managed using the
paragraph).
menu of the Uconnect™ system

142
ACTIVATING THE DEVICE is pressed, the speed increases by DEACTIVATING THE
To activate the device press button (A) about 1 km/h while keeping the button DEVICE
on the steering wheel fig. 135. pressed, the speed increases by To disengage the system press button
10 km/h. (A) fig. 135.
To store a speed value lower than the
displayed one, press the SET – button. WARNING Activating the electronic
Each time the button is pressed, the Cruise Control or Adaptive Cruise
speed decreases by about 1 km/h Control function deactivates the device.
while keeping the button pressed, the
speed decreases by 10 km/h.
Automatic off of the device
DEVICE ACTIVATION/ The device switches off automatically
DEACTIVATION in the event of a system failure and
135 F0S1179 Device activation: press the SET + or the grey "LIM" symbol appears on the
SET – buttons. display. In this case, contact a Fiat
When the device is enabled, it is The activation of the device is indicated Dealership.
indicated by the "LIM" symbol being by the green "LIM" symbol on the
shown on the display along with the display.
ELECTRONIC
last speed set.
Device deactivation: press the CANC CRUISE CONTROL
If the electronic Cruise Control or button. The last set speed is crossed This is an electronically controlled
Adaptive Cruise Control has been out and displayed in grey. driving assistance device that
activated previously, button (A) fig. 135
Device reactivation: press the RES allows the desired car speed to be
must be pressed twice. The first press
button. The last set speed will be maintained, without having to press
switches off the function activated
restored. the accelerator pedal. This device can
previously; the second press activates
EXCEEDING THE be used at a speed above 30 km/h on
the Speed Limiter.
PROGRAMMED SPEED long stretches of dry, straight roads
SPEED LIMIT with few variations (e.g. motorways).
By fully depressing the accelerator
PROGRAMMING It is therefore not recommended to use
pedal, the programmed speed can be
The speed limit can be programmed this device on extra-urban roads with
exceeded even with the device active
without necessarily activating the traffic. Do not use the device in town.
(e.g. in the event of overtaking).
device. The electronic Cruise Control buttons
The device is disabled until the speed
To store a speed value higher than drops below the set limit, after which it
are located on the right side of the
the displayed one, briefly press the steering wheel.
reactivates automatically.
SET + button. Each time the button

143
 To ensure correct operation, the The device cannot be turned on in INCREASING /

STARTING AND DRIVING

electronic Cruise Control is designed to either reverse or in neutral. DECREASING SPEED
deactivate if more than one function is Increasing speed
operated simultaneously. In this case WARNING It is dangerous to leave the Once the electronic Cruise Control
the system can be reactivated pressing device on when it is not used. There has been activated, the speed can be
button and setting the desired is a risk of inadvertently activating it increased by pressing button SET +.
speed of the car. and losing control of the car due to Keeping the button pressed, the set
ACTIVATING THE DEVICE unexpected excessive speed. speed will increase until the button is
To activate the device press button (A) released, then the new speed will be
fig. 136. SETTING THE DESIRED stored.
SPEED Each time button SET + is pressed the
143) 144) 145)
Proceed as follows: set speed will be fine tuned.
operate the device (see the previous Decreasing speed
instructions); With the device activated, the speed
when the car has reached the can be decreased by pressing button
desired speed, press button SET + SET –.
(or SET –) and release it to activate Keeping the button pressed, the set
the device. When the accelerator is speed will decrease until the button is
released, the car will keep the selected released, then the new speed will be
speed automatically. stored.
If needed (when overtaking for Each time button SET – is pressed the
136 F0S1180
instance), you can accelerate simply set speed will be fine tuned.
Activation of the device is indicated by by pressing the accelerator; when you
the symbol on the instrument panel release the pedal, the car goes back to
WARNING Pressing the button SET
switching on and, on some versions, by the speed stored previously.
+ (or SET –) the speed is adjusted
a message on the display. When travelling downhill with the device depending on the selected unit of
On versions with Speed Limiter, if active, the car speed may slightly measurement ("metric" or "imperial")
exceed the stored one. set through the Menu of the instrument
the device is activated, button
must be pressed twice to activate the panel display or, depending on the
Cruise Control (because the first press WARNING Before pressing the SET versions, in the menu of Uconnect™
deactivates the Speed Limiter, and the + (or SET –) buttons, the car must be (see "Settings" in the "Vehicle mode"
second press activates the Cruise travelling at a constant speed on a flat paragraph in the "Multimedia" section).
Control). surface.

144
WARNING On steeply sloping roads, if there is a malfunction in the CO-DRIVER SYSTEM
the system may not be able to maintain electronic Cruise Control.
the set speed, which may increase (where provided)
DEACTIVATING THE
the speed of the car. It is, therefore, 146) 147) 148) 149) 150) 151) 152) 153) 154) 155) 156)
DEVICE
preferable to switch the device off 157) 158) 159) 160) 161)
The electronic Cruise Control is
under these conditions. The device 37) 38) 39) 40) 41) 42) 43) 44) 45)
deactivated by pressing button or
keeps the speed stored even uphill and ADAPTIVE CRUISE
bringing the ignition device switch to
downhill. A slight variation in the speed CONTROL (ACC) WITH
STOP.
on slight rises is completely normal. FOLLOW TO STOP
(where provided)
RECALLING THE SPEED WARNING DESCRIPTION
With transmission operating in D
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is
(Drive), press and release the RES 143) While driving with the device active, an electronic driver assist system that
button to recall the previously set never move the gear lever to neutral.
uses the camera located in the middle
speed. 144) In case of a malfunction or failure of
the device, contact a Fiat Dealership. of the steering wheel fig. 137, to detect
DEACTIVATING THE 145) The electronic Cruise Control can the presence of a vehicle close ahead.
DEVICE be dangerous if the system cannot keep It combines the Cruise Control function
Pressing the CANC button or pressing a constant speed. In specific conditions with the ability to control the distance
the brake pedal as the car is slowing speed may be excessive, resulting in the to the vehicle ahead.
down deactivates the electronic Cruise risk of losing control of the vehicle and
causing accidents. Do not use the device The system allows the car to be held
Control without deleting the stored in heavy traffic or on winding, icy, snowy or at the desired speed without needing
speed. slippery roads. to press the accelerator. It also allows
The Cruise Control can also be holding the distance set by the driver
deactivated if the electric parking from the vehicle ahead.
brake (EPB) is activated or if the
braking system intervenes (e.g. the
ESC system) or in other particular
conditions.
The stored speed is deleted in the
following cases:
pressing button or switching off
the motor;

145
 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL

STARTING AND DRIVING

ACTIVATION
To activate the system, press and
release the button (A) fig. 138. A

137 F0S1286 139 F0S1152

However, the driver is responsible for WARNING It is dangerous to leave

adapt the speed to the traffic, type of the system activated when it is not
road and weather conditions. 138 F0S1372 used. There is a risk of inadvertently
WARNINGS activating it and losing control of the
The system controls the speed of the When the system is activated and car due to unexpected excessive
vehicle to reach or hold the set speed. ready for operation, a graphic indicating speed.
If the sensor detects a vehicle, the the "readiness" of the system (A) and
vehicle is adapted to the speed of the a dedicated icon (B) depicted as ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
vehicle ahead while hold the distance illustrated in fig. 139 will appear on the DEACTIVATION
and without exceeding the set speed. display.
With the system active, press and
It is advisable to turn the system off in The symbol (A) fig. 139 is grey with release the button (A) fig. 138 to
the following cases: system enabled and turns white when deactivate it. The display will show a
driving in fog, heavy rain, snow, the system is activate (set speed). dedicated message.
heavy traffic and in complex driving
situations; SETTING THE DESIRED SPEED
driving near a bend (winding roads), The system can only be set with the
icy, snowy, slippery roads or with steep speed over 5 km/h (3 mph) and under
slopes and descents; 150 km/h (93 mph).
entering a turn lane or on a slip road; NOTE For the Low Range version, the
when circumstances do not allow maximum speed of the ACC is limited
safe driving at a constant speed. to 135 km/h (84 mph).
When the car reaches the desired
speed, press and release the button

146
SET + or SET - to set the speed to the when the electric parking brake is INCREASING/DECREASING OF
current speed. The display will show engaged; SPEED
the set speed. Then take your foot off when the transmission in P (Park), R After having set the system, the stored
the accelerator pedal. (Reverse) or N (Neutral); speed can be increased or decreased
Press the accelerator pedal to make when the car speed is not within the by holding the SET + and SET - button
the car go faster than the set speed. settable speed range; pressed.
While the accelerator pedal is pressed: when the ESC (or ABS or other Press the SET + or SET - button
a dedicated graphic fig. 140 with the stability control systems) are operating once: the set speed will increase or
symbol (A) flashing will appear on the or have just operated; decrease by 1 km/h (1 mph). Each
display for a few seconds; when the Autonomous Emergency subsequent press of the button will
Brake Control (AEB) system is braking result in an increase or decrease of
automatically; 1 km/h (1 mph).
when the Speed Limiter is active: Hold the SET + or SET - button
A press the button (A) fig. 138 to pressed: the set speed will increase or
deactivate the Speed Limiter. Press the decrease in 10 km/h steps (or 5 mph)
(A) button again to set the system to until the button is released. The set
"ready" status; speed increase or decrease is shown
in case of failure of the system; on the display.
when the motor is off; WARNINGS
in case of blinding or obstruction of When the SET – button is pressed to
140 F0S1363
the front camera. reduce the speed, the braking system
the system will not be able to control In case of system set, the conditions intervenes automatically if the exhaust
the distance between the car and the described above also cause a brake does not slow the car down
vehicle ahead. In this case the speed cancellation or deactivation of the sufficiently to reach the set speed.
will be determined only by the position system with times that may vary The system holds the set speed
of the accelerator pedal. according to the conditions. uphill and downhill; however a slight
The system regains control of the car variation is entirely normal, particularly
as soon as the accelerator pedal is WARNING The device is not on steep gradients.
released. deactivated when speeds higher SPEED VARIATION WITH ROAD
The system cannot be set: than those set are reached with SIGN (INTELLIGENT ADAPTIVE
the accelerator pedal pressed. In CRUISE CONTROL)
when pressing the brake pedal;
these conditions, the device may not
when the brakes are overheated; The "Intelligent Adaptive Cruise
work correctly and it is advisable to
Control" system can be used to set a
deactivate it.
speed limit equal to that indicated on

147
 the road sign detected by the “Traffic RECALLING THE SPEED

STARTING AND DRIVING

Sign Recognition” system (see the Once the system has been cancelled
respective paragraph in this section). by pressing the brake pedal or the
When a new speed limit is recognised, CANC button but not deactivated by
the "Traffic Sign Information" system pressing button (A) fig. 138, simply
will suggest the new limit, which will press the RES button and take your
be shown with a message on the foot off the accelerator pedal to recall a
instrument panel display. The driver previously set speed.
can accept the new limit by pressing The system will be set to the last stored
the RES button to set the Adaptive speed. 141 F0S1078
Cruise Control speed to that suggested
by the road sign. WARNING The recall function must The distance from the vehicle ahead is
The activation of the Intelligent Adaptive only be used if the road and traffic proportional to speed.
Cruise Control is indicated by the conditions so allow. Recalling an The interval of time showing ithe safe
symbol on the display and the excessively high or low speed for the distance with respect to the vehicle
green circle around the speed limit current traffic and road conditions ahead remains constant and varies
sign. could cause a sudden acceleration or from 1 second (for the short distance
a deceleration of the car. Failure to 1-bar setting) to 2 seconds (for the
REACHING A STANDSTILL
comply with these precautions may maximum distance 4-bar setting).
The system can decelerate the car
to a standstill when the vehicle in cause serious accidents and fatal The set distance is shown on the
front of it slows down and stops. For injuries. display by means of a dedicated icon
speeds below 60 km/h (36 mph) and if (or in the “Driver Assist” area).
visibility permits, the system can detect SETTING THE DISTANCE The setting is 4 (maximum) the first
stopped cars and slow down to a safe BETWEEN CARS time the system is used. After the
distance. Once the car is stopped, 162) 163) 164) 165)
distance has been modified by the
the function will be deactivated. The driver, the new distance will be stored
The distance between your car and
system can be restarted from speeds also after the system is deactivated and
the vehicle ahead may be set to 1 bar
above 5 km/h (3 mph) and by pressing reactivated.
(short), 2 bars (medium), 3 bars (long),
one of the SET+, SET- or RES buttons. 4 bars (maximum) fig. 141. To decrease the distance
If the system keeps the vehicle Press and release the button to
stationary for two minutes, the electric decrease the distance setting (B)
parking brake will activate and the fig. 138.
system will be deactivated.

148
The distance setting decreases by one WARNING If the system predicts as long as the distance to the vehicle to
bar (shorter) every time the button is that the braking level is insufficient to be overtaken is guaranteed.
pressed. maintain the set distance, it signals Once acceleration is perceived, the
Once the shortest distance has been the driver to pay attention when driver must make sure that the traffic
reached, a further press of the button approaching the vehicle ahead by and cars coming from behind allow
will set the longest distance. The set displaying an alert message on the it, and to make the lane change
speed is held if there are no cars display. An acoustic signal is also manoeuvre. Once the trajectory is clear
ahead. emitted. In this case, it is advisable to of vehicles, Adaptive Cruise Control will
If a vehicle is detected ahead in the brake immediately as necessary to hold regain control of the selected speed,
same lane, travelling at slower speed, a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. or reduce it to maintain the desired
page fig. 141 and icon will appears distance from the vehicle ahead.
on the display (where provided). The WARNING The driver is responsible for NOTE The overtaking aid function
system will automatically adjust the ensuring that there are no pedestrians, is only available on the side where
car speed to hold the distance setting other cars or objectives along the overtaking is permitted according to
regardless of the set speed. direction of the car. Failure to comply the highway code (left in countries
The car holds the set distance until: with these precautions may cause with traffic on the right side of the
the vehicle ahead accelerates to a serious accidents and injuries. carriageway, right in countries with
speed higher than the set speed; traffic on the left side).
the vehicle ahead leaves the lane WARNING The driver is fully SPEED REDUCTION ON BENDS
or the detection field of the Adaptive responsible for holding a safe distance The Adaptive Cruise Control system
Cruise Control system sensor; from the vehicle ahead respecting the CAN decelerate slightly on bends to
the distance setting is changed; highway code in force in the respective improve vehicle stability and comfort.
the Adaptive Cruise Control System country. The functionality can be a valid help in
is deactivated or switched off; roundabouts or with gradual bends,
If the driver does not press the OVERTAKING AID FUNCTION faced with increasing curvature; it
accelerator pedal. cannot compensate for sudden
166)

The Adaptive Cruise Control system, steering or in general medium/high

WARNING The maximum braking force when traffic conditions permit, allows lateral accelerations.
applied by the system is limited. The additional acceleration to be given to However, the driver is responsible,
driver may always apply the brakes, if the vehicle to facilitate overtaking by depending on the traffic scenario, to
needed. simply activating the direction indicator. apply the brake, where necessary, to
This additional acceleration is provided further reduce the speed of the vehicle,

149
 ensuring its stability in sharp bends or the system is deactivated: If an obstruction is signalled, clean the

STARTING AND DRIVING

descending radius. when the CANC button is pressed; area of the windscreen indicated in
when the conditions shown in the fig. 151 and check that the message
EXTENSION OF ADAPTIVE CRUISE
“Setting the desired speed” paragraph has disappeared.
CONTROL: CO-DRIVER
occur; When the conditions limiting the
The Adaptive Cruise Control system
when the car reaches a stop behind system functions end, this will go back
can work in conjunction with the
a stopped vehicle. to normal and complete operation.
Co-Driver system (see the respective
paragraph in this chapter) to offer If these conditions occur while the Should the fault persist, contact a Fiat
"Autonomous Level 2 Assistance". system is decelerating with respect Dealership.
to a vehicle ahead, the system could
The Co-Driver will be able to maintain PRECAUTIONS WHILE DRIVING
continue the deceleration, if necessary,
constant speed and distance, The system may not work correctly in
also after it is cancelled.
adaptable to the cars in front, and keep some driving conditions (see below):
the car in the middle of the lane. NOTE The system always remembers
the driver must control the car at all
the last distance desired and selected
NOTE The system is an aid for times.
by the user. The system keeps the
the driver, who must always pay Vehicle not aligned
speed stored until you deactivate the
full attention while driving. The
system by pressing the (A) fig. 138 The system may not detect a vehicle
responsibility always rests with the
Adaptive Cruise Control button or travelling on the same lane but which
driver, who must take into account the
turning the car off. is not aligned along the same direction
traffic conditions in order to drive in
of travel or a vehicle which is cutting
complete safety. The driver is always SYSTEM LIMITED OPERATION
in from a side lane. Sufficient distance
required to pay attention to the road WARNING
from the vehicles ahead may not be
and keep his hands on the steering If the dedicated message is shown guaranteed in these cases.
wheel. on the display, a condition limiting the
The non-aligned vehicle can weave
system operation may have occurred.
DEACTIVATION in and out of the driving direction
The system is deactivated and the set The possible reasons of this limitation causing the car to brake or accelerate
speed is cancelled if: are something blocking the camera unexpectedly.
view or a fault.
the button (A) fig. 138 is pressed on Steering and curves
the Adaptive Cruise Control; In case of camera blinding (e.g. caused
by low sun in front of the windscreen), On bends fig. 142 with the system set,
the Speed Limiter button is pressed;
wait until the light and glare conditions it could limit speed and acceleration to
the starting system switch is in the
cease and allow the system to operate guarantee car stability even if no cars
STOP position;
fully. are detected ahead.

150
When leaving the bend, the system the utmost attention at all times and Stationary objects and vehicles
resets the previously set speed. be always ready to press the brakes if The system cannot detect the
needed. presence of stationary objects and
vehicles if you are travelling at a speed
exceeding 60 km/h (37 mph). For
example, the system may not operate
if the vehicle ahead leaves the lane
and a car stopped on the lane ahead
of if. Pay the utmost attention at all
times and be always ready to press the
brakes if needed.
142 F0S1181 Objects and cars moving in
143 F0S1182 opposite or crosswise direction
WARNING In case of narrow bends, The system cannot detect the
the performance of the system could Small cars presence of objects or cars travelling in
be limited. In this case, it is advisable to Some narrow vehicles (e.g. bicycles opposite or crosswise direction fig. 145
deactivate the device. and motorcycles fig. 144) travelling and consequently will not be operated.
near the outer edges of the lane or
which enter the lane from kerbside are
Using the system on gradient
not detected until they are fully in the
When driving on roads with variable lane.
gradient, the system may not detect
Sufficient distance from the cars ahead
the presence of a vehicle on the
may not be guaranteed in these cases.
lane. The system performance be
limited according to speed, load of the
car, traffic conditions and gradient
steepness.
145
Lane change F0S1184

The system may not detect the

presence of a vehicle until it is fully in
your lane fig. 143.
In this case, sufficient distance from the
vehicle which is changing lane may not
144 F0S1183
be guaranteed: it is advisable to pay

151
 CO-DRIVER SYSTEM ACTIVATION / DEACTIVATION

STARTING AND DRIVING

WITH FOLLOW TO STOP - 168)
Traffic Jam Assist To activate the system, press button
167) (A) fig. 146 on the steering wheel.
The Co-Driver system combines the To deactivate the system press the
functions of the Active Cruise Control button again.
(ACC) and lane centring logic to control
Suspension conditions
the trajectory of the car holding it as
System operation is temporarily paused
close as possible in the middle of the
in the following cases:
lane and also managing speed. 146 F0S1373
ACC system deactivation or inhibition
It is a driving assistance system that
The following conditions must be met (see paragraph the Adaptive Cruise
can be activated on all road types.
before the Co-Driver system turns on: Control function);
The system uses information from the
the Co-Driver system must be if there are very tight bends;
front camera to help you keep the car
switched on by pressing the button (A) if the lines are not detected correctly;
in the middle of the lane at a constant
fig. 146 on the steering wheel; one of the two lines is broken or
speed.
the Adaptive Cruise Control device ruined;
OPERATION (ACC) must be on; the sun is low and is dazzling the
The system only works if the driver the car speed must be between 60 camera on the windscreen;
keeps his or her hands on the steering and 150 km/h; if the left or right direction indicator is
wheel. no anomaly related to the camera activated;
If the system detects that hands have must be present; if the driver intentionally changes
been removed from the steering wheel, the direction indicators must not be lanes without switching on the direction
it will alert you of the need to put your activated; indicator on the corresponding side;
hands back on the steering wheel (see no anomaly related to the system if there are system anomalies;
following pages). must be present; if the car speed exceeds the
if the set speed is less than 60 km/h maximum limit;
WARNING The Co-Driver system can if lateral acceleration is high.
the Co-Driver system will not work;
take a few seconds to activate once if the speed of the Adaptive Cruise Automatic deactivation
all conditions are met. During this Control (ACC) device can be set to a
time, a grey indication will appear on The Co-Driver system is automatically
higher value (top speed 150 km/h), the deactivated if you take your hands off
the instrument panel display and the Co-Driver system is only available as
system will be activated automatically the steering wheel for 45 seconds.
long as the car speed is comprised
as soon as all conditions are met, between 60 and 150 km/h.
without any intervention by the driver.

152
WARNING When the Co-Driver is centre of the instrument panel display panel display: in this case, the system
paused the related graphics in the (see the description in the following remains active. If the driver has not
dedicated area will turn grey. pages). returned his or her hands to the
steering wheel within a few seconds,
SYSTEM STATUS
WARNING Hands on the steering this screen fig. 149 will appear on the
System active: The active and
wheel are detected by a capacitive instrument panel display.
correctly operating system status is
sensor installed in it. indicated by the following screen on the
instrument panel display fig. 147 in the
When the suspension conditions are "Driver Assistance" menu. When the
over, the Co-Driver will be available hands are removed from the steering
again without requiring any reactivation wheel, the system does not deactivate
action by the driver. automatically, but after a few seconds:
some dedicated screens appear on the
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
instrument panel display in sequence,
The system status can always be
to warn the driver to return his or her
viewed through a dedicated area on
hands to the steering wheel (see the 148
the instrument panel display. F0S1117
description below).
The system status is indicated by the
colour of the symbol.
If the driver's hands are not on the
steering wheel, a series of warnings
will appear on the instrument panel
display to alert the driver that he needs
to reposition his hands on the steering
wheel. Acoustic signals will also be
emitted.
After a certain period of time, the Co-
147 149
Driver system will be disabled if the F0S1116 F0S1118

driver has not repositioned his or her

System active (hands removed Active system (hands removed
hands on the steering wheel.
from the steering wheel for a short from the steering wheel for a long
When the system does not detect time): If you do not place your hands
time): As soon as you remove your
hands on the steering wheel for a few on the steering wheel, the following
from the steering wheel, this screen
seconds, it will warn the driver by screen will appear on the display of the
fig. 148 appears on the instrument
displaying a dedicated screen at the

153
 The main ones are listed below: if the camera is exposed to dazzling

STARTING AND DRIVING

instrument panel, fig. 150. An acoustic
warning will sound also in this case. narrow, winding and curvy streets; light (e.g. reflection or direct sunlight).
If you do not put your hands back on poor visibility (due to heavy rain, CO-DRIVER SYSTEM
the steering wheel after an extended snow, fog, etc.); WITH STOP&GO -
period of time, a deactivation message front lights of incoming cars or direct Adaptive Cruise Control
will appear on the instrument panel. sunlight or shade; with Stop&Go
The steering wheel control will then be damage or obstructions caused by (where provided)
deactivated. mud, ice, snow, etc.;
169)
interference with other equipment
that causes electromagnetic waves; DESCRIPTION
presence of roadworks/road The Adaptive Cruise Control with
construction sites; Stop&Go is a driver assistance device
if the indications given by the which combines the Cruise Control
navigation system (where provided) of functions with one for controlling the
the Uconnect™ system are not yet distance from the vehicle ahead.
ready and/or if the navigation system is The system allows the car to be held
recalculating the route. at the desired speed without needing
SYSTEM LIMITED OPERATION to press the accelerator. It also allows
150 F0S1119
The Co-Driver may have limited or holding the distance set by the driver
When the Co-Driver system is active, reduced functionality when one of the from the vehicle ahead.
Lane Control (where provided) following conditions occurs: The system uses a radar sensor,
is temporarily paused. When the The main ones are listed below: located behind the front bumper and a
Co-Driver system is not active, Lane lane marking lines are not clear or camera, located in the middle area of
Control (where provided), if previously in conditions of poor visibility (e.g. in the windscreen fig. 151, to detect the
activated, is still available. For more heavy rain, snow, fog, etc.); presence of a vehicle close ahead.
information on the Lane Control the camera is damaged, covered or
system, see the “Driving assistance obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow,
systems” chapter in the "Safety" etc.);
section. when driving in the hills or on roads
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY with narrow turns;
near motorway toll-gates;
External factors and conditions may
when the motorway entrance or exit
affect the proper operation of the Co-
is more than 6 meters wide;
Driver system.

154
 ACTIVATION
168)

To activate the device, press and

release the button (A) fig. 152. A

151 F0S1286 153 F0S1152

WARNINGS WARNING It is dangerous to leave

If the sensor does not detect any the device activated when it is not
vehicle ahead, the device will maintain used. There is a risk of inadvertently
152 F0S1372
a fixed set speed. activating it and losing control of the
If the sensor detects a vehicle ahead, When the system is enabled and ready car due to unexpected excessive
the device automatically intervenes by for operation, a graphic indicating speed.
braking (or accelerating) slightly in order the "readiness" of the system (A) and
not to exceed the original set speed, so a dedicated icon (B) depicted as DEACTIVATION
that the car keeps the preset distance, illustrated in fig. 153 will appear on With the device active, to deactivate
seeking to adapt to the speed of the the display. The symbol (A) fig. 153 is it press and release the button (A)
vehicle ahead. grey with system enabled and turns fig. 152.
It is advisable to turn the device off in white when the system is activate (set
the following cases: speed). SETTING THE DESIRED SPEED
driving in fog, heavy rain, snow and The desired speed can be set even
in complex driving situations; when the vehicle is stationary, from
driving near a bend (winding roads), 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 135 km/h (83
icy, snowy, slippery roads or with steep mph) for the "Low range" version or
slopes and descents; 150 km/h (93 mph) for the "High range"
entering a turn lane or on a slip road; version.
when circumstances do not allow When the car reaches the desired
safe driving at a constant speed. speed, press and release the button
SET + or SET - to set the speed to the
current speed. The display will show

155
 the set speed. Then take your foot in case of failure of the device; Hold the SET + or SET - button

STARTING AND DRIVING

off the accelerator pedal. Press the when the motor is off; pressed: the set speed will increase or
accelerator pedal to make the car go on very steep slopes; decrease in 10 km/h steps (or 5 mph)
faster than the set speed. While the in case of radar sensor obstruction: until the button is released.
accelerator pedal is pressed: in this case, clean the sensor. Use a The set speed increase or decrease is
a dedicated message will appear on clean cloth for cleaning. Do not use shown on the display.
the display for a few seconds; solvents or abrasive paste. In case of WARNINGS
the device will not be able to control system set, the conditions described By keeping the accelerator pedal
the distance between the vehicle and above also cause a cancellation depressed, the car can continue to
the one ahead. In this case the speed or deactivation of the system with accelerate beyond the set speed. In
will be determined only by the position times that may vary according to the this case, press the SET + (or SET – )
of the accelerator pedal. conditions. button to set the speed to the current
The device will return to normal speed of the car.
operation as soon as the accelerator WARNING The device is not When the SET – button is pressed to
pedal is released. deactivated when speeds higher reduce the speed, the braking system
The system cannot be set: than those set are reached with intervenes automatically if the exhaust
when pressing the brake pedal; the accelerator pedal pressed. In brake does not slow the car down
when the brakes are overheated; these conditions, the device may not sufficiently to reach the set speed.
when the electric parking brake is work correctly and it is advisable to The system holds the set speed
engaged; deactivate it. uphill and downhill; however a slight
when the transmission in P (Park), R variation is entirely normal, particularly
(Reverse) or N (Neutral); INCREASING/DECREASING OF on steep gradients.
when the ESC (or ABS or other SPEED The device is switched off while
stability control systems) are operating After having set the system, the stored driving if the brakes overheat.
or have just operated; speed can be increased or decreased SPEED VARIATION WITH ROAD
when the Autonomous Emergency by holding the SET + and SET - SIGN (INTELLIGENT ADAPTIVE
Brake Control (AEB Control) buttons pressed. CRUISE CONTROL)
system (where provided) is braking Press the SET + or SET - button The "Intelligent Adaptive Cruise
automatically; once: the set speed will increase or Control" system can be used to set a
when the Speed Limiter is active: decrease by 1 km/h (1 mph). Each speed limit equal to that indicated on
press the button (A) fig. 152 to subsequent press of the button will the road sign detected by the “Traffic
deactivate the Speed Limiter. Press the result in an increase or decrease of Sign Recognition” system (see the
(A) button again to set the system to 1 km/h (1 mph). respective paragraph in this section).
"ready" status;

156
When a new speed limit is recognised, stopping, if the driver unbuckles the cause serious accidents and fatal
the "Traffic Sign Information" system seat belt or opens the door. injuries.
will suggest the new limit, which will
be shown with a message on the WARNING The driver must ensure that SETTING THE DISTANCE
instrument panel display. The driver there are no pedestrians, vehicles or BETWEEN CARS
can accept the new limit by pressing other obstacles in front of the car when 162) 163) 164) 165)
the RES button to set the Adaptive the system is reactivated. Failure to The distance between your car and
Cruise Control speed to that suggested comply with this precaution may cause the vehicle ahead may be set to 1 bar
by the road sign. serious accidents and fatal injuries. (short), 2 bars (medium), 3 bars (long),
The activation of the Intelligent Adaptive
4 bars (maximum) fig. 154.
Cruise Control is indicated by the RECALLING THE SPEED
symbol on the display and the Once the system has been cancelled
green circle around the speed limit by pressing the brake pedal or the
sign. CANC button but not deactivated by
COMING TO A STOP AND pressing button (A) fig. 152, simply
RESTARTING press the RES button and take your
The system can decelerate the car to a foot off the accelerator pedal to recall a
standstill when the vehicle in front of it previously set speed.
slows down and stops. The system will The system will be set to the last stored
automatically restart the car if the car speed. 154 F0S1078
comes to a stop and the vehicle in front Before returning to the previously set
restarts within 3 seconds. If the vehicle speed, bring the speed close to that The distances from the vehicle ahead
in front restarts after 3 seconds, the value, then press the RES button and are proportional to speed. The interval
RES button or the accelerator pedal release it. of time with respect to the vehicle
must be pressed to reactivate the ahead remains constant and varies
system and restart. If the system keeps WARNING The recall function must from 1 second (for the short distance
the car at a standstill for 2 minutes, the only be used if the road and traffic 1-bar setting) to 2 seconds (for the
electric parking brake will activate and conditions so allow. Recalling an maximum distance 4-bar setting).
the system will be deactivated. excessively high or low speed for the The set distance is shown on the
NOTE The electric parking brake current traffic and road conditions display by means of a dedicated icon
will be activated and the system will could cause a sudden acceleration or (A) fig. 155 (or in the “Driver Assist”
be deactivated at speeds close to a deceleration of the car. Failure to area).
comply with these precautions may

157
 The setting is 4 (maximum) the first adjust the car speed to hold the with these precautions may cause

STARTING AND DRIVING

time the device is used. After the distance setting regardless of the set serious accidents and injuries.
distance has been modified by the speed.
driver, the new distance will be stored The car holds the set distance until: WARNING The driver is fully
also after the system is deactivated and the vehicle ahead accelerates to a responsible for holding a safe distance
reactivated. speed higher than the set speed; from the vehicle ahead respecting the
the vehicle ahead leaves the lane highway code in force in the respective
or the detection field of the Adaptive country.
Cruise Control device sensor;
A the distance setting is changed; OVERTAKING AID FUNCTION
the Adaptive Cruise Control device is
166)
deactivated/cancelled.
The Adaptive Cruise Control system,
when traffic conditions permit, allows
WARNING The maximum breaking additional acceleration to be given to
applied by the device is limited. The the vehicle to facilitate overtaking by
155 F0S1363 driver may apply the brakes in all cases simply activating the direction indicator.
if needed. This additional acceleration is provided
To decrease the distance
as long as the distance to the vehicle to
Press and release the button to WARNING If the system predicts be overtaken is guaranteed.
decrease the distance setting (B) that the braking level is insufficient to Once acceleration is perceived, the
fig. 152. maintain the set distance, it signals driver must make sure that the traffic
The distance setting decreases by one the driver to pay attention when and cars coming from behind allow
bar (shorter) every time the button is approaching the vehicle ahead by it, and to make the lane change
pressed. displaying an alert message on the manoeuvre. Once the trajectory is clear
Once the shortest distance has been display. An acoustic signal is also of vehicles, Adaptive Cruise Control will
reached, a further press of the button emitted. In this case, it is advisable to regain control of the selected speed,
will set the longest distance. The set brake immediately as necessary to hold or reduce it to maintain the desired
speed is held if there are no cars a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. distance from the vehicle ahead.
ahead.
NOTE The overtaking aid function
If a vehicle shown on the instrument WARNING The driver is responsible for is only available on the side where
panel proceeds in the same lane, ensuring that there are no pedestrians, overtaking is permitted according to
travelling at slower speed, an icon other cars or objectives along the the highway code (left in countries
appears on the display (where direction of the car. Failure to comply with traffic on the right side of the
provided). The device will automatically

158
carriageway, right in countries with If these conditions occur while the the driver must control the car at all
traffic on the left side). system is decelerating with respect times.
SPEED REDUCTION ON BENDS to a vehicle ahead, the system could Vehicle not aligned
continue the deceleration, if necessary,
The Adaptive Cruise Control system The system may not detect a vehicle
also after it is cancelled or deactivated
CAN decelerate slightly on bends to travelling on the same lane but which
within the minimum speed settable on
improve vehicle stability and comfort. is not aligned along the same direction
the system.
The functionality can be a valid help in of travel or a vehicle which is cutting
roundabouts or with gradual bends, SYSTEM LIMITED OPERATION in from a side lane. Sufficient distance
faced with increasing curvature; it WARNING from the vehicles ahead may not be
cannot compensate for sudden If the dedicated message is shown guaranteed in these cases.
steering or in general medium/high on the display, a condition limiting the The non-aligned vehicle can weave
lateral accelerations. system operation may have occurred. in and out of the driving direction
However, the driver is responsible, The possible reasons of this limitation causing the car to brake or accelerate
depending on the traffic scenario, to are something blocking the camera unexpectedly.
apply the brake, where necessary, to view or a fault. Steering and curves
further reduce the speed of the vehicle, In case of camera blinding (e.g. caused On bends fig. 156 with the system set,
ensuring its stability in sharp bends or by low sun in front of the windscreen or it could limit speed and acceleration to
descending radius. in the conditions of fog or heavy rain), guarantee car stability even if no cars
DEACTIVATION wait until the light and glare conditions are detected ahead.
cease and allow the system to operate
The device is deactivated and the set When leaving the bend, the system
fully.
speed is cancelled if: tends to reset the previously set speed.
If an obstruction is signalled, clean the
the (A) fig. 152 button is pressed on
area of the windscreen indicated in
the Adaptive Cruise Control;
fig. 151 and check that the message
the Speed Limiter button is pressed;
has disappeared.
the ignition device switch is in the
STOP position; When the conditions limiting the
system functions end, this will go back
The device is cancelled (the set speed
to normal and complete operation.
and distance are stored):
Should the fault persist, contact a Fiat
when the CANC button is pressed;
Dealership.
when the conditions shown in the
“Setting the desired speed” paragraph PRECAUTIONS WHILE DRIVING
156 F0S1374
occur. The system may not work correctly in
some driving conditions (see below):

159
 WARNING In case of narrow bends, Small cars Objects and cars moving in

STARTING AND DRIVING

the performance of the system could Some narrow vehicles (e.g. bicycles opposite or crosswise direction
be limited. In this case, it is advisable to and motorcycles fig. 158) travelling The system cannot detect the
deactivate the device. near the outer edges of the lane or presence of objects or cars travelling in
which enter the lane from kerbside are opposite or crosswise direction fig. 159
Using the system on gradient not detected until they are fully in the and consequently will not be operated.
When driving on roads with variable lane.
gradient, the system may not detect Sufficient distance from the cars ahead
the presence of a vehicle on the may not be guaranteed in these cases.
lane. The system performance be
limited according to speed, load of the
car, traffic conditions and gradient
steepness.
Lane change
The system may not detect the
presence of a vehicle until it is fully in 159 F0S1184

your lane fig. 157.

In this case, sufficient distance from the CO-DRIVER SYSTEM
vehicle which is changing lane may not 158 F0S1183
WITH STOP&GO - Traffic
be guaranteed: it is advisable to pay Jam Assist
the utmost attention at all times and Stationary objects and vehicles (where provided)
be always ready to press the brakes if The system cannot detect the The system combines Active Cruise
needed. presence of stationary objects and Control (ACC) functions and lane
vehicles if you are travelling at a speed centring logic to control the trajectory
exceeding 60 km/h (37 mph). For of the car holding it as close as
example, the system may not operate possible in the middle of the lane and
if the vehicle ahead leaves the lane also managing speed.
and a car stopped on the lane ahead It is a driving assistance system that
of if. Pay the utmost attention at all can be activated on all road types.
times and be always ready to press the The system uses information from the
brakes if needed. front camera and radar to help you
keep the car in the middle of the lane at
a constant speed.
157 F0S1182

160
If the event that the lane marking line is Suspension conditions
missing or not correctly recognised, System operation is temporarily paused
the Co-Driver system may also in the following cases:
use information from adjacent and ACC system deactivation or inhibition
preceding vehicles. This condition may (see paragraph the Adaptive Cruise
occur in congested traffic, when the Control function);
car in front and/or objects around the if there are very tight bends;
car obstruct the lane markings. In this one of the two lines is broken or
case, the system can use the queues ruined;
of cars in the traffic to define the driving 160 F0S1373 the sun is low and is dazzling the
trajectory. Alternatively, the system camera on the windscreen;
can use the "lock-on" strategy, which The following conditions must be met if the left or right direction indicator is
allows it to automatically follow the car before the Co-Driver system turns on: activated;
in front. the Co-Driver system must be if the driver intentionally changes
OPERATION switched on by pressing the button (A) lanes without switching on the direction
The system only works if the driver fig. 160 on the steering wheel; indicator on the corresponding side;
keeps his or her hands on the steering the Adaptive Cruise Control device when there is no surrounding traffic
wheel. (ACC) must be on; and there are no horizontal markings or
the car speed must be between 0 they cannot be detected;
If the system detects that hands have
and 150 km/h; if there are system anomalies;
been removed from the steering wheel,
no anomaly related to the camera or if the car speed exceeds the
it will alert you of the need to put your
the radar must be present; maximum limit;
hands back on the steering wheel (see
the road lane width must be between if lateral acceleration is high;
following pages).
2.7 metres and 4.2 metres; poor visibility (due to heavy rain,
the direction indicators must not be snow, fog, etc.);
WARNING The Co-Driver system can activated;
take a few seconds to activate once Automatic deactivation
no anomaly related to the system The system is deactivated if you take
all conditions are met. During this must be present.
time, a grey indication will appear on your hands off the steering wheel for 45
the instrument panel display and the ACTIVATION / DEACTIVATION seconds.
system will be activated automatically To activate the system, press button
as soon as all conditions are met, (A) fig. 160 on the steering wheel. WARNING When the Co-Driver is
without any intervention by the driver. To deactivate the system press the paused the related graphics in the
button again. dedicated area will turn grey.

161
 WARNING Hands on the steering SYSTEM STATUS

STARTING AND DRIVING

few seconds, this screen fig. 163 will
wheel are detected by a capacitive System active: The active and appear on the instrument panel display.
sensor installed in it. correctly operating system status is
indicated by the following screen on the
When the suspension conditions are instrument panel display fig. 161 in the
over, the Co-Driver will be available "Driver Assistance" menu.
again without requiring any reactivation When the hands are removed from the
action by the driver. steering wheel, the system does not
deactivate automatically, but after a
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
few seconds: some dedicated screens
The system status can always be
appear on the instrument panel display
viewed through a dedicated area on
in sequence, to warn the driver to
the instrument panel display. 162
return his or her hands to the steering F0S1117

The system status is indicated by the wheel (see the description below).
colour of the symbol.
If the driver's hands are not on the
steering wheel, a series of warnings
will appear on the instrument panel
display to alert the driver that he needs
to reposition his hands on the steering
wheel. Acoustic signals will also be
emitted.
After a certain period of time, the Co-
Driver system will be disabled if the 163 F0S1118
driver has not repositioned his or her 161 F0S1116

hands on the steering wheel. Active system (hands removed

System active (hands removed from the steering wheel for a long
When the system does not detect
from the steering wheel for a short time): If you do not place your hands
hands on the steering wheel for a few
time): As soon as you remove your on the steering wheel, the following
seconds, it will warn the driver by
from the steering wheel, this screen screen will appear on the display of the
displaying a dedicated screen at the
fig. 162 appears on the instrument instrument panel, fig. 164.
centre of the instrument panel display
panel display: in this case, the system
(see the description in the following An acoustic warning will sound also in
remains active.
pages). this case.
If the driver has not returned his or her
hands to the steering wheel within a

162
If you remove your hands from the pedal will cause the system to behave either the camera or radar are
steering wheel, a countdown will begin normally and the minimum risk damaged, covered or obstructed (e.g.
which will result in the activation of manoeuvre will be aborted. by mud, ice, snow, etc.);
visual and audible alerts (see the when driving in the hills or on roads
description provided in the "Co-Driver with narrow turns;
with Stop&Go - Traffic Jam Assist" near motorway toll-gates;
section in this chapter). Furthermore, when the motorway entrance or exit
the system will initiate a minimum risk is more than 6 meters wide;
manoeuvre to bring the car to safety if if the camera is exposed to dazzling
no hands are detected. light (e.g. reflection or direct sunlight).
The Adaptive Cruise Control system
will braking slightly 23 seconds after
your hands have been removed from WARNING
164 F0S1119
the steering wheel to warn you and
encourage you to regain control of the When the Co-Driver system is active, 146) Pay the utmost attention while driving
car. at all times and be always ready to press
Lane Control (where provided) the brakes if needed.
If the driver does not regain control of is temporarily paused. When the 147) The system is an aid for the driver,
the vehicle after a further 3 seconds, Co-Driver system is not active, Lane who must always pay full attention while
the system will brake again lightly. Control (where provided), if previously driving. The responsibility always rests with
Subsequently, the system will activated, is still available. For more the driver, who must take into account
automatically braking to bring the the traffic conditions in order to drive in
information on the Lane Control complete safety. The driver must always
vehicle to a stop if you still do not put system, see the “Driving assistance maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in
your hands back on the steering wheel systems” chapter in the "Safety" front.
persists. section. 148) The system is an aid for car driving,
The hazard warning lights will be it DOES NOT warn the driver about
activated as soon as the system SYSTEM LIMITED OPERATION incoming cars outside of the detection
activates the automatic braking. When The Co-Driver may have limited or areas. The driver must always maintain
reduced functionality when one of the a sufficient level of attention to the traffic
the vehicle is at a standstill, the system and road conditions and for controlling the
will unlock the doors (if previously following conditions occurs: trajectory of the vehicle.
locked) and keep the hazard lights on. The main ones are listed below: 149) The device is not activated in
If you regain control of the vehicle lane marking lines are not clear or presence of pedestrians, oncoming
in conditions of poor visibility (e.g. in vehicles in the opposite direction of travel
during the minimum risk manoeuvre, or moving in the crosswise direction and
placing your hands on the steering heavy rain, snow, fog, etc.);
stationary objects (e.g. a vehicle standing
wheel or pressing the accelerator in a queue or a broken down vehicle).

163
 STARTING AND DRIVING
150) The device cannot take account of 157) When using Co-Driver system, hold a dedicated message on the instrument
road, traffic and weather conditions and the steering wheel and consider the panel display warns the driver that the
conditions of poor visibility (e.g. fog). road conditions and surrounding traffic. vehicle ahead is too close. An acoustic
151) The device does not always fully The driver must therefore be ready to signal is also emitted. In this case, it
recognise complicated driving conditions immediately regain control of the car is advisable to brake immediately as
which could cause incorrect or non- at any time. Failure to observe these necessary to hold a safe distance from the
existing determination of the safe distance instructions can cause severe injuries with vehicle ahead.
to be held. even lethal consequences. 164) The driver is responsible for ensuring
152) When driving on two-way roads 158) The Co-Driver system is an aid for the that there are no pedestrians, other
where there is no lane dividing centre line driver, who must always pay full attention vehicles or objectives along the direction of
(e.g. on country roads), the use of the while driving. The responsibility always the vehicle. Failure to comply with these
ACC and Co-Driver systems is strongly rests with the driver, who must take into precautions may cause serious accidents
discouraged as this system could detect account the traffic conditions in order to and injuries.
the entire carriageway as single-lane drive in complete safety. The driver must 165) The driver is fully responsible for
dividing lines. always maintain a safe distance from the holding a safe distance from the vehicle
153) Do not place any objects on the vehicle in front. ahead respecting the highway code in
steering wheel (e.g. steering wheel covers 159) If the windscreen must be replaced force in the respective country.
of any type or material) which could due to scratches, chipping or breakage, 166) The device detects the direction of
interfere with the capacitive hand detection contact exclusively a Fiat Dealership. traffic automatically when the car passes
sensor on the steering wheel. Do not replace the windscreen on your from left-hand traffic to right-hand traffic.
154) Many unpredictable situations can own, risk of malfunction! It is advisable to In this case, the overtaking assist function
arise, affecting the performance of Co- replace the windscreen if it is damaged in is only active when the reference vehicle
Driver system. The driver must be ready to the area of the camera. is overtaken on the right. The additional
react immediately and take control of the 160) Driving the car on urban routes could acceleration is activated when the driver
car in place of Co-Driver system. significantly change the sensitivity of the uses the right direction indicator. In this
155) If the car approaches a bend that is system, due to the limited and/or lack of condition, the device no longer provides
too tight with respect to the current speed, vertical and horizontal signs and variable the overtaking assist function on the left-
the Co-Driver system turns off. The driver traffic conditions. hand side until it determines that the car
must therefore be ready to immediately 161) External factors and conditions has returned to left-hand traffic conditions.
regain control of the car at any time. To may affect the proper operation of the 167) The device cannot apply the
avoid this situation it is important that the Co-Driver system: damage or obstructions maximum braking force: the car will not be
car speed set does not exceed the current caused by mud, ice, snow, etc., damaged stopped completely.
road speed limit. or misaligned bumpers, interference 168) It is dangerous to leave the device
156) The Co-Driver system uses a hands with other equipment that causes on when it is not used. There is a risk of
on steering wheel detection sensor: electromagnetic waves. inadvertently activating it and losing control
the driver must keep his hands on the 162) The maximum breaking applied by of the car due to unexpected excessive
steering wheel at all times. If the hands the device is limited. The driver may apply speed.
are removed from the steering wheel the brakes in all cases if needed. 169) The device can take the car to a
for a certain period of time, the system 163) If the device predicts that the level standstill but the driver must always be
disengages. of braking is not sufficient to maintain ready to apply the brakes, if necessary.
the set distance, the word “BRAKE!” or

164
 Fiat Dealership to have the radar sensor
IMPORTANT realigned or replaced.
44) Do not use the Co-Driver off-road,
37) The system may have limited operation where the road surface is not well defined
or not work at all in weather conditions or on roads where the road markings are
such as: heavy rain, hail, low sun, blinded missing (e.g. work in progress, roads
camera, thick fog, heavy snow. with temporary tarmac). The system is
38) The camera on the windscreen must designed for use on perfectly tarmacked
not be covered with stickers or any other roads only.
object. 45) In case of strong variations in light
39) Operation can be adversely affected (e.g. tunnel entrances and exits), the
by any structural change made to the sensor may not function correctly due to 165 F0S1154

car, such as a modification to the front temporary blinding and therefore the
geometry, tyre change, or a heavier load system may not be active. System activation
than the standard load of the car. The system is automatically activated
40) Incorrect repairs in the zone where the when reverse is engaged.
camera is mounted may interfere with its PARK ASSIST
field of vision and reduce its performance System deactivation
(e.g. application of fillers or glues to
SYSTEM The system is automatically deactivated
remove scratches). Go to a Fiat Dealership VERSIONS WITH 3 whenever a gear other than reverse is
for any operation of this type. SENSORS engaged.
41) Do not tamper with nor operate on the
(where provided) Acoustic warning
camera on the windscreen. In the case of
damage, contact a Fiat Dealership. 170)
When reverse is engaged and there is
42) Do not wash with high-pressure jets an obstacle behind the car, an acoustic
46) 47) 48)
in the bumper lower area: in particular warning with variable frequency is
do not operate on the system's electrical The parking sensors, located in the rear activated:
connector. Do not use solvents or abrasive bumper fig. 165, detect the presence
paste.
increases as the distance between
43) Be careful in case of repairs and of any obstacles and warn the driver the car and the obstacle decreases;
painting in the zone around the sensor. In about them, through an acoustic becomes continuous when the
the event of a frontal impact the sensor warning and, where provided, visual distance between the car and the
may automatically deactivate and display a warnings on the instrument panel obstacle is less than 30 cm and stops if
warning to indicate that the sensor needs display. the distance increases;
to be repaired. Even without a malfunction
warning, deactivate the system operation is constant if the distance between
if you think that the position of the the car and the obstacle is unchanged.
radar sensor has changed (e.g. due to If this situation concerns the exterior
low-speed frontal impact as during parking sensors, the signal will stop after
manoeuvres). In these cases, go to a approximately 3 seconds to avoid, for

165
 example, indications in the event of Fault indication the performance of the system can

STARTING AND DRIVING

manoeuvres along a wall. Parking sensor faults, if any, will be be influenced by the position of the
If several obstacles are detected by indicated by a message on the display sensors, e.g. by changing the set-
the sensors, only the nearest one is (see description in the "Warning up of the car (due to wear of shock
considered. lights and messages" chapter in the absorbers or suspensions), replacing
Warning on display "Knowing the instrument panel" the tyres with others of different sizes,
The warnings regarding the Park Assist section). travelling with a laden car, installing
system are shown on the instrument General warnings specific set-ups to lower the car;
panel display only if the "Acoustic When parking, take the utmost care the presence of adhesives on the
warning and display" item in the over obstacles that may be above sensors. Therefore, take care not to
"Settings" menu of the Uconnect™ or under the sensor. Objects close place stickers on the sensors.
system is selected (see "Settings" to the car are not detected under VERSIONS WITH 11
in the section "Vehicle mode" in the certain circumstances and could SENSORS
"Multimedia" section). therefore cause damage to the car or The parking sensors, located in the
In addition to the acoustic warning, the be damaged. front bumper fig. 166 e fig. 167 (one
system indicates the presence of an Some conditions may influence the per side) and rear bumper fig. 168,
obstacle in the rear area by displaying performance of the parking system: detect the presence of any obstacles
a single arc blinking in one of the reduced sensor sensitivity and a and warn the driver through an
possible areas, in accordance with the reduction in the parking assistance acoustic warning and, where provided,
distance of the object and the position system performance could be due to visual warnings on the instrument panel
in relation to the car. the presence of: ice, snow, mud, thick display.
In general, the car is closer to the paint, on the surface of the sensor;
obstacle when a single flashing arc is the sensor may detect a non-existent
shown on the display and the acoustic obstacle ("echo interference") due to
warning becomes continuous. mechanical interference, for example
If several obstacles are detected when washing the car, in rain (strong
simultaneously in the rear area, wind), hail;
the display will show all of them, the signals sent by the sensor can
regardless of the area in which they also be altered by the presence of
were detected. The colour on the ultrasonic systems (e.g. pneumatic
display depends on the distance from brake systems of trucks or pneumatic
and position of the obstacle. drills) near the vehicle; 166 F0S1185

166
 Manual system WARNING The Park Assist system
activation/deactivation keeps its activation/deactivation status
in memory. After manually deactivating
it, it remains in this condition until it is
reactivated by a button, even after the
car has been switched off and then on
again.

Activation/deactivation of acoustic
167 F0S1270 and visual signals
With the system active, the acoustic
and visual signals are activated
169 F0S1215
automatically in the following cases:
To deactivate the system, press button when the transmission is in position
(A) fig. 169 located on the left side (D) and an obstacle is detected;
of the dashboard (left-hand drive when the transmission is in reverse
versions). (R);
The change from active system to when the transmission is in neutral
deactivated and vice versa is always (N) and an obstacle is detected with the
indicated by an appropriate message car in motion.
168 F0S1186
on the instrument panel display. The acoustic and visual signals are
The LED on the button indicates the deactivated automatically in the
system on or off status: following cases:
The LED is off when the system is when the transmission is in position
active; (D) or in neutral (N) and the car exceeds
The LED is on when the system was a speed of about 13 km/h;
manually deactivated by the user or in a when the transmission is in reverse
fault or temporary disable condition. (R) and the car exceeds a speed
of approximately 11 km/h (this will
If the off button is pressed with the
cause the LED on the on/off button to
system faulty, the LED flashes for about
illuminate);
5 seconds, then it stays off.
when the transmission is in position
(N) and the car is at a standstill;

167
 when the transmission is in parking real risk of collision. Visual warnings distance and position of the obstacle

STARTING AND DRIVING

position (P). ("Display warning", see below) are inside or outside the trajectory of
always given to the driver, even when the car. An obstacle detected in a
Acoustic warning
the obstacle is not in the trajectory continuous tone area is always marked
When the sensors detect an obstacle
of the car and will be of a different with a red arc.
within the trajectory of the car, an
colour depending on whether it has If several obstacles are detected
acoustic warning is activated with
been detected inside or outside the simultaneously in the front and rear
a frequency that increases as the
trajectory. area, the display will show all of them,
distance from the obstacle decreases
In case of failure of the car audio regardless of the area in which they
and then becomes a continuous tone
system, the acoustic warnings will were detected.
when this distance becomes less than
be provided by the buzzer of the
about 30 cm. Fault indication
instrument panel and will not be
The acoustic warning is interrupted in Parking sensor faults, if any, will be
directional (the acoustic warning will not
the following situations: indicated by a message on the display
be from the side where the obstacle
when external sensors detect (see description in the "Warning
has been detected).
an obstacle at a constant distance lights and messages" chapter in the
(example: manoeuvring along a wall); Warning on display "Knowing the instrument panel"
if car is at a standstill with the The warnings regarding the system are section).
transmission in a position other than shown on the instrument panel display
Messages on the display
reverse (R); only if the "Acoustic warning and
In case of system failure an acoustic
when the obstacle is not within the display" item in the "Settings" menu of
warning is emitted and the display
trajectory of the car. the Uconnect™ system is selected
shows a dedicated message for about
If the sensors detect several obstacles (see "Settings" in the section "Vehicle
5 seconds.
at the same time, both in the front and mode" in the "Multimedia" section).
If the display shows messages
rear area, the acoustic warning of the The system indicates the presence
requiring the front or rear sensor
obstacle in the nearest trajectory is of an obstacle by displaying a single
cleaning, make sure that the outer
reproduced. arc in one of the possible areas, in
surface and the underside of the
When the system emits an accordance with the distance of the
bumper is free of dirt (e.g. snow, mud,
acoustic warning, the volume of the object and the position in relation to the
ice, etc.). After performing this check,
Uconnect™system, if activated, is car.
place the ignition device in STOP
automatically lowered. As you approach an obstacle within position, then turn it to the ENGINE and
The acoustic indications are only the front or rear coverage area, the check whether the messages are no
activated when the obstacle is on the display will show a single arc in the longer displayed. If messages are still
trajectory of the car and so there is a corresponding area, either flashing or displayed, contact a Fiat Dealership.
steady. The colour depends on the

168
General warnings the presence of adhesives on the bumper that are not carried out properly
When parking, take the utmost care sensors. Therefore, take care not to may compromise the operation of the
over obstacles that may be above place stickers on the sensors. parking sensors.
or under the sensor. Objects close 48) Only have the bumper repainted or
46)
any retouches to the paintwork in the
to the car are not detected under area of the sensors carried out by a Fiat
certain circumstances and could Dealership. Incorrect paint application
therefore cause damage to the car or WARNING could affect the operation of the parking
be damaged. sensors.
Some conditions may influence the 170) Parking and other potentially
performance of the parking system: dangerous manoeuvres are, however, SIDE DISTANCE
reduced sensor sensitivity and a always the driver’s responsibility. When
performing these operations, always WARNING SYSTEM
reduction in the parking assistance
make sure that there are no other people
system performance could be due to (especially children) or animals on the (where provided)
the presence of: ice, snow, mud, thick route you want to take. The parking The Side Distance Warning system
paint, on the surface of the sensor; sensors are an aid for the driver, but the has the function of detecting the
the sensor may detect a non-existent driver must never allow their attention presence of side obstacles using the
obstacle ("echo interference") due to to lapse during potentially dangerous sensors located in the front bumper
manoeuvres, even those executed at low
mechanical interference, for example speeds. fig. 170 (one per side) and rear bumper
when washing the car, in rain (strong fig. 171, and of warning the driver
wind), hail; through an acoustic warning and,
the signals sent by the sensor can IMPORTANT where provided, visual warnings on the
also be altered by the presence of instrument panel display.
ultrasonic systems (e.g. pneumatic 46) The sensors must be clean of mud,
brake systems of trucks or pneumatic dirt, snow or ice in order for the system to
operate correctly. Be careful not to scratch
drills) near the vehicle; or damage the sensors while cleaning
the performance of the system can them. Avoid using dry, rough or hard
be influenced by the position of the cloths. The sensors should be washed
sensors, e.g. by changing the set- using clean water with the addition of car
up of the car (due to wear of shock shampoo if necessary. When using special
washing equipment such as high pressure
absorbers or suspensions), replacing jets or steam cleaning, clean the sensors
the tyres with others of different sizes, very quickly keeping the jet more than 10
travelling with a laden car, installing cm away.
170 F0S1270
specific set-ups to lower the car; 47) Have interventions on the bumper in
the area of the sensors carried out only
by a Fiat Dealership. Interventions on the

169
 is constant if the distance between WARNINGS ON THE

STARTING AND DRIVING

the car and the obstacle is unchanged. DISPLAY
The acoustic warning is interrupted The indications regarding the Side
after about 3 seconds if the car is Distance Warning system are shown on
stationary or manoeuvring along a wall. the instrument panel display only if the
If the sensors detect several obstacles respective item in the "Settings" menu
at the same time, both in the front and of the Uconnect™ system is selected
rear zones the acoustic warning of the (see "Settings" in the"Vehicle mode"
obstacle in the nearest trajectory is paragraph in the "Multimedia" section).
171 F0S1288 reproduced. The system indicates the presence
When the system emits an of an obstacle by displaying a single
ACTIVATION/ acoustic warning, the volume of the arc in one of the possible areas, in
DEACTIVATION Uconnect™system, if activated, is accordance with the distance of the
The system can operate only after automatically lowered. object and the position in relation to the
driving a short distance and if the car The acoustic indications are only car.
speed is between 0 and 13 km/h. activated when the obstacle is on the If the obstacle is detected in the right
The system can be trajectory of the car and so there is a or left side area, a single flashing
activated/deactivated via the "Settings" real risk of collision. Visual warnings arc will be displayed as the obstacle
menu of the Uconnect™ system ("Warnings on the display", see approaches, in addition to an acoustic
(see the Multimedia section for further below) are always given to the driver, warning.
information). even when the obstacle is not in the If several obstacles are detected
trajectory of the car and will be of a simultaneously in the side area,
ACOUSTIC WARNING
different colour depending on whether the display will show all of them,
If there is an obstacle at the side of the
it has been detected inside or outside regardless of the area in which they
vehicle, an acoustic warning is emitted
the trajectory. were detected.
and the signal varies as the distance of
In case of failure of the car audio In general, the car is closer to the
the obstacle from the bumper varies.
system, the acoustic warnings will obstacle when a single or several
The frequency of the acoustic warning:
be provided by the buzzer of the flashing arcs are shown on the display
increases as the distance between instrument panel and will not be and the acoustic warning becomes
the car and the obstacle decreases; directional (the acoustic warning will not continuous. The colour of the arches
becomes continuous when the be from the side where the obstacle shown on the display according to the
distance between the car and the has been detected). distance and position of the obstacle
obstacle is less than 30 cm and stops if
inside or outside the trajectory of
the distance increases;
the car. An obstacle detected in a

170
continuous tone area is always marked GENERAL WARNINGS
with a red arc. IMPORTANT
49) 50)

FAULT INDICATION Some conditions may influence the

49) The sensors must be clean of mud,
Parking sensor faults, if any, will be performance of the Side Distance dirt, snow or ice in order for the system to
indicated by the switching on of the Warning system: operate correctly. Be careful not to scratch
symbol on the instrument panel reduced sensor sensitivity and a or damage the sensors while cleaning
reduction in the parking assistance them. Avoid using dry, rough or hard
together with the message on the cloths. The sensors should be washed
display (see description in the "Warning system performance could be due to using clean water with the addition of car
lights and messages" chapter in the the presence of: ice, snow, mud, thick shampoo if necessary. When using special
"Knowing the instrument panel" paint, on the surface of the sensor; washing equipment such as high pressure
section). the sensor may detect a non-existent jets or steam cleaning, clean the sensors
obstacle ("echo interference") due to very quickly keeping the jet more than 10
MESSAGES ON THE cm away.
mechanical interference, for example 50) Only have the bumper repainted or
DISPLAY
when washing the car, in rain (strong any retouches to the paintwork in the
If the system detects a failure, a wind), hail; area of the sensors carried out by a Fiat
dedicated message is shown on the the signals sent by the sensor can Dealership. Incorrect paint application
display for about 5 seconds. also be altered by the presence of could affect the operation of the parking
If the display shows messages sensors.
ultrasonic systems (e.g. pneumatic
requiring the front or rear sensor brake systems of trucks or pneumatic
cleaning, make sure that the outer drills) near the vehicle;
surface and the underside of the the performance of the Side Distance
bumper is free of dirt (e.g. snow, Warning system can be influenced
mud, ice, etc.). After performing this by the position of the sensors, e.g.
check, turn the ignition device in STOP by changing the set-up of the car
position, then turn it to the ENGINE (due to wear of shock absorbers or
position and check whether the suspensions), replacing the tyres with
messages are no longer displayed. If others of different sizes, travelling with
messages are still displayed, contact a a loaded car, installing specific set-ups
Fiat Dealership. to lower the car;
the presence of stickers on the
sensors can adversely affect the
correct operation of the system.
Therefore, take care not to place
stickers on the sensors.

171
 TRAFFIC SIGN NOTE The rain, fog or snow type

STARTING AND DRIVING

RECOGNITION limits are only displayed if these
conditions are likely to occur, i.e. if the
The TSR (Traffic Sign Recognition) windscreen wipers (in case of rain), the
system is a driver assistance system fog lights/fog lights (in case of fog)
that alerts the user to the most or the windscreen wipers with low
plausible road limits. external temperature (in case of snow)
It is able to recognise both are activated.
unconditional speed limits and those in The Traffic Sign Recognition system
rain, snow and fog (shown only when is automatically active when the car is 173 F0S1189
they are valid). started.
Where available, a speed limit of these Using the "Settings" menu of the The recognition of valid road limits
types represents the applicable road Uconnect™ system the user can: depends very much on road
limit, always visible at the top of each deactivate the system by removing conditions, the positioning of signs,
screen fig. 172. the check mark from the relevant menu visibility conditions and various other
item factors. The system supplies and
select the type of signalling when the reminds the driver of the most plausible
detected road limit is exceeded (off, road limit.
visual, visual and acoustic signalling). The TSR system cannot provide an
See the "Uconnect™" chapter in applicable speed limit in the following
the "Multimedia" section for more cases:
information. if an end-of-limit sign is recognised
If Speed Limiter or Adaptive Cruise and if the navigator (where provided)
Control is active, the applicable road is unable to provide a valid limit on
172 F0S1364 limit (unconditional or rain/snow/fog that stretch of road. The symbol
type) is made available and by pressing appears on the display.
Road limits in other categories (e.g. the RES button can be accepted as in case of system fault or
time restrictions, exit signs, etc.) and a speed for Intelligent Speed Assist unavailability, the symbol appears
the prohibition of overtaking are only or alternatively for Intelligent Adaptive on the display.
visible in the "Driver Assist" screen of Cruise Control (fig. 173). NOTE In some cases, the system
the instrument panel (see the "Display" may show this symbol when
chapter in the "Knowing the instrument recalculating the route by the
panel" section). navigation system (where provided).

172
With Uconnect™ without new sign, the TSR symbol will become The navigator tells the system of the
navigation system coloured again. unit of measurement in force in the
The TSR system uses the camera, country in which you are travelling and
located in the central area of the WARNING In the absence of a converts the value consistently with the
windscreen fig. 174 and reminds the navigator, the system cannot recognise unit of measurement selected by the
user of the last road limit recognised by the unit of measurement of the user. In this way, the speed limitation
the camera. country you are travelling in, but only suggested by the ISA system or the
the numerical value of the road sign speed offered by the IACC system will
encountered along the road. The always be correct, regardless of the
speed limit suggested and offered unit of measurement chosen by the
to Intelligent Speed Assist (ISA) and user.
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control The system can display the shape of
(IACC) systems (where active) is the signs consistently with the current
therefore intended according to the unit shape of the country in which you are
of measurement set by the user on the travelling.
instrument panel display. Therefore, for Using the information contained in the
174 F0S1286 the ISA and the IACC to be of practical navigator, the system can recognise
help in complying with the limits in motorway, urban and non-urban
NOTE Without a navigator, the system force, the driver must set the unit of scenarios and to use the limits
cannot provide: measurement consistent with the provided by the navigator to provide
the implicit limits (e.g. the general country in which they are travelling. the most plausibly accurate speed limit.
speed limit on motorways). In these In addition, the system can recognise
cases the system can show the last turns and provide, where necessary,
With Uconnect™ with navigation
road sign encountered (e.g. the speed the limit detected by the navigator
system
limit of the entrance ramp); in place of that recognised by the
When the navigator is present, the TSR
in general, the limit in force for a camera.
system integrates the detections made
road where a speed limit sign was not by the camera with the information
previously encountered and correctly provided by the navigation system.
recognised. Therefore, it can provide the implicit
After travelling a certain distance, the limits (e.g. the general speed limit on
road limit symbol turns grey to indicate motorways) and to supplement with
that it is no longer considered reliable maps the limitations of recognition of
by the system. Upon recognition of a road signs on the camera alone.

173
 INTELLIGENT SPEED SYSTEM DEACTIVATION

STARTING AND DRIVING

ASSIST
90
70 km/h D The system is deactivated under the
following conditions:
The "Intelligent Speed Assist" system 75 % POWER

90
when the Traffic Sign Recognition
can be used to set a speed limit on system is deactivated;
the "Speed Limiter" system equal to when the Speed Limiter system is
the one detected on the road signs by 216 deactivated;
means of the "Traffic Sign Recognition" km
RANGE when the Traffic Sign Recognition
system, signalled to the driver on the 23° C 123456 km system shows a new speed limit which
instrument panel display. The minimum is not confirmed by the driver;
175 F0S1187
speed that can be set is 30 km/h (20 when the Traffic Sign Recognition
mph). system shows the end of the speed
The "Intelligent Speed Assist" system
can be activated if the following
70
90 km/h D limit;
when the Traffic Sign Recognition
systems are active: 75 % POWER
system cannot display any speed limit.
Speed Limiter (see the chapter in this 70

section) EXCEEDING THE

Traffic Sign Recognition (see the PROGRAMMED SPEED
216
chapter in this section) km By fully depressing the accelerator
When the "Intelligent Speed Assist"
RANGE
pedal, the programmed speed can
23° C 123456 km
system recognises a new road sign, be exceeded even with the "Intelligent
it will suggest the new speed limit to
176 F0S1188 Speed Assist" system active (e.g. in
the driver with a specific message and the event of overtaking). The system is
You can confirm by pressing the disabled until the speed drops below
dedicated alerts depending on whether RES button the speed limit setting
the road sign is higher (fig. 175) or the set limit, after which it activates
equal to the suggested sign. Once the again automatically.
lower (fig. 176) than the current speed speed limit provided by the "Traffic
stored by the Speed Limiter. Consider Sign Recognition" system has been
both unconditional speed limits and acquired as the new Speed Limiter
those valid in rain, snow or fog to be value, the activation of Intelligent Speed
valid for speed limitation.
Assist is indicated by the symbol
on the display and the relevant road
sign is shown surrounded by green.

174
PARKVIEW® REAR The images are shown on the display car and the expected reversing path
together with a warning message. in accordance with the steering wheel
BACK UP CAMERA position.
After shifting from position R (Reverse)
DESCRIPTION to position D or N, the camera image A superimposed central broken line
171) will continue to be displayed for 10 indicates the centre of the car to
51) seconds if the dedicated function in the facilitate parking manoeuvres. The
The camera is located on the boot Uconnect™ system settings is active various coloured areas indicate the
tailgate fig. 177. (see "Settings" in the"Vehicle mode" distance from the rear of the car.
paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). The table below shows the
The image will cease to be displayed approximate distances for each area
before 10 seconds have elapsed if any fig. 178:
of the following conditions occur:  
car speed is higher than 13 km/h;
Distance from
transmission in the P (Park) position; Area the rear of the
ignition device in the STOP position; car
press the graphic button on the
Uconnect™ system display, which is Red (A) 0 - 30 cm
shown on the camera image whenever
177 Yellow (B) 30 cm - 1 m
F0S1193
the transmission is not in reverse
position. Green (C) 1 m or more
Camera activation/deactivation
NOTE The displayed image may look a
Every time reverse is engaged, the Messages on the display
bit distorted.
display fig. 178 shows the area around
If the tailgate is raised, the camera will
the car, as seen by the rear camera. SYMBOLS AND
not detect any obstacle in the area
MESSAGES ON THE
behind the car. A dedicated warning
DISPLAY
message will appear on the display.
Indications on the display
Closing the door will restore proper
Guideline display can be activated
camera operation and the warning
by acting on the settings of the
message on the display will disappear.
Uconnect™ system (see "Settings" in
the"Vehicle mode" paragraph in the IMPORTANT NOTES
"Multimedia" section). WARNING In some circumstances,
If activated, the grid is positioned on such as with ice, snow or mud on the
the image to highlight the width of the
178 F0S1274

175
 surface of the camera, the camera DRIVING TIPS
STARTING AND DRIVING
his/her attention to lapse during potentially
sensitivity may be reduced. dangerous manoeuvres, even those
executed at low speeds. Always keep a ENERGY CONSUMPTION
slow speed, so as to promptly brake in the REDUCTION
WARNING In some special case of obstacles. Below are some useful tips that allow
circumstances (e.g. after long periods
you to achieve a reduction in energy
of inactivity or after disconnecting
IMPORTANT consumption of the high-voltage
and reconnecting the battery), when
battery and a consequent increase in
activating the rear camera during
51) It is vital, for correct operation, that the
range.
Uconnect™ system initialisation, the
guidelines and warning messages may camera is always kept clean and free from Car maintenance
any mud, dirt, snow or ice. Be careful not
not be displayed correctly; at the end to scratch or damage the camera while Checks and operations should be
of this phase, they will be automatically cleaning it. Avoid using dry, rough or hard carried out in accordance with
restored. cloths. The camera must be washed using the "Service Schedule" (see the
clean water, with the addition of vehicle "Maintenance and care" chapter).
shampoo if necessary. In washing stations
WARNING If the tailgate is to be re- which use steam or high-pressure jets, Tires
painted following to repairs, make sure clean the camera quickly, keeping the Check the tyre pressures at least once
the paint does not get in contact with nozzle more than 10 cm away from the every four weeks: if the pressure is too
the camera. sensors. Also, do not apply stickers to the
camera. low, electrical energy consumption
levels increase as resistance to rolling is
WARNING When parking, take the higher.
utmost care over obstacles that may Unnecessary loads
be above or under the operating range
Do not travel with an overloaded
of the camera.
luggage compartment. The weight
of the car and its trim greatly affect
electrical energy consumption and
WARNING stability.

171) Parking and other potentially Roof rack/ski rack

dangerous manoeuvres are, however, Remove the roof rack or the ski rack
always the driver’s responsibility. While from the roof when they are not used.
carrying out these manoeuvres, always These accessories lower aerodynamic
make sure that no people (especially
children) or animals are in the area
penetration and adversely affect
concerned. The camera is an aid for the electrical energy consumption levels.
driver, but the driver must never allow

176
Electric devices the road surface. This is the well-known 52) 53) 54) 55) 56)

Use electrical devices only for the aquaplaning phenomenon that can
make the possibility of controlling DRIVING STYLE
amount of time needed. The heated
and stopping the car almost null and Top speed
rear window, windscreen wipers and
heater fan require a considerable void. To reduce this risk, observe the Energy consumption considerably
amount of energy; increasing the following precautions: increases as speed increases.
current uptake increases electrical Reduce speed during thunderstorms Maintain a constant speed, avoiding
energy consumption. or on slippery roads. unnecessary braking and acceleration,
Reduce speed when there is which cost in terms of electrical energy
Climate control system consumption and emissions.
standing water or puddles on the road.
Using the climate control system will
Replace the tyres when the tread Acceleration
increase electrical energy consumption:
wear indicators begin to become Accelerating violently will greatly affect
use standard ventilation when the
visible. electrical energy consumption and
temperature outside permits.
Make sure the tyres are inflated emissions. Acceleration should be
Devices for aerodynamic control correctly. gradual.
The use of non-certified devices for Maintain sufficient distance between
CONDITIONS OF USE
aerodynamic control may adversely your car and the car in front to avoid
affect air drag and electrical energy accidents in the event of a sudden Traffic and road conditions
consumption levels. stop. Heavy traffic with fast acceleration
causes high electrical energy
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY CROSSING FLOODED consumption. Winding mountain roads
ROADS STRETCHES OF ROAD and rough road surfaces also adversely
Acceleration Driving on flooded roads with water affect consumption.
Abrupt acceleration on a snow- more than a few inches/centimetres
deep will require extra caution to TRANSPORTING
covered, wet or otherwise slippery road
ensure safety and prevent damage to PASSENGERS
surface can cause the drive wheels to
shift uncontrollably to the right or left. your car. Warnings
This phenomenon occurs due to the WARNING It is extremely dangerous
Water moving, rising to leave children in a parked car
different grip of the front drive wheels
on the road surface.
173) when the temperature outside is very
Stagnant shallow water high. The heat inside the passenger
172)
Although the car can cross flooded compartment may have serious, or
Traction stretches of road with shallow water even fatal, consequences.
On wet or slippery roads, a liquid film depth, note the following warnings and
may be formed between the tyre and cautions before doing so.

177
 WARNING Never travel in the internal CHARGING
STARTING AND DRIVING
or death to the driver, passengers and any
load compartment. In the event of an passers-by.
accident, anyone inside the boot would 174)

be at greater risk of serious or even 57) 58) 59) 60) 61) 62) 63) 64) 65)
IMPORTANT
fatal injury. Before charging the high voltage
battery, it is recommended to turn the
52) Always check the depth of the flooded
WARNING Ensure that all the section before crossing it. Never cross
ignition device to STOP in order to
occupants of the car wear their seat stretches where the water depth exceeds obtain a charge until full in the shortest
belts correctly and that any children are the lower part of the wheels of the car. period possible.
positioned correctly on the dedicated 53) Check the condition of the flooded
road surface and any obstacles on the
child restraint systems. route before fording the flooded section. WARNING The brake calliper lock
54) Do not exceed a speed of 8 km/h is activated during the charging
TRANSPORTING while crossing in order to minimise the procedure: unlocking will be carried out
ANIMALS effect of water displacement. automatically at the end of the charging
55) Crossing flooded sections can procedure.
Comply with the regulations on damage transmission components.
transportation of animals of the country After crossing a flooded section, always
you are driving in. check the car fluids (i.e. transmission CHARGING PORT ON
fluid, coolant, etc.) for any traces of THE CAR
contamination (i.e. any milky or foamy
appearance of the fluid). Stop driving
WARNING the car in the presence of apparently
contaminated liquids to avoid further
172) Rapid acceleration on slippery damage. This damage is not covered by
surfaces is dangerous. Uneven grip can the new car warranty.
cause sudden deviations of the front 56) Crossing of flooded sections also
wheels. You could lose control of the car limits braking capacity, resulting in longer
and crash. Accelerate slowly and carefully braking distances. Therefore, after
in all situations of poor grip (ice, snow, crossing, drive slowly and repeated but
wet, mud, scattered sand, etc.). delicately press the brake pedal so that the
173) Do not cross roads or flooded routes braking surfaces dry out progressively.
with moving and/or rising water (as can 179 F0S1052

happen during a heavy storm). Moving

water can deteriorate the road surface and To access the charging port, open the
cause the car to become bogged down. charging flap fig. 179 by pressing on
In addition, moving or rising waters can the area indicated by the arrow.
drag the car quickly. Failure to comply with
these warnings may result in serious injury

178
Charging port LED Symbol labels
Next to the charging port there are
A On the inside of the charging socket
some LEDs (A) fig. 180 that indicate flap there are labels with the following
the charging status by means of four warnings and indications that must be
different colours and related flashing checked and observed when charging
types: B the high-voltage battery.
Blue: to indicate that the system is On the label, fig. 182, there are the
waiting for a scheduled charging. following symbols:
Green flashing ("Flashing"): during  
the charging process: 180 F0S1367
indicates a risk of
one flashing green LED electric shock.
indicates that charging is in WARNING Use only the charging cable
progress; supplied with your car: refer to the label indicates a general
all 5 green LEDs flashing: on the control unit, which indicates the dangerous situation.
charging process initialisation; "Country Group" (A) fig. 181 and the indicates to refer
Steady green: to indicate that the electrical current intensity (Ampere) (B) to the descriptions
charging process is complete. and the table "Mode 2" Cable Variants and figures in this
Red blinking: : to indicate a fault in the "Power sources that can be supplement.
in the charging system or when there used" chapter) or a replacement cable
is a fault in the charging procedure recommended by FCA. indicates that a
(e.g. when the charging connector is charging timer has
connected to the charging port located been set.
EU-GEN4.1-CHARGECORD F235
on the car and the cable has not been 35344729 COUNTRY GROUP 1
A
previously connected to the power 46345793
13A /
50 Hz 230VAC PLEASE READ MANUAL BEFORE USE

i i
socket).
LNSE SINGLE PHASE
RCD:b
MOPAR

indicates that the

n AC 30mA
004634579300F2350000119182
n DC 6mA
LR67E346031
- ICCB
i
PE
FUNCTIONAL
SAFETY charging procedure
EU-GEN4.1-CHARGECORD F235
is in progress.
UL
WARNING If all the LEDs are off after
R

EU 35344729 COUNTRY GROUP 1

46345793

connecting the charging connector to

IC-CPD 13A / 230VAC
LNSE SINGLE PHASE
25 004634579300F2350000119182

the charging port on the car, a problem E346031

may have occurred during the process. B indicates that the

In this case it is advisable to press charging procedure
181 F0S1055 is complete.
button (B) in fig. 180 and disconnect
the charging connector and reconnect
it.

179
 STARTING AND DRIVING
indicates that there is
a fault in the charging
procedure.

182 F0S1275

On the label, fig. 183, there are the

following symbols:
  183 F0S1276 184 F0S0718

indicates to refer to the

descriptions and figures in The plate at fig. 184 reminds you to (1) first connect the charging cable to
this supplement. refer to this Owner Handbook for the public AC station;
charging from public AC mains and the (2) disconnect the cable from the
indicates to not use correct order of connection of the charging port of the car.
extension cables and/or charging cable:
adapters to carry out the
charging procedure.

indicates that water should

not come into contact with
the charging port on the
car.

180
Power sources for
electric charging.
Identification of
vehicle compatibility.
Graphic symbol for
consumer information
in accordance with
EN17186:2019.
The symbols shown below make
it easier to recognise the correct
185 186
power source type to use when F1A0717 F1A0725

charging your car.

AC (alternating current) charging in the AC (alternating current) charging at a
Before charging, check the symbol home or at a charging station (≤ 480 V charging station (≤ 480 V RMS).
(where provided) inside the charging RMS).
port flap and compare it with the Symbol on the cable charging
symbol on the charging cable (where Symbol on the cable charging connector (car side) for the Mode 4
provided). connector (charging station side) cable and on the charging port flap
for the Mode 3 cable and on the
Symbols for electrically powered charging station
vehicles:
Before charging, check the symbol
Symbol on the cable charging
(where provided) on the charging cable
connector (car side) for Mode 2 and
and compare it with the symbol on the
Mode 3 cables and on the charging
charging cable (where provided).
port flap

187 F1A0718

DC (direct current) charging at a

charging station (50–500 V).

181
 NOTE The car is able to automatically

STARTING AND DRIVING

at or near zero. The high-voltage battery
WARNING may be damaged. recognise the maximum allowable
63) You do not need to wait until the high- current intensity depending on the type
174) In order to reduce the risk of electric voltage battery level is low to recharge. of domestic socket/public charging
shock or damage to the device, special The performance of the high-voltage
care should be taken when cleaning: battery is optimal when it is charged
stations used and the regulations in
ALWAYS unplug the device from the regularly. force in the country in which you are
domestic power supply socket and car 64) Charging the high-voltage battery may located (e.g. overloads). Reduce the
ports. take longer if the temperature of the high- maximum charging current required
voltage battery is high or low. by using the "Charging settings"
65) During charging, especially with fast item on the Uconnect™ system
IMPORTANT charging, high-voltage battery cooling
components may be voltage activated. display (for more information, refer
57) Do not charge if the external Therefore, it is normal to hear noises to the "Uconnect™" chapter in the
temperature is -30°C or lower, as charging during this operation. "Multimedia" section). Before charging
is likely to take longer and the charging in your own home, or elsewhere, check
device may be damaged. the allowable current intensity by
58) Do not leave the car or the charging POWER SOURCES contacting a specialized technician:
cable in areas where the external THAT CAN BE USED it is advisable to contact the Fiat
temperature is below -40°C as they may
be damaged. 175) 176) 177) 178) 179) 180) 181) 182) 183) 184) 185)
Dealership. In case of problems (e.g.
59) In cold temperatures, the charging 186) 187) 188) 189) 190) 191) 192) 193) 194) 195) 196) 197)
current overloads) reduce the charge
cable may become stiff. Therefore, be 198) 199) 200) 201)
level.
careful not to apply excessive force to the
charging cable as it may be damaged. GENERAL INFORMATION TYPES OF CHARGING
60) Do not use personal generators to The high-voltage battery of the car CABLES
charge the high-voltage battery. This may Three different types of cables can be
cause fluctuations in charging and the can be charged using special charging
cables: used for charging:
voltage may be insufficient, resulting in
damage to the car system. the connection of the charging port "Mode 2" (A) fig. 188 cable
61) Charging the high-voltage battery located on the rear right side of the car (standard): allows charging from an
using incorrect or damaged sockets, or to the charging ports in public charging earthed domestic power socket. This
charging cables and not following the type of socket is used for charging with
prescribed charging procedures may stations;
alternating current. The "Mode 2"
cause short circuits, fire and potential risk or
of damage to the electrical system of the charging cable complies with IEC
to the domestic socket.
car. 61851, IEC 62752 and SAE J1772
The charging procedure control standards.
62) Avoid leaving the high-voltage battery
for several days with the charge indicator and monitoring takes place in a fully
automatic way.

182
 "Mode 3" (B) fig. 189 cable
(optional): allows charging from a public C
charging station and a domestic AC
(alternating current) charging station
(wallbox charging station). The charging
speed may be faster than charging
through a domestic power socket.
""Mode 4" – Fast Charge (C)
fig. 190Charging cable: this allows
charging from public charging sockets 191 F0S1277
190 F0S1120
marked as DC (direct current).
"MODE 2" CHARGING
A WARNING
CABLE
The car is equipped with a "Mode 2"
230 Volt AC charging cable (A) fig. 191 175) Always stop the electric motor by
located inside a special bag under the moving the ignition device to the STOP
position before charging the high-voltage
boot floor. The cable consists of: battery. Even with the engine switched
specific charging connector (B) for off, the cooling fan inside the engine
connection to the car; compartment can start automatically
a charge status control unit (C) during charging. Do not approach the
equipped with LEDs, able to provide cooling fan while charging.
188 F0S1058
176) The safety and suitability of the
indications on any anomalies present domestic system for charging through the
during the charging phase; domestic mains are primary and are under
B a plug (D) to connect to the domestic the Customer’s responsibility.
power socket. 177) Do not connect the charging cable
NOTE After use, remember to correctly connector if there is dust and/or water on
the charging port. Making the connection
replace the protective cover (where in the presence of water or dust on the
provided) on the specific charging connector cable and the plug may cause
connector (B) to prevent moisture a fire or electric shock. Use of worn-out
and/or dust from getting inside. electrical sockets may result in fire and
injury.
178) If you use electrical medical devices
189 F0S1059 (e.g., cardiac pacemakers), make sure in
advance that charging the high-voltage
battery does not affect the operation

183
 STARTING AND DRIVING
of these devices. In some cases, 187) Do not charge when the connector 196) Do not use the charging cable if it has
electromagnetic waves generated by the and charging plug are wet. damaged parts.
charger may affect the operation of such 188) Do not charge in adverse weather 197) Never disconnect the charging cable
medical devices. conditions (e.g. during thunderstorms) at from the domestic power socket or public
179) Stop the charge immediately if you charging stations. charging station during charging. Always
notice any abnormal symptoms (e.g. smell, 189) Always keep charging connector interrupt charging, then disconnect the
smoke, etc.). and charging plug clean and dry. Take cable, first from the car-side charging port
180) Replace the charging cable if the care to keep the charging cable away from and then from the domestic socket or
cable jacket is damaged to prevent risk of water or moisture. Do not use chemicals public charging station.
electrocution. or solvents. 198) Never use a visibly worn or damaged
181) When connecting or removing the 190) Be sure to use the designated electrical socket. It could cause fire or
charging cable, be sure to grasp the charging cable to charge the car. Using serious damage.
handle of the charging connector and the any other charger may cause personal 199) The high-voltage battery should only
charging plug. If you pull the cable directly injury or damage to the car. be charged with the maximum allowable
(without using the handle) the internal 191) How to use the charging cables. current or other lower current specified in
conductors may disconnect or damage: Treat the charging cable with care: avoid local and national recommendations for
this may cause a shock or fire. folding and/or bending it on sharp charging high-voltage batteries.
182) The charging cable is a high-voltage surfaces. After using the charging cable, 200) The device is to be used exclusively
conductor. Contact with high-voltage can replace the protective covers (if present) for charging the car.
cause serious personal injury or death. on both sides of the cable correctly. Avoid 201) Never attempt to make a repair
Similarly, do not touch the orange high- prolonged exposure of the charging cable and/or perform maintenance on the
voltage cables. to sunlight. Avoid dropping the charging charge cables, this may result in serious
183) It is strictly forbidden to use any plug cable from above: violent shocks could personal injury or even death. Always go to
adapter or similar devices when charging. damage the cable. Do not immerse the a Fiat Dealership.
Never use the charging cable together with charging cables in liquids.
an extension cable. 192) Take care not to drop the charging
184) Never connect the charging cable connector. The charging connector could
to an extension cable or multiple socket. be damaged.
Multiple sockets, extension cables, 193) Do not leave children unattended in
overvoltage protection or similar units the vicinity of the charging cable when it is
cannot be used together with the charging connected.
cable as they may present a risk of fire, 194) Position the charging cable in such a
electrocution, etc. way that it is not crushed by other cars,
185) The charging cable supplied as trampled on by people, or positioned in
standard is watertight and is guaranteed way that people in the vicinity of the car
by the Manufacturer: do not use other may stumble, resulting in damage or
cables not supplied by FCA. personal injury.
186) Be sure not to touch the charging 195) Disconnect the charging cable from
connector and charging plug with wet the domestic socket or charging station or
hands. wallbox charging station before cleaning it.

184
"Mode 2" cable variants table
The following table shows the list of the specific cable types and the amperages allowed for each country where the car is sold.
This amperage is the limit allowed when the charging power is set to the highest level.
 
Electric vehicle
Electric current Type of domestic Cable length
Country group (*) charging Notes
intensity (Ampere) power socket (**) (metres)
connector type

1 13 CEE 7/7 –

2 10 G –

3 8 CEE 7/7 –
Type 2 6
4 8 J –

5 6 K –

Specific cable for

6 10 CEE 7/7
Norway market
(*) The Country Group is indicated by the message "COUNTRY GROUP" on the label fig. 181located on the rear of the control
unit.
(**) Refer to the following pages for the type of power socket/plug.
NOTE To check the maximum electric current (Ampere) that can be consumed, refer to the label located on the back of the
control unit (see what is described and illustrated in the "charge status control unit" chapter).

185
 Country group table for "Mode 2" cable

STARTING AND DRIVING

The following table shows the list of countries contained in each "Country Group" associated with the "Mode 2" cable.
Refer to the images on the following page for more details.
 
Country Group Country

Albania

Austria

Belgium

Bulgaria

Croatia

Czech Republic

Estonia

Germany

1 Greece

Hungary

Iceland

Latvia

Lithuania

Luxembourg

Macedonia

Morocco

Netherlands

186
Country Group Country

Poland

Portugal

Romania

Serbia

Slovakia

1 Slovenia

Spain

Sweden

Italy

Ukraine

Turkey

Cyprus

Gibraltar
2
Malta

United Kingdom, Ireland

France

Finland
3
Guadeloupe

French Guiana

187
 STARTING AND DRIVING
Country Group Country

Martinique
3
Reunion

Liechtenstein
4
Switzerland

5 Denmark

6 Norway
NOTE For more information on the type of socket in use in the various countries, refer to the following website:
https://www.iec.ch/worldplugs/list_bylocation.htm.

188
 CEE 7/7 J

G K

192 F0S1203

189
 CHARGE STATUS

STARTING AND DRIVING

this symbol indicates
CONTROL UNIT a general dangerous
202) 203) situation.
Signal LED
A This symbol shows the
There are three LEDs on the front of
minimum operating
the charge status control unit: B temperature of the charge
GREEN LED on (A) fig. 193: status control unit in
indicates correct operation in the C accordance with IEC
domestic power distribution system: it 61851 and IEC 62752
is therefore possible to proceed with certification.
the high-voltage battery charging. NOTE FCA guarantees
RED LED on (B): indicates a fault in that the device has been
tested for use from -40°C
the charging system.
to +50°C. If the device
YELLOW LED on (C): indicates a is not used and must be
possible failure in the domestic power stored, the temperature
distribution system. must be between -40°C
and +80°C. Exceeding
WARNING Never carry out any repair these temperature values
may damage the device.
work on your own: always contact the 193 F0S1062
Fiat Dealership. The presence of this
For the type of failure, refer to the symbol on the label
description under "Charging system indicates that the specific
"Mode 2" charge
failure" on the following pages.
cable cannot be used
Symbol label for domestic power
On the back of the charge status distribution networks
control unit there is a summary label, where the earthing cable is
fig. 194, which shows some symbols. not present. For specific
The main ones are listed below: markets, without the
  grounding cable, check for
"COUNTRY GROUP" on
This symbol indicates a the label of the charging
risk of electric shock. cable.

190
 The presence of this WARNING
symbol on the label
indicates that the charge
202) The device is to be used exclusively
status control unit does
for charging the car.
not have the function of
203) Never attempt to make a repair
disconnecting the earthing and/or perform maintenance on the
cable. charge cables, this may result in serious
personal injury or even death. Always go to
The symbol indicates that a Fiat Dealership.
the charging unit should
not be placed in the waste
if it no longer works:
for disposal refer to the
environmental regulations
in force in the country in
which it circulates.

The symbol prompts you

to read the instructions in
this publication carefully
before using the charging
cable.

194 F0S1204

191
 CHARGING SYSTEM FAILURE

STARTING AND DRIVING

Any faults during charging are displayed by the LEDs, either steady or flashing, located on the front of the charge status control
unit.
Refer to the table below.
 
YELLOW
GREEN LED RED LED Description Action/Consequence
LED

Charging cable not connected to

the domestic charging port or
1 OFF OFF OFF
power failure in the domestic
power supply mains

There are no faults in the

domestic power distribution
2 ON OFF OFF system, so the charging cable
can be connected to the
charging port on the car

When the normal temperature is

Overheating at the charging port
reached, the system will make a
3 ON ON (Flashing) ON of the domestic mains power
new charge attempt at a lower
supply
current level.

Charging to a lower current level

due to overheating of the
4 ON OFF ON (Flashing) charging port of the domestic
electricity distribution mains (see
point 3)

192
 YELLOW
GREEN LED RED LED Description Action/Consequence
LED

Overheating during charging at a

lower current level (see point 4)
Proceed as follows:
disconnect the charge cable
from the car and from the
domestic power socket with care
(the domestic power plug may be
Overheating at the charging port hot);
5 ON ON ON (Flashing) of the domestic mains power please wait for the domestic
supply power plug and socket to reach a
normal temperature;
reconnect the cable to the
domestic power socket and to the
car’s charge socket, then try to
charge again.
In case of a new anomaly, contact
a certified electrician

Lack of earthing cable in the The system will make a new

6 ON ON (2 blinks) ON (2 blinks) charging port of the domestic charge attempt after 30 seconds
mains power supply (6 attempts in total).

New charge attempt (see point 6)

failed.
Disconnect the charge cable from
Lack of earthing cable in the
the car and the domestic power
7 ON ON ON (2 blinks) charging port of the domestic
socket and reconnect it, then try
mains power supply
to charge again.
In case of a new anomaly, contact
a certified electrician.

193
 STARTING AND DRIVING
YELLOW
GREEN LED RED LED Description Action/Consequence
LED

The system will make a new

charge attempt after 30 seconds
(6 attempts in total).
If the fault persists, disconnect the
Domestic mains power charge cable from the car and the
8 ON (Flashing) OFF OFF
incorrectly supplied domestic power socket and
reconnect it, then try to charge
again.
In case of a new anomaly, contact
a certified electrician.

Disconnect the charge cable from

the car and the domestic power
Dispersion of electricity on the socket and reconnect it, then try
9 ON ON OFF
car to charge again.
In case of a new anomaly, contact
a Fiat Dealership.

The system will make a new

10 ON ON (flashing) OFF Electric charging current too high charge attempt after 30 seconds
(6 attempts in total).

New charge attempt (see point

10) failed.
Disconnect the charge cable from
the car and the domestic power
11 ON ON (7 blinks) OFF Electric charging current too high
socket and reconnect it, then try
to charge again.
In case of a new anomaly, contact
a Fiat Dealership.

194
 YELLOW
GREEN LED RED LED Description Action/Consequence
LED

12 ON ON (2 blinks) OFF Charge anomaly on the car The system will make a new
charge attempt after 30 seconds
13 ON ON (3 blinks) OFF (6 attempts in total).
If the fault persists, disconnect the
charging cable from the car and
14 ON ON (4 blinks) OFF
the home power port and
Charging cable failure reconnect it, then try charging
15 ON ON (5 blinks) OFF again.
In case of a new anomaly, contact
16 ON ON (6 blinks) OFF a Fiat Dealership.
Key
ON = LED on
OFF = LED off
BLINK = 0.5 seconds ON / 0.5 seconds OFF / 3 seconds pause
FLASHING = 0.5 seconds ON / 0.5 seconds OFF

195
 CHARGING SYSTEM/ however, some factors (e.g., NOTE After use, remember to replace

STARTING AND DRIVING

MAINTENANCE/CLEANING high-intensity radio signals or radio the protective covers on both sides of
The device is maintenance-free. transmitters in the vicinity of the device) the charging cable correctly to prevent
If you need to clean the device, use a may cause it to malfunction. If you find moisture and/or dust from entering the
soft cloth slightly dampened with a mild an anomaly in the operation of the cable charging socket connections.
detergent solution, then wipe dry with a device, contact the Fiat Dealership.
dry cloth. Do not use abrasive products
or flammable substances (e.g. alcohol, WARNING Modifications and/or repairs
petrol or their derivatives). Do not wash made incorrectly and NOT carried out
the device with water, hazard of fire or by the Fiat Dealership will invalidate the
electric shock with the risk of serious Warranty and the above requirements.
injury or death.
"MODE 3" CHARGING
WARNING Only clean the device CABLE
when it is DISCONNECTED from both (optional) 195 F0S1064

the domestic charging port and the The car can be equipped with a
charging port located on the car. "Mode 3" charging cable fig. 195, "MODE 4" CHARGING
located inside a special bag under the CABLE - FAST CHARGE
FCC (Federal boot floor. This can be used to charge from DC
Communications (direct current) public charging sockets.
The "Mode 3" charging cable:
Commission) The charging cable is connected to the
complies with EN 61851- 1, EN
SPECIFICATIONS charging station.
62196- 1 and EN 62196- 2 standards;
The charge status control unit complies can be used for a minimum The charging procedure can be faster
with Section 15 of the FCC Regulation. temperature of -40°C up to a maximum than with AC charging stations.
The use of the device meets the temperature of +50°C.
following two requirements: This type of cable allows you to
1. This device does not cause harmful connect to public alternating current
interference. (AC) charging stations. The charging
2. Correct operation of the device may speed may be faster than charging
be affected by interference from nearby through a domestic power socket.
electrical/electronic devices. Using this type of cable it is possible to
This device is designed to withstand charge the car with a current of up to
radio frequency interference (RFI), 16A.

196
 park the car safely (transmission in
C position "P" - Park);
push the ignition device in the STOP
position.
engage the electric park brake;
take the kit located in the boot;
remove any dust that may have
accumulated on the charging
connector and charging socket;
unroll the charging cable and 198 F0S1052
196 F0S1120
connect it to an AC charging port,
fig. 197; remove the protective cover of the
ALTERNATING
charging port and attach it to the
CURRENT (AC) device;
CHARGING AT grasp the charging connector by
HOME the handle (A) fig. 199, remove the
protective cover (where provided) and
204) 205) 206) 207) 208) 209) 210) 211) 212)
insert it into the charging port until you
66) 67) 68) 69) 70) 71) 72) 73) 74)
hear the click indicating that it has been
CHARGING PROCEDURE locked;
WARNING Always connect the
cable to the charging socket of the 197 F0S1051

domestic mains first and only then

to the vehicle. NOTE From the moment the plug is
The high-voltage battery of the system connected to the domestic mains
is charged by connecting the "Mode 2" charging port, the 3 LEDs on the
charging cable, supplied with the car, control unit of the cable will flash
to an AC charging port. for approx. 6 seconds (control unit
switching on phase);
For the characteristics of the "Mode 2"
cable, refer to the "Power sources that open the charging flap by pressing 199 F0S1309

can be used - Mode 2 cable" chapter. on the area indicated by the arrow;
To charge, proceed as follows: if no scheduled charging has been
set (see the "Charging functions"
chapter), charging starts automatically;

197
 check by turning on the LEDs on the depends on the type of contract signed

STARTING AND DRIVING

cable control unit that there are no by the user, the type of cable used and
faults in the charging system (for more the charge level set in the Uconnect™
information see "charge status control system menu.
unit" chapter in the "Power sources
that can be used - Mode 2 cable" WARNING Use only the charging cable
section). If there are no anomalies, supplied with the car or a replacement
the green LEDs located next to the cable recommended by FCA.
charging port will light up momentarily.
In case of anomalies, refer to the
WARNING The high-voltage battery 200 F0S1220
description in the "Charging system
must be charged in accordance with
failure" chapter in the "Power sources DISCONNECTING THE
the maximum amperage rating allowed
that can be used - Mode 2 cable" "MODE 2" CHARGING
by local and national recommendations
section. CABLE
for charging electric vehicles.
NOTE The charge procedure is During the charging procedure the
interrupted when opening the bonnet: cable is automatically locked on
a dedicated message will be shown END OF CHARGING
the charging socket in the car.
on the instrument panel display. The PROCEDURE
To complete the charging, proceed as
charge will be reactivated when the The charging procedure ends when all
follows:
engine lid is closed correctly. the LEDs (A) fig. 200, located next to
the charging port, will light up steady unlock the doors of the vehicle
The time required to charge the high- allowing the charging cable to unlock;
voltage battery depends on several green (during the charging phase, on
the other hand, the LEDs will light up if charging is in progress, press
factors: for more information see the button (B) fig. 200 on the charging port;
description in the “Electric” chapter of flashing/fixed green according to the
state of charge of the battery portion disconnect the cable from the car
in the “Multimedia" section. charging port by grasping the handle of
indicated by the LED. The fixed green
If the passenger compartment the charging connector and avoiding to
light indicates that the battery portion is
preconditioning is activated, the battery pull the cable directly;
fully charged).
charging time will be extended. The disconnect the cable from the
time required for heating/cooling the charging port fig. 201;
car is mainly determined by the outside
temperature.

WARNING The maximum power

consumption of the charging port

198
 on the front of the cable control unit will
WARNING turn on. Refer to the table in the "Charging
system failure" chapter in the "Power
204) The charging current level ("Level 1" sources that can be used" section.
/ "Level 2" / "Level 3", etc.) can only be 209) The "Mode 2" charge cable must be
changed using the Uconnect™ system connected to a dedicated circuit that is
display (see "Settings" in the"Vehicle not shared with other devices that absorb
mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" electrical energy.
section). The default charge level set is 210) Do not insert fingers or objects in the
"Level 3". For countries in which the 13A cable charging connector.
"Mode 2" charge cable can be used, 211) The high-voltage battery must only
201 F0S1053 if the domestic power socket IS NOT be charged through approved, earthed
CERTIFIED, it is recommended to set domestic sockets or from a public
replace the protective cover of the "Level 4" charge to the maximum, which charging station using the charging cable
charging socket; corresponds to approx. 10A. For the list of supplied separately as an option by FCA (”
country-specific cable types refer to what Mode 3“ charging cable).
close the charging flap, making sure is indicated in the "Mode 2 cable variant 212) Keep the charging flap closed when
it locks properly; table". the charging port is not in use.
roll up the charging cable correctly, 205) The set level applies indifferently to
repositioning the protective cover both AC home charging (Mode 2) and
correctly on the charging connector charging from an AC public charging IMPORTANT
station (Mode 3). It is therefore always
(where provided). When rolling up,
advisable to check that the level is set as
take care not to damage the cable. desired for the actual charging type that is 66) Do not charge if the external
Then place the cable, together with the about to be carried out. temperature is -30°C or lower, as charging
is likely to take longer and the charging
charging kit, inside the housing located 206) Incorrect setting of the charge current
device may be damaged.
inside the boot. intensity can overload or overheat the
mains power supply of the domestic 67) Do not leave the car or the charging
power socket. Fire hazard. Before charging cable in areas where the external
WARNING Before disconnecting the from other domestic sockets, adjust the temperature is below -40°C as they may
charge current intensity to the mains. If be damaged.
charging connector, make sure that
you do not know the mains, set to the 68) In cold temperatures, the charging
the doors are unlocked. If the door is cable may become stiff. Therefore, be
lowest level. Never use extension cords for
locked, the charging connector locking charging. careful not to apply excessive force to the
system does not allow disconnection. 207) Incorrect connection between charging cable as it may be damaged.
connector and charging terminals 69) Do not use personal generators to
constitutes a fire hazard! charge the high-voltage battery. This may
208) During normal operation, the cause fluctuations in charging and the
domestic power socket can overheat. In voltage may be insufficient, resulting in
the case of extreme overheating, the damage to the car system.
charge is interrupted and the warning LED

199
 QUICK DOMESTIC
STARTING AND DRIVING
70) Charging the high-voltage battery
using incorrect or damaged sockets, or CHARGING
charging cables and not following the
prescribed charging procedures may PROCEDURE FROM
cause short circuits, fire and potential risk THE WALLBOX
of damage to the electrical system of the
car. CHARGING STATION
71) Avoid leaving the battery for several
WARNING The wallbox charging
days with the charge indicator at or near
zero. The high-voltage battery may be station domestic charging station must
damaged. be installed by qualified personnel
72) You do not need to wait until the after checking the domestic electrical 202 F0S1271

battery level is low to recharge. The system. For information on available

performance of the battery is optimal when wallbox charging stations, contact a NOTE The wallbox charging station
it is charged regularly. configuration may vary depending on
73) Charging the high-voltage battery may Fiat Dealership.
the country where the car is sold.
take longer if the temperature of the high-
voltage battery is high or low. NOTE The electrical system of the
The high-voltage battery of the car can
74) During charging, especially with fast house must be checked regularly by
be charged by directly connecting the
charging, battery cooling components may qualified personnel.
be activated. Therefore, it is normal to hear charging cable on the wallbox charging
The maximum charging current value
noises during this operation. station or using the "Mode 3" cable
is automatically set by the device,
(optional).
depending on the building's electrical
For the characteristics of the "Mode 3"
system.
cable, refer to the "Power sources that
For the charging procedure, refer to the
can be used - Mode 3 cable" chapter.
"Alternating current (AC) charging at
Charging with wallbox charging station,
home" chapter.
fig. 202, allows to reach, from a
domestic user, a higher charge power
than the charge achieved using a
domestic socket: the charging time,
as a consequence, is significantly
reduced.

200
CHARGING
PROCEDURE FROM
PUBLIC CHARGING
STATION (AC)
213) 214) 215)

The high-voltage battery of the car can

be charged by directly connecting the
charging cable of the public charging
stations or using the "Mode 3" cable 203 F0S1207 205 F0S1052

(optional).
For the characteristics of the "Mode 3" remove the protective cover of the
cable, refer to the "Power sources that charging port and attach it to the
can be used - Mode 3 cable" chapter. device;
To charge, proceed as follows: grasp the charging cable, remove the
protective covers on both sides of the
park the car safely (transmission in
cable (where provided). Hold the first
position "P" - Park);
engage the electric park brake; charging connector and insert it into
push the ignition device in the STOP the charging port on the car until you
position. hear a click indicating that it is locked;
pull out the charging cable (optional) charging starts automatically if there
204 F0S1054
fig. 203 (where provided) in the boot is no programming on the Uconnect™
(inside a special bag); open the charging flap fig. 205 by system (see chapter "Charging
remove any dust that may have pressing on the area indicated by the functions"). If necessary, the public
accumulated on the charging arrow; charging station must be enabled;
connector and charging socket; follow the manufacturer's instructions
plug the charging connector into the and warnings when using the charging
socket of the public charging station, station;
fig. 204; the 5 LEDs with a steady green light
will light up momentarily to indicate the
correct insertion of the plug;
during charging, the LEDs will light
on with green flashing/green steady
light depending on the state of charge

201
 of the battery portion indicated by the state of charge of the battery portion replace the protective cover of the

STARTING AND DRIVING

LED. The fixed green light indicates that indicated by the LED. The fixed green charging socket;
the battery portion is fully charged. light indicates that the battery portion is close the charging flap, making sure
NOTE The charge procedure is fully charged). it locks properly;
interrupted when opening the bonnet: roll up the charging cable correctly,
a dedicated message will be shown repositioning the protective covers on
on the instrument panel display. The both sides of the cable correctly (take
charge will be reactivated when the care not to damage the cable when
engine lid is closed correctly. rolling it up). Then place the cable and
NOTE In some countries the "Mode 3" case inside the boot.
cable is not available.

WARNING Always connect the WARNING

connector first to the socket on the 206 F0S1220
public charging station and then to the 213) The charging current level ("Level 1"
car. DISCONNECTING THE / "Level 2" / "Level 3", etc.) can only be
changed using the Uconnect™ system
"MODE 3" CHARGING display (see "Settings" in the"Vehicle
WARNING Before leaving the car, it is CABLE mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia"
advisable to lock the doors by pressing To complete the charging, proceed as section). The default charge level set is
follows: "Level 3". The set level applies indifferently
the button on the key. If it is not to both AC home charging (Mode 2) and
possible to lock the doors by pressing unlock the doors of the vehicle
charging from an AC public charging
the button on the key, lock the allowing the charging cable to unlock; station (Mode 3). It is therefore always
doors by pressing the button on the if charging is in progress, press advisable to check that the level is set as
button (B) fig. 206; desired for the actual charging type that is
driver's side door handle. about to be carried out.
disconnect the cable from the
charging port of the car and put the 214) The high-voltage battery must only
END OF CHARGING be charged through approved, earthed
protective cover (where provided) back domestic sockets or from a public
PROCEDURE on the connector; charging station using the charging cable
The charging procedure ends when all unplug the cable from the charging supplied separately as an option by FCA (”
the LEDs (A) fig. 206, located next to port on the public charging station Mode 3“ charging cable).
the charging port, will light up steady and put the protective cover (where 215) Keep the charging flap closed when
green (during the charging phase, on the charging port is not in use.
provided) back correctly on the two-
the other hand, the LEDs will light up colour connector;
flashing/fixed green according to the

202
CHARGING FROM the charging port, will light up steady
PUBLIC CHARGING green (during the charging phase, on
the other hand, the LEDs will light up
STATION (DC) flashing/fixed green according to the
PROCEDURE - state of charge of the battery portion
MODE 4 indicated by the LED. The fixed green
light indicates that the battery portion is
75) 76) 77) 78) 79) 80)
fully charged).
The high-voltage battery of the car can
be charged by directly connecting the
207
charging cable of DC (direct current) F0S1052

public charging stations.

remove the protective cover of the
To charge, proceed as follows:
charging port and attach it to the
park the car safely (transmission in device;
position "P" - Park); grasp the charging cable, hold the
engage the electric parking brake; first charging connector and insert it
turn the ignition device to the STOP into the charging port on the car until
position; you hear a click indicating that it is 208
take the charging cable from the F0S1220
locked;
charging station; the 5 LEDs with a steady green light DISCONNECTING THE
remove any dust that may have
will light up momentarily to indicate the "MODE 4" CHARGING
accumulated on the charging
correct insertion of the plug; CABLE
connector and charging port; lock the doors by pressing the button To complete the charging, proceed as
open the charging flap fig. 207 by
on the key; follows:
pressing on the area indicated by the charging starts automatically.
arrow; unlock the doors of the car allowing
If necessary, the public charging the charging cable to unlock;
station must be enabled; follow the if charging is in progress, press
manufacturer's instructions and button (B) fig. 208 on the charging port;
warnings when using the charging disconnect the cable from the
station. charging port of the car and put the
END OF CHARGING protective cover (where provided) back
PROCEDURE on the connector;
The charging procedure ends when all
the LEDs (A) fig. 208, located next to

203
 put the cable on the public charging NOTE To restore correct operation of

STARTING AND DRIVING

charging speed is necessary to preserve
station; the battery. the system, contact the Fiat Dealership.
replace the protective cover of the
charging port;
close the charging flap, making sure CHARGE CABLE
it locks properly. EMERGENCY
UNLOCK
If the charging cable does not unlock at
IMPORTANT the end of the charging procedure, you
can unlock it manually.
75) Using "Fast Charge - Mode 4" can
If, after closing and opening the doors
accelerate the battery degradation
process. by pressing the relevant buttons 209 F0S1208

76) If fast charging is not required, / located on the key and after
standard (AC) charging is always having pressed the button near the CHARGING
preferred. This maximises battery life by charging port, it is still not possible to FUNCTIONS
ensuring the best performance of the car
over time.
remove the charge cable from the CHARGING SCHEDULE
77) The charging times in "Fast Charge - socket on the car, it is possible to
Two charging modes are available:
Mode 4" are referred to up to 80% of the act manually by operating a special
immediate and scheduled.
state of charge of the high-voltage battery emergency unlocking device located
in standard environmental conditions The two charging modes can be
on the right side of the boot and
(25°C). selected in two ways:
performing the operations described
78) Charging times in extreme weather via the dedicated smartphone app
conditions can increase by as much as below:
acting inside the boot, remove the (refer to the chapter "Connected
several minutes due to the intervention
of the high-voltage battery management cap (A) fig. 209; Services - Uconnect Services" in the
system, which ensures optimal regulation pull the release cord (B) fig. 209 to "Multimedia" section) (where provided)
of the battery temperature to prevent manually unlock the actuator of the by means of the Uconnect™
possible damage. system.
79) The charging speed slows down when charging port;
disconnect the charging cable; The page available on the Uconnect™
the state of charge of the high-voltage
battery exceeds 80%. check that the release cord is system can be used to set charging
80) The battery charging time can increase correctly repositioned inside its times when the car will be charged
by a few minutes in case of very cold/hot housing, then reinsert the cap (A) via Mode 2 or Mode 3. By acting on
outside temperatures, many quick the Uconnect™ system display and
charging sessions, high frequency of use
fig. 209.
selecting the "Charging schedule"
of "Fast Charge - Mode 4" charging or
ageing of the battery. This reduction in function on the screen under the

204
"Vehicle" page (fig. 210) you can set sections. Charging will start at the
the start and end time at which the selected time.
high-voltage battery is to be charged. While the system is waiting for the
The end time of each charging interval charging interval, the LED lights up (A) B
can be set as "charge to completion", fig. 211 (located next to the charging
in which case the end time will be port) and the LEDs (B) will illuminate in
deselected. For more information, a blue light sequence. A
see "Settings" in the "Vehicle mode" When charging is in progress
paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). according to a programmed time, LED
NOTE DC recharging (Mode 4) does (A) fig. 211 and LEDs (B) will light up 211 F0S1065
not include hourly programming. green flashing/fixed depending on the
state of charge of the battery portion
indicated by the LED. The fixed green
light indicates that the battery portion is
fully charged. B
If the charging cable is inserted and
there are no selected charging times on
the Uconnect™ system, charging will
start immediately (see chapter "Using A
immediate charging").
210 F0S1194 To perform scheduled charging with 212 F0S1067

"charge to completion" option, the

USING SCHEDULED plug must be inserted within 5 minutes USING IMMEDIATE
CHARGING before the scheduled start. CHARGING
After programming and selecting the You can move on to the next When the charging cable is inserted
desired charging intervals (up to a scheduled charging interval while an and there are no charging schedules
maximum of three), plug in the charging immediate charging operation is in selected, the cable will be locked and
cable, following the charging procedure progress by unlocking the ports and the immediate charging procedure will
indicated in the "Alternating current pressing button (A) fig. 212 on the port. begin. LED (B) fig. 212 and LEDs (B)
(AC) charging at home", "Fast home fig. 211 will light up green flashing/fixed
charging procedure from wallbox WARNING the button (A) fig. 212 on depending on the state of charge of the
charging station", "Charging procedure the port remains active for 1 minute battery portion indicated by the LED.
from public charging station (AC)" after the doors are locked. The fixed green light indicates that the
battery portion is fully charged.

205
 To switch to immediate charging mode DISCONNECTING THE located next to the charging port will

STARTING AND DRIVING

during scheduled charging: CHARGING CABLE light up flashing red.
if charging is in progress, interrupt The charging cable is locked during
the scheduled charging first (see charging or when the doors are locked.
chapter "Interrupting charging"); To disconnect the charging cable,
activate immediate recharging by interrupt the charging in progress (see
pressing the button again (A) fig. 212 the "Interrupting charging" paragraph).
on the port. If no charging is in progress, first
unlock the doors using the button
Interrupting charging
on the key and then disconnect the
The charging cable is blocked when
charging cable.
charging is in progress. To interrupt the
charging process, unlock the doors COMPLETION OF 214 F0S1209

with the key and press the button (A) CHARGE

fig. 212 on the port. The charging The full charging procedure, if not "eCoasting" mode
process will be interrupted and you can interrupted, ends when all LEDs (A) (ENERGY SAVING)
disconnect the charging cable. When fig. 213 they light up with a steady
This is a mode that replaces the
immediate recharging is interrupted green light.
exhaust brake when the accelerator
and there is no charging scheduled
pedal is released, recovers energy
(see the "Charging schedule" chapter),
during the slowing down phase of the
the LEDs (B) fig. 211 will light up with a
car.
steady green light showing the current
The "eCoasting" mode is automatically
battery charge level; if there are any
activated in "NORMAL" operating
upcoming charging schedules, the
mode to maximise energy recovery
LEDs (B) fig. 211 will glow blue light
when the accelerator and brake pedals
and the LED will light up (A) fig. 211.
are released.
If a charging interval is interrupted, the Driving in "eCoasting" mode is possible
same interval can only be resumed by 213 F0S1178 if the transmission is in position "D"
disconnecting and reconnecting the (Drive).
charging cable, otherwise charging will FAILURE DURING
continue with subsequent schedule. CHARGING PROCEDURE
If a fault is detected during the charging
procedure first and last LED (A) fig. 214

206
"eBraking" ONE-PEDAL problem to the propulsion system.
MODE (HIGH- DRIVING To resume driving, press the
accelerator pedal and the electric
VOLTAGE BATTERY With One-Pedal Driving in "RANGE" parking brake will automatically release.
CHARGING) and "SHERPA" modes, the accelerator The One-Pedal Driving mode may
pedal can also be used to control shift the transmission to P if the car is
The "eBraking" mode, which is
deceleration of the car to a complete pushed after stopping or if there is a
always active regardless of the
stop. problem with the electric motor.
selected operating mode activates the
high-voltage battery charging when Quickly release the accelerator pedal to
obtain aggressive deceleration. Slowly TOWING TRAILERS
the brake pedal is pressed, thereby
recovering energy during braking. release the accelerator pedal to adjust The vehicle is type-approved for
of the deceleration of the car. towing. It is not permitted to mount an
The electric motor works as an
alternator, converting the kinetic energy aftermarket towing device.
of the car into electrical energy. WARNING When One-Pedal Driving
Using this mode is particularly useful is active and the driver releases the WARNING The installation of a towing
when driving in the city, where there seat belt, the electric parking brake is device on the vehicle can lead to
are continuous stops and starts. applied automatically and One-Pedal accidents and result in serious injury.
NOTE To make the most efficient use Driving is not possible.
of the system, the braking phase WARNING Never equip the vehicle
should, where possible, be modulated Press the accelerator pedal to reach with a towing device. Attaching towing
by applying so as to allow maximum the desired speed. The deceleration devices can cause extensive damage
energy recovery. provided by One-Pedal Driving mode to the vehicle.
NOTE In the event of an emergency, allows for full regenerative braking and
maximum braking efficiency is always helps to increase the efficiency of the
guaranteed by the conventional braking car.
system. With the One-Pedal Driving mode
enabled, the electric parking brake may
be automatically applied if:
the car stops on a slope;
the driver’s door is open;
car stopped for longer than five
minutes;

207
 MOPAR® CONNECT PRIVACY MODE activation the www.driveuconnect.eu portal,

STARTING AND DRIVING

procedure contact the Fiat Dealership or contact
(where provided) Proceed as follows: Customer Care.
These services let you keep your car take note of the total odometer
under control at all times and receive reading;
assistance in the event of accident, make sure that the instrument panel
theft or breakdown. is off;
To have these services, install the Send the following text
Mopar ® Connect device on your message to +393424112613:
car from the country (list available on “PRIVACY <CAR_CHASSIS_NUM>
the www.driveuconnect.eu website) <TOTAL_MILEAGE_KM>” (e.g.:
and request activation by following PRIVACY ZFA3340000P123456
the instructions received at the email 12532). You can find the vehicle
address given when your car was identification number in the registration
handed over to you. document;
Download the Uconnect™ LIVE App before starting the engine, wait to
or access the www.driveuconnect.eu receive the text message confirming
portal to use the connected services. that Privacy mode has been activated
You can find all the details about the and indicating when it expires.
services in the Mopar ® section of the When you have received the
www.driveuconnect.eu portal. confirmation, you can start your trip in
PRIVACY MODE the knowledge that the car will not be
Privacy mode lets you disable the tracked until the indicated expiry time. If
“Find car”, “Notify Area” and “Notify it expires while you are still travelling,
Speed” services, which allow registered Privacy mode will be extended until you
customers to locate their cars, for a turn off the engine (instrument panel
fixed time. off).
If you receive a text message indicating
WARNING Car position tracing remains that your request was not successful,
active for the assistance services, you must be aware that the car will
where provided, in the event of continue to be visible to the registered
accident or car theft, but is not visible customer.
to the customer. If you have any problems during
activation, consult the FAQ on

208
 IN AN EMERGENCY

Have a flat tyre or a burnt-out bulb? HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS ....... 210
At times, a problem such as these may ASSIST CALL ............................ 210
interfere with your driving experience. EMERGENCY CALL - EU eCall .... 212
The pages on emergencies can help IN CASE OF ACCIDENT .............. 216
you to deal with critical situations
REPLACING A BULB .................. 217
independently and calmly.
FUSES REPLACEMENT .............. 222
In an emergency, we recommend that
you call the phone number found in the Fix&Go KIT ................................ 231
Warranty Booklet. JUMP STARTING ....................... 233
It is also possible to call the national TOWING THE CAR ..................... 234
or international universal freephone
number to search for the nearest
Dealership.

209
 HAZARD WARNING ASSIST CALL
IN AN EMERGENCY
LIGHTS The car is equipped with an on-board
Press button (A) fig. 215 to switch the assistance function designed to provide
hazard lights on/off regardless of the support in the event of malfunctions of A
position of the ignition device. With the the car.
device on, warning lights and light The ASSIST function is activated:
up in the instrument panel. Press the automatically (where provided)
button (A) again to switch the lights off. following malfunctions of the braking
system system, motor, etc.
217 F0S1382
manually, by pressing the ASSIST
button (B) fig. 216 (where provided)
The ASSIST function is activated with:
located on the ceiling light or via the
ignition device in the ENGINE
"Assist" app (A) fig. 217 present on the
position;
Uconnect™ system (where provided).
ignition device in STOP position and
For more information, refer to the
Uconnect™ system display on.
"Apps" paragraph in the "Uconnect™"
Once activated automatically (where
chapter of the "Multimedia" section.
provided) or manually by pressing the
215 F0S1159 corresponding button, the EU eCall
function will send the position data of
WARNING The use of hazard warning the car to the Operations Centre and
lights is governed by the highway stablish a voice call with an operator.
code of the country you are driving in: NOTE If the ASSIST function does
comply with legal requirements. work, the fault in the system will be
indicated on the display. Go as soon
Emergency braking as possible to a Fiat Dealership to have
In the event of an emergency the function repaired.
216 F0S1160
NOTE The correct operation of the
braking, the hazard warning lights
switch on automatically together ASSIST services will be guaranteed
with warning lights and on the only by a good network coverage.
instrument panel. The lights switch off
automatically when emergency braking WARNING The ASSIST function may
ceases. not be available for the first minute after
the car is started.

210
The "ASSIST call" function is not WARNING The icon at the top of will turn off when the connection is
the emergency call, also known as the Uconnect™ display indicates ended.
"eCall", which is required by law in that the geo-location function is NOTE If the ASSIST call button is
the countries of the European Union active (ON). When geo-location is on, pressed by mistake, the call can be
(EU eCall) based on the emergency the car position is tracked to enable ended by pressing the same button
number 112 and described in the "SOS the functions that require it. When again or by pressing the cancel button
Call" chapter in the "In an emergency" geo-location is off, the car position on the Uconnect™ system display.
section. is only tracked by the navigation, Once the connection has been
Privacy: for the ASSIST call service, safety, insurance and driver assistance established, the following data will
the location (GPS) of the car cannot be systems (where provided). This be automatically transmitted, as
deactivated because it is indispensable function can be deactivated using the authorised by the customer:
for the provision of the service itself. Uconnect™ system (see "Settings" in indication that the occupant has
The localisation for this service cannot the"Vehicle mode" paragraph in the made an ASSIST call;
be deactivated even with "Privacy "Multimedia" section). the brand of the car;
Mode" activated ("Geo-location the most recent known GPS
OFF"). Furthermore, deactivating the Pressing the ASSIST button (where coordinates of the car;
positioning of the car by means of the provided) located on the front ceiling the type of error that occurred in the
"Settings" menu of the Uconnect™ light (B) fig. 216 and/or on the display car that automatically sent the ASSIST
system will make other services fig. 217 of the Uconnect™ system request (in the case of an automatic
(other than the one described here) (where provided) to call to one or more call - where provided).
unavailable (for more details see of the following services: The call will be made through the car
"Settings" chapter of the Uconnect™ Roadside assistance: if case of sound system to provide any additional
system). need, a connection will be established information about the assistance
FCA Italy S.p.A. processes personal with the roadside assistance authority request.
data ("Data") – as the Data Controller which will receive the car type and its If the system is unable to establish the
- in accordance with the provisions of position directly. Additional roadside voice call, or the line disconnects due
Italian Legislative Decree 196/2003 as assistance charges may apply. to insufficient coverage, the ASSIST
amended by Italian Legislative Decree Customer care (where provided): service will try to call the Operations
101/2018, Regulation (EU) 2016/679 Customer service to support all car Centre again for certain number of
and any other personal data protection problems. times.
regulations in force. In this regard, The LED on the ASSIST button located
refer to the Privacy Policy on the Patto on the ceiling light will turn green once WARNING If you have not subscribed
Chiaro Vendita. connected to an ASSIST operator and to the related services or the My
Assistant package has expired or is

211
 unavailable for purchase, the ASSIST could affect or entirely prevent service

IN AN EMERGENCY
call will not be available. For further operation.
information visit the Fiat official website. NOTE Regardless of state of charge,
the battery must be replaced every 5
WARNING If the ASSIST call system years by a Fiat dealership.
detects a malfunction, it is indicated EMERGENCY CALL -
by the red LEDs on the ceiling light
and a corresponding message on the EU eCall
Uconnect™ system display. Contact a The car is equipped with an on-board
Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. assistance function designed to provide 218 F0S1198

support in the event of accident and/or

If a EU eCall is active and an ASSIST emergency (SOS). The emergency After automatic or manual activation by
call is requested, the latter will not be call, also known as "eCall", which is pressing the SOS button, the function
delivered. required by law in the countries of will send the car data to the Operations
the European Union (EU eCall) based Centre, including the geo-location data
Uconnect Box SYSTEM on the emergency number 112, can of the data, and a voice call will be
BATTERY be used to call for help quickly in initiated with an operator. If the EU
The Uconnect Box system is provided dangerous situations. eCall function does not work, the fault
with an independent battery that allows The eCall EU emergency call activates in the system will be indicated on the
the operation of some connected the voice call to the Operations instrument panel display. Go as soon
services even if the 12V battery of the Centre dedicated to emergency calls as possible to a Fiat Dealership to have
car is disconnected. (112) with simultaneous activation of the function repaired.
The system will warn the user of the transmission of the car data and The EU eCall service using a SIM card
the need to replace this battery by geo-location. The EU eCall service is a mounted in the car. The provision of
displaying a dedicated message on the public service of general interest and the services presupposes the proper
display of the Uconnect™ system free of charge. operation and availability of the mobile
(where provided) and by means of The EU eCall function can be activated: phone network of the SIM card.
a notification via mobile app (where Automatically, in the event of a major The EU eCall function is activated with:
provided). collision recorded by the device by ignition device in the ENGINE
Go to a Fiat dealership as soon as means of the presence of sensors position;
possible. aboard the car. ignition device in the STOP position.
NOTE Failure to replace the battery Manually, holding the SOS button The EU eCall is available in the STOP
and, consequently, failure to observe (A) located on the ceiling light fig. 218 position for 10 minutes after the ignition
the warnings provided by the system pressed (for longer than 2 seconds).

212
device is switched from the ENGINE WARNING The icon at the top of be interrupted by the operator of the
position to STOP. the Uconnect™ display indicates Emergency Operations Centre.
This condition is only valid for cars that the geo-location function is MANUAL EMERGENCY
equipped with SOS call in accordance active (ON). When geo-location is on, CALL
with the legal regulations in the the car position is tracked to enable To make the emergency call manually
countries where it applies. the functions that require it. When make sure that the instrument panel is
Once activated automatically (where geo-location is off, the car position on ("READY" symbol on the instrument
provided) or manually by pressing the is only tracked by the navigation, panel).
corresponding button, the EU eCall safety, insurance and driver assistance
Press the SOS call button on the front
function will send the position data of systems (where provided). To
ceiling light for about 2 seconds (A)
the car to the Operations Centre and deactivate this function, see "Settings"
fig. 218.
stablish a voice call with an operator. in the "Vehicle mode" paragraph in the
"Multimedia" section). The green light located at the SOS
NOTE If the EU eCall function does
button will flash and then become fixed
work, the fault in the system will be
once the connection has been made
indicated on the display. Go as soon AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY with an operator of the Operations
as possible to a Fiat Dealership to have CALL Centre responsible for emergency calls
the function repaired. The automatic emergency call system (number 112).
NOTE The correct operation of the EU is only available if the car is in READY
eCall function will be guaranteed only The green light will go out when the call
ON status ("READY" symbol on is interrupted.
by a good network coverage. instrument panel).
Privacy: the location (GPS) of the car The system makes an automatic Interrupting a call
can never be deactivated because emergency call if certain conditions are If the SOS call button is pressed by
it is indispensable for the eCall met, e.g. an airbag is deployed. mistake, it is possible to press it again
service. Furthermore, deactivating The flashing green light located on the within 10 seconds to cancel the
the positioning of the car, performed SOS button (A) fig. 218 on the front operation. After 10 seconds, only the
by activating "Privacy Mode" ("Geo- ceiling light will indicate that the system operator of the Operations Centre can
location OFF") in the "Settings" menu is trying to make the emergency call. interrupt the call.
items of the Uconnect™ system will The fixed green light will indicate that If you are able to speak to the operator,
make other services - other than the the call has been established. do so through the car audio to provide
one described here - unavailable additional information about the
(for more details see "Settings" in Interrupting the call request for help.
the"vehicle mode" paragraph in the The automatic emergency call cannot If the system is unable to establish
"Multimedia" section). be interrupted by the user but will only the voice call, or the line disconnects
due to insufficient coverage, EU eCall

213
 service will try to call the Operations Uconnect Box SYSTEM have the battery checked, in case

IN AN EMERGENCY
Centre again for 5 minutes. BATTERY of low level of charge or malfunction
If the Operations Centre needs to The Uconnect Box system is provided and will inform him about the current
contact the car again, the system can with an independent battery that allows system update and the status of the
receive, for up to 120 minutes from the the operation of some connected call (in progress, failed, etc.).
ending of the call with the operator, an services even if the 12V battery of the If a fault is present, contact a Fiat
incoming call, which will be accepted car is disconnected. Dealership as soon as possible.
automatically. Until the end of 120 The system will warn the user of Privacy - Information on
minutes, the system will be completely the need to replace this battery by personal data ("Data")
dedicated to the management of the displaying a dedicated message on the processing
emergency in progress, therefore it will display of the Uconnect™ system The geo-location (GPS) function of the
not be able to provide any connectivity (where provided) and by means of car is always active and can never be
service. a notification via mobile app (where deactivated for the EU eCall service,
LED signalling / colours provided). even when the "Privacy Mode" system
Green light Go to a Fiat dealership as soon as is activated ("Geo-location OFF").
In flashing mode: this indicates that possible. Data processing is carried out in
the emergency call has been activated, NOTE Failure to replace the battery accordance with current European
whether it was made manually or and, consequently, failure to observe legislation (EU Regulation 2016/679
automatically. the warnings provided by the system also known as "GDPR").
In fixed mode: this indicates that could affect or entirely prevent service When the call is connected, the
contact has been established with operation. following data will be automatically
the Emergency Operations Centre NOTE Regardless of state of charge, transmitted to the Operations Centre:
operator. the battery must be replaced every 5 Identification of the data packet sent.
Off: this indicates that the years by a Fiat dealership. (The operator may request an updated
emergency call has ended. EU eCall SYSTEM data package during the call)
Red light FAULTS car Identification Number
This indicates a fault in the EU eCall If the EU eCall system detects a Type of traction (electric, petrol,
system with the impossibility to make malfunction, this is indicated by the red Diesel, LPG, etc.)
an emergency call or with the possibility light on the ceiling light and a dedicated Date, time and minute when the call
to do so with limitations. Go to a Fiat icon and/or message on the instrument was made
dealership as soon as possible when panel display. Call type: Manual (via SOS button) or
this light is red. The system through this icon and/or Automatic (following a collision)
message will suggest to the user to

214
 Vehicle type (car or van) cannot be monitored at all times. It in Corso Agnelli 200, 10135 Torino,
Type of traction (electric, petrol, ensures that data is automatically and Italy.
Diesel, LPG, etc.) continuously erased from the internal The data subjects can contact the Data
Reliability of the sent position memory of the system. Protection Officer's team at the email
(depending on the condition of the GPS The car geo-location data car are address [email protected].
signal at the time of the call) constantly overwritten in the internal FCA commits to comply with the
Location relative to the time of the memory of the system to store at most applicable laws in the matter of
call. If the call is made from a location the last three positions of the car, data protection, in particular the
where the GPS position is available, the necessary for the normal operation of requirements of Legislative Decree
position of the car will be sent at the the system. 196/2003 as amended by Legislative
start of the call; if the GPS signal is not The data protocol of the EU eCall Decree 101/2018 and UE Regulation
available, e.g. inside a tunnel, the last system activities is kept only for the UE 2016/679.
available position will be sent time necessary to manage the eCall Refer to the Privacy Policy on the Patto
Two positions before the main emergency call and in any case for Chiaro Vendita.
position sent and the direction of travel no more than 13 hours from the The following rights are granted to the
of the car. time the eCall emergency call was data subject:
Data processing is strictly limited to the initiated. FCA Italy S.p.A. shall retain 1. right of access, i.e. the right to
sole purpose of making emergency the geo-location data relating to the obtain confirmation from FCA whether
calls to 112, the single European position of the VEHICLE - recorded at or not the Data are being processed
emergency number. the time of the accident - for the period and, if so, to obtain access to them;
The recipients of the Data processed deemed strictly necessary to provide
2. right of correction and erasure, i.e.
through EU eCall are the emergency this Service. In addition, the Data may
the right to obtain the correction of
call collection centres that are the be retained by FCA for a longer period
inaccurate Data and/or the integration
first designated by the competent to deal with any disputes related to
of incomplete Data or the deletion of
Authorities of the country in whose the provision of the Service and to
Data for legitimate reasons;
territory the vehicle is located to receive ascertain, exercise or defend the rights
3. right to the restriction of processing,
and process eCalls to the single of FCA in judicial and/or extrajudicial
i.e. the right to request the suspension
European emergency number 112. proceedings. After this period, the
of processing where legitimate reasons
The EU eCall system is designed to Data will either be anonymised or
exist;
ensure that the Data in the system permanently erased.
4. right to data portability, i.e. the right
memory is not available outside the The Data Controller of the aforesaid
to receive the Data in a structured,
system before an eCall is activated. personal data is FCA Italy S.p.A.
commonly used and readable format,
The EU eCall system, in normal (hereinafter "FCA") with registered office
operation, is not traceable and

215
 as well as the right to transmit the Data could prevent the system form making PRECAUTIONS IN CASE

IN AN EMERGENCY
to another data controller; the emergency call. OF ACCIDENT
5. right to object, i.e. the right to Ignoring system fault signals (red LED To minimise the risk of serious injury,
object to the processing of Data if on the ceiling light and dedicated observe the following precautions:
there are legitimate reasons, including messages on the instrument panel) park safely on the side of the road,
processing of Data for marketing and may mean that you cannot make an EU apply the electric parking brake, put
profiling purposes, if any; call, if necessary. the one-speed transmission in P and
6. right to contact the competent data Even if the EU eCall system is fully switch off the electric motor;
protection authority in case of unlawful functional, factors outside the contact rescue immediately, warning
processing of Data. control of FCA could interfere with or that it is a electric car equipped with a
The data subject may exercise the prevent operation of the EU eCall. high-voltage system;
rights listed above by writing to FCA These factors can be identified in: if you notice any electrolyte leakage
Italy S.p.A., Corso Giovanni Agnelli 200 clogged or unavailable satellite signals, from the high-voltage battery, do not
10135 Torino Italy or to the following network connection, adverse weather go near the vehicle. If the electrolyte
email address: [email protected]: conditions, buildings, interfering from the high-voltage battery comes
Furthermore, the data subject has the structures, tunnels, etc. into contact with the eyes or skin,
right to lodge a complaint with the blindness or skin lesions may occur.
IN CASE OF Any vapors released from the
competent Data Protection Authority
if he or she considers that his or her ACCIDENT electrolyte, if inhaled, may also cause a
rights have been violated as a result of 216)
risk of intoxication. In case of contact
the processing of his or her personal with the electrolyte, rinse immediately
data. AUTOMATIC HIGH- with plenty of water and seek medical
VOLTAGE BATTERY attention;
WARNINGS DISCONNECTION do not go near the high-voltage
In the event of danger (fire, visible In the case of an accident, with the battery with naked flames: danger of
smoke or hazardous road conditions intervention of the battery disconnect FIRE. In case of fire, do not use water
or dangerous positions), do not wait system and airbags, the high-voltage extinguishers to extinguish the fire; the
for voice contact with the Emergency battery is disconnected automatically, use of water, even in small quantities,
service operator, but exit from the car to avoid possible fire risks that could can be dangerous;
immediately and go to a safe place, if in put passengers and any other people if the car has been seriously
a condition to do so. involved in traffic and/or near the car in damaged, maintain a safe distance of
Do not place network CB radios or a dangerous condition. at least 15 metres between the car and
aftermarket electrical equipment to To reactivate the high-voltage battery, the other cars / flammable materials.
avoid interference. Such interference contact a Fiat Dealership.

216
 difference in temperature and humidity
WARNING between the inside and the outside
of the glass which does not indicate
216) Do not touch high-voltage a fault and does not compromise the
components (identified by the colour
orange) or any components that have
normal operation of lighting devices.
come into contact with exposed The mist disappears quickly when
high-voltage cables. NEVER touch the lights are turned on, starting from
exposed electric cables: danger of the centre of the vent, extending
ELECTROCUTION. progressively towards the edges.

REPLACING A BULB
217) 218) 219)

81) 82)

GENERAL
INSTRUCTIONS
Before replacing a bulb check the
contacts for oxidation;
burnt bulbs must be replaced by
others of the same type and power;
always check the headlight beam
direction after changing a bulb;
when a light is not working, check
that the corresponding fuse is intact
before replacing a bulb. For the
location of fuses, refer to the "Fuses
replacement" chapter in this section.

WARNING When the weather is cold or

damp or after heavy rain or washing,
the surface of headlights or rear lights
may steam up and/or form drops of
condensation on the inside. This
is a natural phenomenon due to the

217
 BULB TYPES

IN AN EMERGENCY
 
The car is equipped with the following bulbs:

All-glass bulb: (type A) these are pressure fitted - pull to remove.

A

Bayonet bulb: (type B) to remove them press the bulb and turn it anticlockwise.
B

Cylindrical bulbs: (type C) release them from their contacts to remove.

C

Halogen bulbs: (type D) release the fastening clip from its housing to remove
the bulb. D

218
Light bulbs
 
Use Type Power Ref. Figure

H19 (where provided)

Dipped/Main beam headlights 55/60W (where provided) D (where provided)
(LED) (where provided)

(LED) (where provided)

Front side lights/Daytime running lights (DRL) 5W (where provided) A (Where provided)
W5W (where provided)

PSY24 (where provided)

Front direction indicators 24W (where provided) B (where provided)
(LED) (where provided)

Side direction indicators LED – –

Rear direction indicators LED – –

Tail/brake light LED – –

Reverse gear W16W 16W B

Rear fog light W16W 16W B

Ceiling light C5W 5W C

Boot light W5W 5W A

Number plate light LED – –

Third brake lights LED – –

219
 REPLACING AN

IN AN EMERGENCY
EXTERNAL BULB
FRONT LIGHT CLUSTERS
The front light clusters contain side/tail
lights, dipped headlights, main beam
headlights and direction indicator
bulbs.
LED front direction indicators
For replacement, contact a Fiat
Dealership. 219 F0S1161 220 F0S1162

Side direction indicators remove the pressure-fitted bulb and remove the bulb holder by pressing
The side direction indicators of the LED replace it; the fins (B) fig. 221;
type. For replacement, contact a Fiat refit the bulb holder locking it remove the pressure-fitted bulb and
Dealership. correctly; replace it;
Dipped/main beam headlights refit the rubber cap. refit the bulb holder locking it
Side/tail lights/daytime running correctly.
Contact a Fiat Dealership for replacing
an LED dipped beam/main beam lights (DRL)
headlight. If the car is fitted with dipped The side/tail lights/daytime running
beam/main beam headlights of the lights (DRL) are of the LED-type. For
light bulb type, proceed as follows to replacement, contact a Fiat Dealership.
replace them:
Front direction indicators
operating from the motor
Contact a Fiat Dealership for replacing
compartment remove the protective
a front direction indicator of the LED
rubber cap (A) fig. 219;
type.
press the fastener and remove the
If the car is fitted with direction
bulb holder; 221 F0S1163
indicators of the light bulb type,
proceed as follows to replace them: REAR LIGHT CLUSTERS
remove the wheel arch (A) fig. 220 by These contain the functions of the
undo the appropriate screws; tail lights, brake lights and direction
indicators. The reversing lights and rear
fog lights are located instead in the rear
bumper.

220
The tail, brake, third brake lights and
the direction indications are of the LED
type. For replacement, contact a Fiat
Dealership.
REVERSING LIGHT/REAR FOG
LIGHT
To replace the reversing and rear fog
light, access the bulb holder through
the lower part of the rear bumper
fig. 222. 223 F0S1165 224 F0S1166

refit the bulb/bulb holder (A) by

turning it clockwise.
THIRD BRAKE LIGHTS
The third brake lights are LED-type. For
replacement, contact a Fiat Dealership.
NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS
The number plate lights are LED-type.
For replacement, contact a Fiat
222 F0S1164
Dealership. 225 F0S1313

rotate the bulb holder (A) fig. 223 REPLACING INTERIOR

BULBS remove the lens assembly and
anticlockwise and extract it. Undo
Inside ceiling light replace the press-fit bulb (A) fig. 225,
the outer bulb holders to replace the
To replace the bulbs, proceed as making sure that it locks correctly.
reversing lights. Undo the central bulb
holder to replace the rear fog light; follows: Boot courtesy light
release the bulb and replace it; operate in the points indicated by (where provided)
the arrows and remove ceiling light (A) To replace the bulb, proceed as
fig. 224 complete with its frame; follows:
open the boot;
using the screwdriver provided,
extract the ceiling light (A) fig. 226

221
 working in the point shown by the FUSES
IN AN EMERGENCY
arrow; WARNING
REPLACEMENT
217) Modifications or repairs to the electric 220) 221) 222) 223) 224)
system that are not carried out properly
or do not take the system technical GENERAL INFORMATION
specifications into account can cause Fuses protect the electrical system:
malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.
they intervene (blow) in the event of
218) Halogen bulbs contain pressurised
gas, in the case of breakage they may a failure or improper action on the
burst causing glass fragments to be system.
projected outwards. Check the state of the corresponding
219) Only replace the light bulbs when the fuse when a device does not work:
motor is off and in a position that does
226 F0S1323 the filament (A) fig. 228 should be
not interfere with traffic and lets you safely
replace them (see the description in the intact. If it is not, replace the blown fuse
open the protection (B) fig. 227 “When parked" chapter in the "Starting with another with the same amperage
replace the snap-fitted bulb; and driving" section). Also ensure that the (same colour).
motor is cold, to prevent the risk of burns.

IMPORTANT

81) Halogen bulbs must be handled

holding the metallic part only. Touching
the transparent part of the bulb with your
fingers may reduce the intensity of the
emitted light and even reduce the lifespan
of the bulb. In the event of accidental
227 F0S1324 contact, wipe the bulb with a cloth
228 F0S1278
moistened with alcohol and let the bulb
close the cover (B) on the lens; dry.
82) Where possible, it is advisable to have (B) = intact fuse;
then refit the ceiling light by inserting
it correctly in its housing, on one side bulbs changed at a Fiat Dealership. The (C) = fuse with damaged filament.
correct operation and direction of the To facilitate fuse replacement, use the
and then pressing on the other side external lights are absolutely essential for
until it clicks into place. tongs (D) hooked inside the fusebox lid
the safety of the car and of compliance
with the law. on the dashboard left-hand side.
Refer to the tables on the following
pages to identify the protective fuse.

222
For fuse replacement, contact a Fiat
Dealership.
DASHBOARD FUSEBOX
The fusebox is located on the lower
left side of the dashboard (fig. 229).
Remove the dashboard panel to
access the fusebox.
The fuse layout is shown in fig. 231.

230 F0S1296

The fuse layout is shown in fig. 232.

WARNING

220) If the replaced fuse blows again,

contact a Fiat Dealership.
229 F0S1291 221) Never replace a faulty fuse with metal
wires or anything else.
MOTOR COMPARTMENT 222) Never replace a fuse with another
FUSEBOX with a higher amp rating; RISK OF FIRE.
223) If a general fuse (MEGA-FUSE, MIDI-
83)
FUSE, MAXI-FUSE) blows contact a Fiat
The fusebox is located behind the Dealership.
DC/DC converter fig. 230. 224) Contact Fiat Dealership if a safety
system (airbags, brakes), engine system
(engine, gearbox) or steering system
general protection fuse blows.

IMPORTANT

83) If you need to wash the engine

compartment, take care not to directly hit
the engine compartment fusebox with the
water jet.

223
 DASHBOARD FUSEBOX

IN AN EMERGENCY

F43
F36

F38

F48
F47
F94

231 F0S1168

 
USERS FUSE AMPERE

Power supply to the climate control system, FIAT Link & Drive, USB data port,
F36 15 A
Uconnect™ display, electric parking brake control, EOBD port

Unlocking the tailgate F38 20 A

Windscreen washer pump F43 20 A

Front electric window (driver side) F47 20 A

Front electric window (passenger side) F48 20 A

224
USERS FUSE AMPERE

12V socket F94 15 A

225
 MOTOR COMPARTMENT FUSEBOX

IN AN EMERGENCY

B A
C

232 F0S1297

226
Fusebox (A)

F23

F84

F30
T17
F88
F89 F10

233 F0S1300

 
USERS FUSE AMPERE

Horn F10 10

Heated seats (where provided) F23 20

Heated windscreen (where provided) F30 20

12V boot power socket F84 20

Heated door mirrors (where provided) F88 7.5

227
 IN AN EMERGENCY
USERS FUSE AMPERE

Heated rear window F89 20

 
USERS RELAYS AMPERE

Door mirror/heated rear window defrosting T17 30

228
Fusebox (B)

T06

T02 T90

T14

T03

234 F0S1299

 
USERS RELAYS AMPERE

Heated seats (where provided) T02 30

Horn T03 20

Heated seats (where provided) T06 30

12V boot power socket T14 20

Heated windscreen (where provided) T90 30

229
 IN AN EMERGENCY
Fusebox (C)

235 F0S1393

 
USERS FUSE AMPERE

Driver's side electric lock F02 10

Passenger's side electric lock F09 10

Sound system amplifier (where provided) F12 15

Sunroof movement (where provided) F13 20

Sound system amplifier (where provided) F19 15

230
Fix&Go KIT wear the gloves;
D
(where provided) A
225) 226)

84)
C
DESCRIPTION
The Fix&Go quick tyre repair kit M AX

fig. 236 is located in the boot, inside a

dedicated container and consists of: B
one cartridge (A) containing sealant 236 F0S1246

and fitted with: transparent tube for 237 F0S1293

injecting the sealant (D) and sticker (C) turn the ignition device to the OFF
with the wording "Max. 80 km/h" to be position, apply the electric parking remove the cap from the tyre valve
placed in a clearly visible position (e.g. brake and shift the gear to position P or and connect and screw the transparent
on the dashboard) after repairing the R; tube of the sealant (D) fig. 236 onto the
tyre; put on the reflective safety jacket valve. If a 300 ml cartridge is present
one compressor (B); before getting out of the car (if required the housing of the transparent tube
by the regulations in force). In any case, is provided with removable ring to
REPAIR PROCEDURE facilitate extraction. Make sure that the
follow the road safety laws in force in
Proceed as follows: the country where you are driving; ON/OFF button (E) fig. 238 is in the off
stop the car in a position that is not make sure that any passengers get position (button not pressed);
dangerous for oncoming traffic where out of the car and go to a safe place
you can change the wheel safely. The where they will not obstruct traffic or
car must be stopped in a lay-by, car- G
be exposed to the risk of injury. In
park or parking or service area, and the case of puncture, change the tyre
ground must be as level as possible respecting the laws of the country you
and sufficiently compact; are travelling in;
insert the sealant cartridge (A) E
L
into the corresponding compressor
compartment (B)and press it down
hard fig. 236. Remove the speed limit 238 F0S1262
sticker (C) and apply it in a clearly
visible position fig. 237;

231
 insert the electrical connector (C)

IN AN EMERGENCY
fig. 239 into the 12V socket on the car
and start the engine; ON
A

C
H I
240 F0S1263 241 F0S1264

If the pressure gauge (G) fig. 238 After driving for about 8 km / 5 miles,
239 F0S1294
indicates a pressure lower than place the car in a safe and suitable
1.8 bar / 26 psi 15 minutes after area, engaging the parking brake. Take
operate the compressor by pressing starting the compressor, switch off the the compressor and restore pressure
the ON/OFF button (E) fig. 238. compressor, disconnect the sealant using the black inflation tube (I) fig. 241.
When the pressure shown in the tube (D) from the tyre valve and remove If the pressure shown is higher than
"Wheels" chapter in the "Technical the cartridge (A) from the compressor 1.8 bar / 26 psi, restore the pressure
specifications" section on the specific fig. 236. Move the car by approximately and drive safely to a Fiat Dealership as
label appears on the pressure gauge 10 m to promote the distribution of soon as possible.
(G), stop the compressor by pressing sealant; stop the car safely, operate If, however, the pressure is lower than
the ON-OFF button (E) again; the parking brake and restore pressure 1.8 bar / 26 psi, do not resume driving
disconnect the cartridge (A) from the using the black inflation pipe (I) fig. 241 but contact a Fiat Dealership.
compressor, by pressing the release to reach the required pressure. If also
in this case, the pressure is lower PROCEDURE FOR
button (H) and lifting the cartridge (A)
than 1.8 bar / 26 psi 15 minutes after RESTORING THE
upwards fig. 240.
turning on, do not resume driving but PRESSURE
contact a Fiat Dealership. Proceed as follows:
stop the car safely, as described
above, and operate the parking brake;
extract the black inflation tube (I)
fig. 241 and screw it firmly onto the tyre
valve. Follow the instructions shown in
fig. 239 and fig. 241.

232
Press the air release button (L) fig. 238 FLAT HIGH-VOLTAGE
to adjust any tyre overpressure. IMPORTANT BATTERY AND 12V
BATTERY
CARTRIDGE 84) The sealant fluid is effective with
REPLACEMENT In this condition it is possible to move
external temperatures from -40°C to
+50°C. The sealant fluid has an expiry date the car for a few metres, positioning the
Proceed as follows:
and must be replaced periodically. It is ignition device to the ENGINE position
only use original Fix&Go cartridges,
possible to repair tyres with damage on and putting the transmission in position
which can be purchased from the Fiat the tread up to a maximum diameter of N.
Dealership. 6 mm. Show the cartridge and the label
to remove the cartridge (A) fig. 240 to the personnel who will handle the tyre BUMP STARTING
press the release button (H) and lift it. treated with the repair kit. Never bump start the motor by
pushing, towing or driving downhill.
JUMP STARTING
WARNING WARNING Remember that the brake
Jump starting using cables and/or servo and electric power steering
225) The information required by the using an auxiliary 12V battery is never system (where provided) are not active
applicable regulation is indicated on the permitted. Risk of damaging the until the ignition device is in ENGINE
Fix&Go kit package label. Carefully read electrical system of the car. Contact a position. A much greater effort will
the label on the cartridge before use, avoid Fiat Dealership.
improper use. The kit should be used by therefore be required to use the brake
adults and cannot be used by children. STARTER WITH FLAT pedal or turn the steering wheel.
226) IMPORTANT: Do not exceed HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY
80 km/h. Avoid sudden acceleration or AND 12V BATTERY
braking. The kit provides a temporary
repair, therefore the tyre must be
Jump starting is not possible with
examined and repaired by a specialist as a discharged high-voltage battery.
soon as possible. Before using the kit, Proceed as follows:
ensure that the tyre is not excessively Contact a Fiat Dealership.
damaged and that the rim is in good transport the car with a tow truck
condition, otherwise do not use it and
call roadside assistance. Do not remove to a public or private charging point
foreign bodies from the tyre. Do not let the and charge the high-voltage battery
compressor turned on for more than 20 (for transport see the "Towing the car"
consecutive minutes - overheating hazard. chapter in this section).

233
 TOWING THE CAR
IN AN EMERGENCY
230) It is permitted to tow for short
distances at a speed not exceeding 5
227) 228) 229) 230) 231) km/h using a special device conforming to
The tow ring provided with the car is the Highway Code (rigid bar) and ONLY
housed in the tool bag under the boot for preparation for transport by tow truck,
keeping the broken-down car aligned on
mat. the same centreline as the tow truck.
The car may not be towed. It can only 231) Tow rings MUST NOT be used to
be transported on a tow truck as tow cars off the road or where there are
shown in fig. 242. obstacles and/or for towing operations
using cables or other non-rigid devices.
243 F0S1169

FLAT HIGH-VOLTAGE
BATTERY AND 12V
BATTERY
In this condition it is possible to move
the car for a few metres, positioning the
ignition device to the ENGINE position
and putting the transmission in position
242 F0S1302 N.

ATTACHING THE TOW

HOOK WARNING
Front
Proceed as follows: 227) Before tightening the ring clean the
release the cap fig. 243; threaded housing thoroughly. Make sure
take the tow ring out of its housing in that the ring is fully fastened in the housing
the tool support; before towing the car.
228) NEVER tow the car with two or four
fully tighten it on the threaded pin. wheels on the road. Risk of damaging the
motor and fire hazard. It is imperative that
the car is towed by a tow truck.
229) In the case of a discharged high-
voltage battery and a discharged 12V
battery, NEVER tow the car. Transport
it on a tow truck and contact a Fiat
Dealership.

234
 MAINTENANCE AND CARE

Proper maintenance allows car SCHEDULED SERVICING ........... 236

performance to be maintained over CHECKING LEVELS ................... 240
time, operating costs to be contained, 12V BATTERY ........................... 243
and safety system performance to be
RUBBER HOSES ....................... 244
safeguarded.
This section explains how. BRAKES ................................... 244
REPLACING THE
WINDSCREEN/REAR WINDOW
WIPER BLADES ......................... 244
RAISING THE CAR ..................... 246
WHEELS AND TYRES................. 246
CAR INACTIVITY ........................ 247
BODYWORK ............................. 248
INTERIOR ................................. 251

235
 SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE AND CARE
SERVICING
Correct servicing is crucial for
guaranteeing a long life for the car
under the best conditions. For this
reason, Fiat has planned a series of
checks and services at fixed distance
and/or time intervals, as described in
the Service Schedule.
To keep the efficiency of the car in tip-
top condition, in the following Service
Schedule pages a few additional
checks are listed that should be carried
out more frequently with respect to the
normal scheduled service deadline.
Scheduled Servicing is offered by Fiat
Dealerships according to fixed time or
kilometres/miles intervals. If, during
each operation, in addition to the ones
scheduled, the need arises for further
replacements or repairs, these may be
carried out with the owner's explicit
agreement only.
IMPORTANT NOTES
The scheduled service deadlines are
set out by the Manufacturer. Failure to
have them carried out may invalidate
the warranty.
We advise sharing any doubts
regarding the car’s proper operation
with your Fiat Dealership, before
waiting for the next scheduled service
deadline.

236
SERVICE SCHEDULE
WARNING Once you have carried out the last intervention in the table, continue with the scheduled servicing, maintaining the
frequency indicated in the plan by marking each operation with a dot or dedicated note.

Warning: simply restarting the maintenance from the start of the plan may cause the allowed interval to be exceeded for some
operations!
 
Thousands of miles 9 18 27 36 45 54 63 72 81 90

Thousands of kilometres 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Check the tyre condition/wear and, if necessary, adjust the

pressure. Check the "Fix&Go” kit condition/expiry

Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators,

hazard warning lights, boot, passenger compartment, glove
compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.)

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (high-voltage cooling,

brakes, windscreen washer, etc.) (1)

Check vehicle functions via diagnostic socket (vehicle control units,

high-voltage battery, etc.)

Check 12V battery with special instrument

Visually inspect the condition of: exterior bodywork, underbody

protection, pipes and hoses (brakes, climate control system, cooling
system), rubber parts (boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.)

Check windscreen/rear window wiper blade position/wear (where

provided)

Check operation of the windscreen wiper/washer system and adjust

nozzles, if necessary

237
 MAINTENANCE AND CARE
Thousands of miles 9 18 27 36 45 54 63 72 81 90

Thousands of kilometres 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Check cleanliness of hood and boot locks, cleanliness and

lubrication of linkage

Check soft top operation while closing and opening; check of seals
and lubrication of canvas sliding side guide (only cabrio versions)

Visually inspect conditions and wear of front disc brake pads and
operation of pad wear indicator (where present)

Visually inspect condition and wear of the rear drum brake lining

Change the brake fluid (4)

Replace passenger compartment filter (2) ( ) ( )

Replace UConnect Box system battery (3)

Visually check charging port

(1) Topping up must be carried out with the fluids indicated in this Owner Handbook and only after checking that the system is undamaged.
(2) If the car is used in dusty areas, this cleaner should be replaced every 15,000 km/9,000 mi.
(3) The Uconnect Box battery must be replaced every 5 years, regardless of mileage.
(4) Brake fluid must be changed every 2 years or every 75,000 km/45,000 mi.
( ) Recommended operations
( ) Mandatory operations

238
REGULAR CHECKS DEMANDING USE OF THE
Every 1,000 km/600 mi or before CAR
long journeys, check and top up the If the car is mainly used in one of the
following, if necessary: following particularly harsh conditions:
traction system coolant level; dusty roads;
NOTE The motor coolant level must short, repeated journeys (less than
be checked when the motor is cold 7-8 km / 4-5 mi) at sub-zero external
and must range between the MIN temperatures;
and MAX marks on the reservoir. If in the event of a long period of
the level is under the MIN level, go to inactivity;
a Fiat Dealership. Do not attempt to perform the following inspections more
open the cap yourself to avoid burns frequently than shown on the Service
and/or damage to the cooling system Schedule:
and electronic components. Topping check front disc brake pad condition
up and filling operations must be and wear;
carried out by qualified personnel at check cleanliness of bonnet and boot
Fiat Dealership using the appropriate locks, cleanliness and lubrication of
equipment for vacuum filling. linkage;
brake fluid level; visually inspect conditions of:
windscreen washer fluid level; electric motor, transmission, brake
tyre inflation pressure and condition; pipes and hoses, rubber elements
operation of lighting system (gaiters/sleeves/bushes, etc.);
(headlights, direction indicators, hazard check the state of charge and fluid
warning lights, etc.); level (electrolyte) of the 12V battery;
operation of windscreen check and, if necessary, replace
washer/wiper system and pollen filter.
positioning/wear of windscreen/rear
window wiper blades.
You are advised to use PETRONAS
LUBRICANTS products, which
have been designed and produced
specifically for Fiat cars (see table
“Capacities” in the “Technical
specifications” section).

239
 CHECKING LEVELS
MAINTENANCE AND CARE 232) 233) 234) 85)

244 F0S1087

A. Motor coolant B. Brake fluid C. 12V battery D. Windscreen washer fluid

WARNING

232) Never smoke while working in the engine compartment: gas and inflammable vapours may be present, with the risk of fire.
233) Be very careful when working in the engine compartment when the engine is hot: you may get burned. Remember that the fan may start
up if the engine is hot: this could injure you. Scarves, ties and other loose clothing might be pulled by moving parts.
234) Do not operate in the engine compartment while the vehicle is charging or when the connector on the charging port is plugged in.

240
 IMPORTANT

85) The use of products with specifications other than those indicated above could cause damage to the engine not covered by the warranty.

241
 COOLING SYSTEM FLUID BRAKE FLUID

MAINTENANCE AND CARE

The traction system coolant level must Check that the fluid is at the maximum WARNING
be checked when the motor is cold level (the fluid level in the reservoir must
and must range between the MIN not exceed the MAX mark). 235) Do not travel with the windscreen
washer fluid reservoir empty: the
and MAX marks on the reservoir. If If the fluid level in the reservoir is too windscreen washer is essential for
the level is under the MIN level, go to low, undo reservoir cap (B) (see improving visibility. Some commercial
a Fiat Dealership. Do not attempt to the previous pages) and add the windscreen washer additives are
open the cap yourself to avoid burns fluid described in the "Technical flammable. The engine compartment
and/or damage to the cooling system contains hot components which may set it
specifications" section. on fire.
and electronic components. Topping Note Carefully clean the cap of the 236) Brake fluid is poisonous and highly
up and filling operations must be reservoir (B) and the surrounding corrosive. In the event of accidental
carried out by qualified personnel at surface. Take great care to ensure that contact, immediately wash the affected
Fiat Dealership using the appropriate impurities do not enter the reservoir parts with water and mild soap. Then rinse
equipment for vacuum filling. thoroughly. Call a doctor immediately if
when the cap is opened. Always use a swallowed.
WINDSCREEN/REAR funnel with a built-in filter with a mesh 237) The symbol on the reservoir
WINDOW WASHER FLUID of 0.12 mm or less. identifies synthetic brake fluids,
distinguishing them from the mineral type.
Check fluid level through the reservoir.
Use of mineral type fluids will irreparably
If the liquid is too low, lift reservoir WARNING Brake fluid is hygroscopic damage the braking system’s special
cap (D) (see previous pages) and add (i.e. it absorbs moisture). For this rubber seals.
the fluid described in In the section reason, if the car is mainly used
"Technical specifications". in areas with a high degree of
atmospheric humidity, the fluid IMPORTANT
The windscreen washer reservoir must
be filled with the liquids provided for must be replaced at more frequent
intervals than specified on the "Service 86) Prevent brake fluid, which is highly
this purpose. The use of any other corrosive, from coming into contact
liquid can compromise the operation of Schedule". with painted parts. Should it happen,
the reservoir pump. immediately wash with water.
After topping up, close cap (D), making 236) 237)

sure it is correctly locked. 86)

235)

242
12V BATTERY 87) The battery will also be more at risk
of freezing (this can happen as early
The car is fitted with a low- 6)
as -10°C). Refer to the "Car inactivity"
maintenance 12V battery: no electrolyte USEFUL ADVICE FOR chapter in the "Starting and driving"
top-ups with distilled water are needed EXTENDING THE LIFE OF section if the car is left parked for a
in standard conditions of use. THE 12V BATTERY long time.
To avoid draining your 12V battery If after buying the car, you want to
WARNING It is forbidden to disconnect and make it last longer, observe the install electric accessories which
the 12V battery. For 12V battery following instructions: require permanent electric supply
replacement, contact a Fiat Dealership. when you park the car, ensure (alarm, etc.) or accessories influencing
that the doors, tailgate and bonnet the electrical supply requirements,
WARNING Do not use the 12V battery are closed properly, to prevent any contact a Fiat Dealership whose
of the car to charge the 12V battery of lights from remaining on inside the qualified personnel will suggest
the another car. The battery power is passenger's compartment; the most suitable devices from
insufficient for this operation, with the switch off all roof lights inside the Lineaccessori MOPAR® and evaluate
risk of damage to the car. car: the car is however equipped with a the overall electric absorption, checking
system which switches all internal lights whether the electric system in the car is
off automatically; able to support the required load, or
INSPECTING THE
do not keep accessories (e.g. radio, if it should be integrated with a more
CHARGE AND THE
hazard warning lights, etc.) switched on powerful 12V battery.
ELECTROLYTE LEVEL
for a long time; Since some of these devices continue
The operations must be carried out as
before performing any operation to consume electricity even when the
described in this Owner Handbook only
on the electrical system, disconnect motor is off, they gradually run down
by specialised technicians. Topping
the cable from the negative battery the battery.
must be carried out by specialised
terminal;
personnel at a Fiat Dealership. RECHARGING THE 12V
completely tighten the battery
238) 239)
terminals. BATTERY
12V BATTERY 242)

REPLACEMENT WARNING If the charge level remains Never charge the 12V battery using:
WARNING For battery replacement, under 50% for a long time, the 12V an external battery charger;
contact a Fiat Dealership. battery is damaged by sulphation, a battery from another car.
reducing its capacity and efficiency at Contact a Fiat Dealership.
240) 241)
start-up.

243
 BRAKES
MAINTENANCE AND CARE
WARNING IMPORTANT
Depending on the version/market, the
238) Battery fluid is poisonous and 6) Batteries contain substances which car may be equipped with mechanical
corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin and are very harmful for the environment. It is wear detectors for the brake pads: one
eyes. Keep open flames away from the advisable to contact a Fiat Dealership for for each wheel assembly. When the
battery and do not use objects that might battery replacement.
brake linings are close to wearing out,
create sparks: risk of explosion and fire.
239) Using the battery with low fluid will pressing the brake pedal will generate
irreparably damage the battery and may RUBBER HOSES a slight squeal: this lasts for about
cause an explosion. 100 km (the mileage varies with the
240) Always wear appropriate goggles to As far as the maintenance of the brake driving style and route). In this case,
protect your eyes when working on or near system and cooling system rubber it is still possible to continue driving,
the conventional battery. hoses is concerned, follow the "Service with caution. However, contact a Fiat
241) Any operation concerning the 12V Schedule" in this section carefully.
battery ( removal, disconnection, etc.) Dealership as soon as possible to have
must be carried out by a specialised
Ozone, high temperatures and the worn brake pads changed.
professional. Contact a Fiat Dealership. prolonged lack of fluid in the system
242) Do not attempt to recharge a frozen may cause hardening and cracking of REPLACING THE
battery: first it must be thawed, otherwise the hoses, with possible leaks. Careful WINDSCREEN/REAR
there is a risk of explosion. If freezing has checking is therefore necessary.
occurred, the battery should be checked WINDOW WIPER
by specialised technicians to make sure BLADES
that the internal elements are not damaged
and that the body is not cracked, with the WIPER BLADES
risk of leaking poisonous and corrosive Replace the blades if the rubber
acid. edge is deformed or worn. In any
case, it is advisable to replace them
IMPORTANT approximately once a year.
A few simple precautions can reduce
87) Incorrect installation of electric and the possibility of damage to the blades:
electronic devices may cause severe if the temperature falls below zero,
damage to your car. After purchasing your make sure that ice has not frozen the
car, if you wish to install any accessories
(anti-theft, etc.), go to a Fiat Dealership, rubber to the glass. Use a de-icing
which will suggest the most suitable product to release it if required;
devices and advise you whether a higher remove any snow from the glass:
capacity battery needs to be installed. in addition to protecting the blades,

244
this prevents effort on the motor and REPLACING THE REAR
overheating; WINDOW WIPER BLADE
do not operate the windscreen and Proceed as follows:
rear window wipers on dry glass. raise the cover (A) fig. 246 and
243) 244) remove the arm from the car, undoing
the nut (B) that fixes it to the pivot pin;
RAISING THE
correctly position the new arm and
WINDSCREEN WIPER
tighten the nut fully;
BLADES
lower the cover.
Lift the windscreen wiper arm and
247
position the blade so that it forms a 90° F0S1333

angle with the arm.

The jets should be directed at about
REPLACING WIPER 1/3 of the height from the top edge of
BLADES the windscreen fig. 247.
Proceed as follows:
lift up the windscreen wiper arm (A) WARNING In versions with a sunroof,
fig. 245 and position the blade so that it make sure that the sunroof is closed
forms a 90° angle with the arm; before operating the front jets.
press the button (A) and extract from 246 F0S1273
the arm (B) the blade (C);
REAR WINDOW WASHER
insert the new blade making sure it is WINDSCREEN WASHER NOZZLE
locked into place. NOZZLES The rear window washer jets are fixed.
If there is no jet of fluid, firstly check The nozzle holder is located above the
that there is fluid in the reservoir (see rear window fig. 248.
the "Checking levels" chapter in this
section).
Then check that the nozzle holes are
not clogged; use a needle to unblock
them if necessary.
The screen washer jets can be oriented
by adjusting the nozzle angles.
245 F0S1272

245
 RAISING THE CAR
MAINTENANCE AND CARE
A B C
88)

If the car needs to be lifted, go to a

Fiat Dealership which is equipped with
workshop lifts and jack arms.

IMPORTANT
248 F0S1334 249 F0S1279
88) For versions equipped with side-skirts,
pay particular attention when positioning
A normal pressure: tread evenly worn.
the lift arms at the workshop.
WARNING B low pressure: tread particularly worn
at the edges.
243) Driving with worn windscreen/rear WHEELS AND TYRES C high pressure: tread particularly
window wiper blades is a serious risk, worn in the centre. The tyres must be
245) 246) 247) 248)
because visibility is reduced in bad replaced when the tread is less than
weather. Check the pressure of each tyre
1.6 mm thick. In any case, follow the
244) If the window needs to be cleaned, approximately every two weeks and
make sure the device is turned off or the laws in force in the country where you
before long journeys. The pressure
ignition device is in the STOP position. are driving.
should be checked with the tyre rested
IMPORTANT NOTES
and cold.
As far as possible, avoid sharp
It is normal for the pressure to increase
braking, screech starts and violent
when the car is used; for the correct
shocks against pavements, potholes or
tyre inflation pressure, see the
other hard obstacles.
"Wheels" chapter in the "Technical
Driving for long stretches over uneven
specifications" section.
roads can damage the tyres;
Incorrect pressure causes abnormal periodically check that the tyres have
tyre wear fig. 249: no cuts in the side wall, abnormal
swelling or irregular tyre tread wear. Go
to a Fiat Dealership if required;
avoid overloading the car when
travelling: this may cause serious
damage to the wheels and tyres;

246
 if a tyre is punctured, stop 247) Do not switch tyres from the not use compact plastic sheets which
immediately to avoid damage to the right­hand side of the car to the left­hand do not allow humidity to evaporate
tyre, the rim, suspension and steering side, and vice versa. from the surface of the car;
system; 248) Do not repaint alloy wheel rims at disable the alarm system of the car
temperatures higher than 150°C. The (where provided);
tyres age even if they are not used
mechanical features of the wheels could
much. Cracks in the tread and on be compromised. inflate tyres to +0.5 bar above the
the sidewalls are a sign of ageing. In standard specified pressure and check
any event, have the tyres checked by it at intervals;
specialised personnel if they have been CAR INACTIVITY do not drain the cooling system;
fitted for longer than 6 years; If the car is to be left inactive for longer any time the car is left inactive for
in the case of replacement, always fit than a month, observe the following two weeks or more, operate the
new tyres, avoiding those of unknown precautions: climate control system for at least
origin; park the car in covered, dry and if 5 minutes, setting external air and
if a tyre is changed, also change the possible well-ventilated premises and with fan set to maximum speed. This
inflation valve; slightly open the windows; operation will ensure appropriate
to allow even wear between the front check that the parking brake is not lubrication for the system, thus
and rear tyres, it is advisable to change engaged and put the transmission in minimising the possibility of damage to
them over every 10-15 thousand position P; the compressor when the system is
kilometres, keeping them on the same check the state of charge of the 12V operated again;
side of the car to avoid inverting the battery every 30 days; take the high-voltage battery to a
direction of rotation; clean and protect the painted parts charge level close to 100%.
avoid travelling with partially or using protective wax; The amount of charge of the high-
completely deflated tyres as this can clean and protect the shiny metal voltage battery may gradually decrease
compromise safety and damage the parts using special compounds when the car is not used. Therefore,
tyres beyond repair. available commercially; avoid long stays with a charge state
sprinkle talcum powder on the close to zero. If possible, monitor the
windscreen and rear window wiper state of charge and prevent it from
WARNING rubber blades and lift them off the reaching excessively low levels. Follow
glass; these warnings even for longer stays of
245) Remember that the road holding cover the car with a fabric or less than a month (a few weeks).
qualities of your car also depend on perforated plastic sheet, paying
correct tyre pressures.
246) If tyre pressure is too low, the tyre
particular care not to damage the
may overheat and be severely damaged as painted surface by dragging any dust
a result. that may have accumulated on it. Do

247
 BODYWORK use of “open” boxed sections to remove the aerial from the roof

MAINTENANCE AND CARE

prevent condensation and pockets to prevent damage to it if the car is
PROTECTION AGAINST of moisture which could favour the washed in an automatic system;
ATMOSPHERIC AGENTS formation of rust inside. if high pressure jets or cleaners are
The main causes of corrosion are the used to wash the car, keep a distance
following: BODY AND UNDERBODY
of at least 40 cm from the bodywork to
atmospheric pollution WARRANTY
avoid damage or alteration. It should be
salty air and humidity (coastal areas, Your car is covered by warranty against
remembered that the build up of water
or hot humid climates); perforation due to rust of any original
can damage the car over a period of
seasonal environmental conditions. element of the structure or bodywork.
time;
The abrasive action of wind-borne For the general terms of this warranty, wash the bodywork using a low
atmospheric dust and sand, as well as refer to the Warranty Booklet. pressure jet of water;
mud and gravel raised by other cars is PRESERVING THE wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy
also not to be underestimated. BODYWORK solution over the bodywork, frequently
On your car, Fiat has adopted the Paintwork rinsing the sponge;
best manufacturing technologies 89)
rinse well with water and dry with a
to effectively protect the bodywork jet of air or a chamois leather.
Paintwork does not only serve an
against corrosion. Dry the less visible parts with special
aesthetic purpose, but also protects
These include: the underlying sheet metal. care, such as the door frames, bonnet
painting products and systems which You are advised to touch up abrasions and the headlight frames, where water
give the car particular resistance to and scratches immediately to prevent may stagnate more easily. The car
corrosion and abrasion; rust formation. Use only original should not be taken to a closed area
use of galvanised (or pretreated) paint products for touch-ups (see immediately, but left outside so that
sheet metal, with high resistance to “Bodywork paint identification plate” in residual water can evaporate.
corrosion; the “Technical Specifications” section). Do not wash the car after it has been
spraying of underbody, motor left in the sun or with the bonnet
Normal care for paintwork consists of
compartment, wheel arch interiors and hot: this may alter the shine of the
washing the car; how often depends
other parts with highly protective wax paintwork. Exterior plastic parts must
on the conditions and environment
products; be cleaned in the same way as the rest
where the car is used. For example, in
spraying of plastic parts, with a of the car.
highly polluted areas, or if the roads are
protective function in the more exposed Where possible, do not park the car
spread with salt, it is advisable to wash
points: underdoor, inner wing, edges, under trees; the resinous substances
the car more frequently.
etc.; that many species release give the
To correctly wash the car, proceed as
follows: paint a dull appearance and increase

248
the possibility of triggering rusting are fitted with exclusive decorations immediately, but left outside so that
processes. on the door mirror covers; do not use residual water can evaporate. Do not
pressurised or high-temperature jets of wash the car after it has been parked in
WARNING Bird droppings must be water when washing them. the sun.
washed off immediately and thoroughly 92) Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned
as the acid they contain is particularly in the same way as the rest of the car.
Versions with stickers or wrapping Where possible, do not park the car
aggressive.
To correctly clean and wash the car, under trees; the resinous substances
proceed as follows: that many species release give the
7)
avoid washing with rollers and/or paint a dull appearance and increase
Automatic car washes - Tips brushes in washing stations. Then, the possibility of triggering rusting
90) 91)
wash the car, only by hand, using pH- processes.
neutral detergents; dry it with a wet
Before entering a car wash chamois leather. Abrasive products
WARNING In case of water stains
Adopt the following procedure to and/or polishes should not be used for
(rings) on the wrapping, remove it,
ensure the handling of the vehicle cleaning the car.
washing again and drying it with a
inside the car wash: If high pressure jets or cleaners are
non-abrasive soft cloth.
open the driver's door and leave it used to wash the car, keep a distance
open; of at least 40 cm from the bodywork to
take the ignition device to the avoid damage or alteration. It should be WARNINGS
ENGINE position; remembered that a build up of water Bird droppings must be washed off
press the brake pedal; could cause damage, in the long term, immediately and thoroughly as the acid
take the one-speed transmission to to the car. they contain is particularly aggressive.
N; Wet the bodywork with a low- Avoid (if at all possible) parking the
release the electric parking brake; pressure water jet. car under trees; remove vegetable
release the brake pedal; Wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy resins immediately as, when dried, it
leave the ignition device in the solution over the bodywork, frequently may only be possible to remove them
ENGINE position, exit the car and close rinsing the sponge. with abrasive products and/or polishes,
the driver's door. Rinse well with water and dry with which is highly inadvisable as they
249) a jet of air or a chamois leather. Dry could alter the paint, the stickers or the
the less visible parts with special care, wrapping.
Versions with matt paintwork such as the door frames, bonnet and Do not use pure windscreen washer
These versions have exclusive matt the headlight frames, where water fluid for cleaning the windscreen and
paintwork which requires special care may stagnate more easily. The car the rear window: dilute it to at least
for its preservation. Some versions should not be taken to a closed area 50% with water.

249
 necessary, follow the instructions

MAINTENANCE AND CARE

93) 94)
below: WARNING
Windows
washing is only allowed at low
To clean glasses, use specific cleaning 249) In this condition, the car is no longer
pressure;
products. secured and could move without control
washing must take place with the due to the slopes of the ground.
Use clean cloths to avoid scratching motor cold and the ignition device in
the glass or altering the transparency. the STOP position;
take care not to direct the water IMPORTANT
WARNING Wipe the rear window jet directly onto the electronic control
inside gently with a cloth following units, connectors and orange cables, 89) Abrasive products and/or polishes
the direction of the filaments to avoid including the areas adjacent to them should not be used for cleaning the car.
Bird droppings must be washed off
damaging the heating device. (high-voltage circuit) and venting valves; immediately and thoroughly as the acid
Have this operation performed by a they contain is particularly aggressive.
Headlights specialised workshop. Avoid parking the vehicle under trees
After washing, check that the various (unless it is absolutely necessary). Remove
Use a soft cloth soaked in water and any resinous plant matter immediately
detergent for washing cars. protective components (e.g. rubber because, once it has dried, it may require
guards and caps) have not been the use of abrasive and/or polishing
WARNING Never use aromatic removed or damaged. products to be removed, which are
strongly discouraged as they could
substances (e.g. petrol) or ketones (e.g. Underbody washing potentially alter the characteristics
acetone) for cleaning the plastic lenses If underbody washing is necessary, do of the paintwork. Do not use pure
of the headlights. not insist with the jet directly on the windscreen washer fluid for cleaning
connectors and venting valve. the front windscreen and rear window;
dilute it min. 50% with water. Only use
WARNING When cleaning the car Washing with charging flap closed pure screen washer fluid when strictly
with a pressure washer, keep the necessary due to outside temperature
The electrical system is safe, even if the
water jet at least 20 cm away from the conditions. Do not use chemicals/acids to
following situations occur: defrost windows/vehicle glass as they can
headlights.
presence of water in the foot area; damage the paint.
when the car is in water at a level 90) Never use high-pressure washing
CONTACT WITH WATER that allows it to cross a ford; systems. Drops of water may penetrate
Washing the motor compartment in the case of high-pressure washing
liquids entering the boot. systems and sprayers positioned near the
95)
96) windows. Give preference to car washes
Washing the motor is not that use fabric or soft brushes that do
recommended. If it is absolutely not damage the paint of the bodywork.
Ensure that the rims and tyres are not

250
damaged by the transport mechanisms. 93) It is not advisable to wash with INTERIOR
Depending on the width of the vehicle, pressure washer or, in case of use, it is
fold the exterior mirrors to prevent necessary to maintain at least a minimum Regularly check that water is not
damage. Remove the aerial from car distance of 40 cm with water at room trapped under the mats (due to water
roof. Deactivate the rain sensor (see the temperature. dripping off shoes, umbrellas, etc.), as
"Automatic wiping-Inhibition" paragraph in 94) Abrasive products and/or polishes this could cause oxidation of the sheet
the "Windscreen washing" chapter, in the should not be used for cleaning the car
"Knowing your car" section) to prevent
metal.
95) Do not use a high pressure jet cleaner
accidental activation of the windscreen to clean the motor compartment. The 250) 251)

wiper. In some cases, the Side Distance appropriate precautions have been taken
Warning system and parking sensors may SEATS AND FABRIC
to protect all parts and connections, but
be accidentally activated during washing. the pressures generated by these devices PARTS
91) Avoid car washes with drive rails are so high that complete protection Remove dust with a soft brush or a
higher than 10 cm (4 inches); otherwise, against water seepages cannot be vacuum cleaner. It is advisable to use a
the vehicle bodywork may be damaged. guaranteed. moist brush on velvet upholstery.
92) Avoid washing with rollers and/or 96) If it is necessary to wash the car from
brushes in washing stations. Wash the outside, take care not to insist directly Rub the seats with a sponge
the car only by hand using neutral pH with the water jet onto the charging flap. moistened with a solution of water and
detergents; dry it with a wet chamois neutral detergent.
leather. Abrasive products and/or polishes
should not be used for cleaning the car. IMPORTANT PLASTIC AND COATED
Bird droppings must be washed off PARTS
immediately and thoroughly as the acid It is advisable to clean interior plastic
7) Detergents pollute the water. Only wash
they contain is particularly aggressive.
your vehicle in areas equipped to collect parts with a moist cloth and a solution
Avoid (if at all possible) parking the car
and treat waste water from this type of of water and non-abrasive mild soap.
under trees; remove vegetable resins
activity. Use specific products for cleaning
immediately as, when dried, it may only be
possible to remove them with abrasive plastic, without solvents and specifically
products and/or polishes, which is highly designed to prevent damage to the
inadvisable as they could alter the typical
appearance and colour of the treated
opacity of the paint. Do not use pure
windscreen washer fluid for cleaning parts, to remove grease and tough
the front windscreen and rear window; stains.
dilute it min. 50% with water. Only use
pure screen washer fluid when strictly
necessary due to outside temperature WARNING Never use alcohol, petrols
conditions. Do not use chemicals/acids to and derivatives to clean the instrument
defrost windows/vehicle glass as they can panel lens.
damage the paint.

251
 LEATHER PARTS

MAINTENANCE AND CARE

(where provided)
Use only water and neutral soap to
clean these parts. Never use alcohol
or alcohol-based products. Before
using a specific product for cleaning
interiors, make sure that it does not
contain alcohol and/or alcohol-based
substances.

WARNING

250) Never use flammable products, such

as petrol ether or rectified petrol to clean
the inside of the car. The electrostatic
charges which are generated by rubbing
during the cleaning operation may cause a
fire.
251) Do not keep aerosol cans in the
vehicle: they might explode. Aerosol cans
must not be exposed to a temperature
exceeding 50°C. When the vehicle
is exposed to sunlight, the internal
temperature can greatly exceed this value.

252
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Everything you may find useful for IDENTIFICATION DATA ............... 254
understanding how your car is made MOTOR .................................... 256
and works is contained in this chapter BATTERY.................................. 257
and illustrated with data, tables and
TRANSMISSION ........................ 258
graphics. For the enthusiasts and the
technician, but also just for those who BRAKES ................................... 259
want to know every detail of their car. SUSPENSION............................ 260
STEERING ................................ 261
WHEELS................................... 262
DIMENSIONS ............................ 268
WEIGHTS ................................. 269
REFUELLING............................. 271
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ......... 272
PERFORMANCE ........................ 274
PRESCRIPTIONS FOR
HANDLING THE CAR AT THE
END OF ITS LIFE........................ 275

253
 IDENTIFICATION
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DATA
It is advisable to take note of the A
identification codes. The following B
C
identification codes are printed and D
shown on the plates: E
F
Vehicle identification number (VIN) G
plate.
Chassis marking.
Bodywork paint identification plate
(where provided).
I
Motor marking. L H
VEHICLE
IDENTIFICATION M
NUMBER (VIN) PLATE
(The label is shown divided into two
parts for reading purposes)
It is applied to the left front pillar 250 F0S1327 251 F0S1301
fig. 250.
It contains the following information A Name of Manufacturer.
fig. 251: B Vehicle type-approval number.
C Car identification number.
D Maximum authorised weight of car
fully laden.
E Maximum authorised weight of fully
laden car plus trailer (field not used).
F Maximum permitted weight on first
axle (front axle).
G Maximum permitted weight on
second axle (rear axle).
H Fiat colour code.
I Motor type.

254
L Type variant version. It contains the following information
M Spare part number. fig. 254:
BODYWORK PAINT
IDENTIFICATION PLATE
(where provided)
Depending on the version, the plate
may be applied to the external tailgate
pillar (left side) and contains the
following information fig. 252:
255 F0S1174
A Paint manufacturer.
B Colour name.
253 F0S1173
C Fiat colour code.
D Respray and touch up code.

254 F0S1351
252 F0S1335
car type;
Alternatively, depending on the version, chassis serial number.
the Fiat Colour Code may be integrated
MOTOR MARKING
in the type-approval data summary
It is shown on the plate (fig. 251) and is
plate (H field fig. 251).
engraved on the motor body fig. 255.
CHASSIS MARKING
It is applied under the mat at the
passenger side front seat fig. 253
and visible through a dedicated flap.

255
 MOTOR
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS  
GENERAL INFORMATION High Range Low Range

Motor code 46348460

Maximum power (CEE) (kW) 87 –

Maximum power (CEE) (HP) 117 –

corresponding revolutions per minute

4200 –
(rpm)

Maximum torque (CEE) (Nm) 220

Maximum torque (CEE) (kgm) 22.43

256
BATTERY
 
High Range Low Range

Type Lithium Ion (Li-ion)

Cooling / Heating Fluid

Rated voltage 350 V –

Battery operating temperature -30 / 60°C (*)

(*) The temperature of 60°C is to be understood as the temperature that the battery can reach, it is not to be understood as the operating
temperature of the car.

257
 TRANSMISSION
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS  
Versions Transmission Traction

One-speed transmission
All versions Front
Reduction ratio: 1:9.56

258
BRAKES
 
Versions Front service brakes Rear service brakes Parking brake

Drum, self-centring shoes with

All versions Disc Electric
control cylinder for each wheel

WARNING Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake discs, reducing braking efficiency the first time the
brakes are applied.

259
 SUSPENSION
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Versions Front Rear

MacPherson independent wheels with Axle with torsion bridge; consisting of torsion
mechanical crossmember, shock absorbers beam with longitudinal arms and comfort
New 500
and coil springs; with anti-roll bar for bushings, shock absorbers and propeller
versions with electric power steering springs

260
STEERING
Versions Kerb-to-kerb turning circle (m) Type

All versions 9.3 Rack and pinion with electric power steering

261
 WHEELS CORRECT READING OF Maximum speed index for snow

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
THE TYRE tyres
RIMS AND WHEELS
QM + S up to 160 km/h
Pressed steel or alloy rims. Tubeless S 1 TM + S up to 190 km/h
radial carcass tyres. All approved tyres
are listed in the registration document.
2 HM + S up to 210 km/h
H  
WARNING If there are any Load index (capacity)
discrepancies between the Owner
3
70 = 335 kg 81 = 462 kg
Handbook and the registration
document, take the information from Ø 71 = 345 kg 82 = 475 kg
the latter. For safe driving, the car must
be fitted with tyres of the same make 256 F0S1280 72 = 355 kg 83 = 487 kg
and type on all wheels. 73 = 365 kg 84 = 500 kg
Example fig. 256: 175/65 R 14 82H
175 Nominal width (S, distance in mm 74 = 375 kg 85 = 515 kg
WARNING Do not use air chambers
between sides)
with tubeless tyres. 75 = 387 kg 86 = 530 kg
65 Height/width ratio (H/S), expressed
as a percentage 76 = 400 kg 87 = 545 kg
254) 255)
R Radial tyre
WHEEL GEOMETRY 14 Rim diameter in inches (Ø) 77 = 412 kg 88 = 560 kg
Front wheels toe-in measured between 82 Load rating (capacity)
78 = 425 kg 89 = 580 kg
rims: 0.5 ± 1 mm. H Maximum speed rating
The values refer to the car in running 79 = 437 kg 90 = 600 kg
Maximum speed index
order.
Q up to 160 km/h 80 = 450 kg 91 = 615 kg
R up to 170 km/h
S up to 180 km/h CORRECT READING OF
T up to 190 km/h THE RIM CODE
U up to 200 km/h Example fig. 256: 5,00 B x 14 H2
H up to 210 km/h 5.00 width of the rim in inches (1).
V up to 240 km/h B drop centre outline (side projection
where the tyre bead rests) (2).

262
14 fitting diameter, expressed in inches
(corresponds to the diameter of the tyre
that should be fitted) 3 = Ø.
H2shape and number of "humps"
(circumference measurement which
keeps the bead of tubeless tyres in
position on the rim).

263
 RIMS AND WHEELS PROVIDED

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(according to versions/trim levels)
 
Versions Rims Tyres Snow tyres

6Jx15H2-ET40 185/65 R15 88T 185/65 R15 88T (M+S)

All 6Jx16H2-ET41(**) 195/55 R16 91V 195/55 R16 91H (M+S)

6.5Jx17H2-ET41(**) 205/45 R17 88V (***) 205/45 R17 88H (M+S)

(**) Alloy wheel rim
(***) Chains cannot be fitted

264
COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)
252) 253)

When the tyres are warm, the inflation pressure should be + 0.3 bar in relation to the recommended figure. With snow tyres,
add +0.2 bar to the pressure value prescribed for other standard tyres.
However, recheck the correct value when the tyre is cold.
 
Medium load Full load
Tyres
Front Rear Front Rear

185/65 R15 88T 2.4 2.3 2.4 2.5

195/55 R16 91V 2.4 2.3 2.4 2.5

205/45 R17 88V 2.4 2.3 2.4 2.5

WARNING

252) Remember that the road holding qualities of your car also depend on correct tyre pressures.
253) If tyre pressure is too low, it may overheat and be severely damaged as a result.

265
 RIM PROTECTOR TYRES depth is below 4 mm. Replace them in equipment; therefore their use is

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
258) this case. equivalent to that of the snow chains.
For wheel hub caps fitting on rims with Due to the specific characteristics Snow chains can be fitted to the tyres
Rim Protector tyres, see the warning of snow tyres, in normal weather of the front wheels (drive wheels) only.
below. conditions or on long motorway Check the tension of the snow chains
journeys, the performance of these after the first few feet/metres have been
tyres is lower than that of standard driven.
tyres. Their usage should therefore be Using snow chains with tyres with
restricted in accordance with their type non-original dimensions may damage
approval. the car. Using different size or type
(M+S, snow, etc.) tyres between
WARNING When using snow tyres front and rear axle may adversely
with a maximum speed index below affect car driveability, with the risk of
the one that can be reached by the car losing control of the car and resulting
(increased by 5%), place a notice in accidents.
257 F0S0351
the passenger compartment, plainly in
SNOW TYRES view, which states the maximum speed
259)
allowed by the snow tyres (as per WARNING
EC Directive). All four tyres should be
Use snow tyres of the same size as the
the same (brand and track) to ensure 254) Do not switch tyres from the
standard tyres provided with the car. right­hand side of the car to the left­hand
greater safety when driving and braking
All four tyres should be the same as well as a good manoeuvrability. side, and vice versa.
(brand and track) to ensure greater Remember that you should not change
255) Never submit alloy rims to
safety when driving and braking as well repainting treatments requiring the use
the rotation direction of the tyres. of temperatures exceeding 150°C. The
as a good manoeuvrability.
mechanical properties of the wheels could
Remember that you should not change be impaired.
SNOW CHAINS
the rotation direction of the tyres. 256) Remember that the road holding
The Fiat Dealership will be happy to 97) 98) 99)
qualities of your car also depend on
provide advice concerning the most The use of snow chains should be in correct tyre pressures.
suitable type of tyre for the customer's compliance with local regulations of 257) If tyre pressure is too low, it may
each country. In certain countries, overheat and be severely damaged as a
requirements. result.
The winter features of these tyres are tyres marked with code M+S (Mud 258) Do NOT fit wheel cups when using
reduced considerably when the tread and Snow) are considered as winter integral cups fixed (with springs) to the
steel rim and tyres other than factory-
fitted tyres provided with Rim Protector

266
(fig. 257). Use of unsuitable tyres and
wheel caps may cause sudden decrease
of tyre pressure.
259) The top speed for snow tyres marked
“Q” is 160 km/h, while it is 190 km/h for
“T” tyres and 210 km/h for "H" tyres.
Nevertheless, you must always comply
with the highway code speed limits.

IMPORTANT

97) Keep the vehicle's speed down when

snow chains are fitted; never exceed 50
km/h.
98) With snow chains, use the accelerator
with extreme care to prevent, or to limit
as much as possible, slipping of the drive
wheels that could cause chain breakage,
resulting in damage to the vehicle body or
mechanical components.
99) Avoid potholes, steps and pavements
and avoid driving long distances on roads
not covered with snow to avoid damaging
the car and the road surface.

267
 DIMENSIONS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Dimensions are expressed in mm and refer to the car equipped with its original tyres. Height is measured with car unladen.
BOOT CAPACITY: capacity (VDA standards): 185 litres.

I B C D F
A G

258 F0S1347

 
Versions A B C D E F G I

All 3631 732 2322 577 1529 1470 1683 1460

268
WEIGHTS
 
Versions High Range Low Range
Unladen weight (with all fluids and without optional
1290 –
equipment) (kg):

Payload including the driver (kg) (*) 400 –

Maximum permitted load (kg) (**)

- front axle: 920 –

– rear axle: 840 –

- total: 1690 –

Towable loads (kg)

- braked trailer: (***) (***)

– non-braked trailer: (***) (***)

Maximum load on the ball (braked trailer) (kg): (***) (***)

(**) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload in relation to the
maximum permitted loads.
(***) Loads not to be exceeded. The user should carry goods in the boot and/on load carrying platform within the maximum permitted loads.
(****) IMPORTANT A trailer cannot be towed so there are no provisions for fitting a tow hook.

269
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
 
Versions Cabrio 3+1
Unladen weight (with all fluids and without optional
1330 1320
equipment) (kg):

Payload including the driver (kg) (*) 400 400

Maximum permitted load (kg) (**)

- front axle: 920 920

– rear axle: 840 840

- total: 1730 1720

Towable loads (kg)

- braked trailer: (***) (***)

– non-braked trailer: (***) (***)

Maximum load on the ball (braked trailer) (kg): (***) (***)

(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload in relation to the maximum
permitted loads.
(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The user should carry goods in the boot and/on load carrying platform within the maximum permitted loads.
(***) IMPORTANT A trailer cannot be towed so there are no provisions for fitting a tow hook.

270
REFUELLING
 
Quantity Original fluids and lubricants

EDM (Electronic Drive Module) (litres): 0.67 PETRONAS IONA INTEGRA PLUS FCA

Mixture of demineralized water and 50%

Cooling system (litres): 6.5
PARAFLUUP (*)

Hydraulic brake circuit (kg): 0.8 TUTELA TOP EVO

Windscreen and rear window washer fluid Mixture of water and PETRONAS DURANCE
1.5
reservoir (litres): SC35
(*) When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a 60% mixture of PARAFLUUP and 40%
demineralised water.

271
 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS If lubricants conforming to the required specifications are not available, products that meet the indicated specifications can be
used to top up; in this case optimal performance of the concerned mechanical components is not guaranteed.
100)

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
 
Original fluids and
Use Features Specification Applications
lubricants

Molybdenum disulphide
TUTELA ALL STAR
grease, for use at high Wheel side constant
9.55580-GRAS II Contractual Technical
temperatures. N.L.G.I. velocity joints
Reference N° F702.G07
consistency 1-2.

Low friction coefficient

TUTELA STAR 700
Lubricants and greases grease for constant Differential side constant
9.55580-GRAS II Contractual Technical
for drive transmission velocity joints. N.L.G.I. velocity joints
Reference N° F701.C07
consistency 0-1.

PETRONAS IONA
Transmission Lubricant
INTEGRA PLUS FCA
SAE 75W-70, API GL-4 9.55550-MZ14 (EDM System - Electronic
Contractual Technical
Drive Module)
Reference N°F006.A20

Protective agent with

antifreeze action with Cooling circuits
PARAFLUUP
Protective for cooling organic formulation. proportions of use: 50%
9.55523 or MS.90032 Contractual Technical
system CUNA NC 956-16, demineralised water 50%
Reference N° F101.M01
ASTM D 3306 PARAFLUUP (*)
Specifications.

Synthetic fluid for brake

systems. Exceeds TUTELA TOP EVO
Brake fluid specifications: FMVSS n° 9.55597 or MS.90039 Contractual Technical Hydraulic brakes
116 DOT 4, ISO 4925 Reference N° F002.L18
Class 6, SAE J1704.

272
 Original fluids and
Use Features Specification Applications
lubricants

PETRONAS DURANCE
Mixture of alcohol, water To be used diluted or
Windscreen/rear window SC35 Contractual
and surfactants CUNA 9.55522 or MS.90043 undiluted in windscreen
washer fluid Technical Reference N°
NC 956-II. washer/wiper systems
F001.D16
(*) When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a 60% mixture of PARAFLUUP and 40%
demineralised water.
IMPORTANT Do not top up or mix with other fluids which have different specifications from those described.

IMPORTANT

100) The use of products with different specifications than those indicated below could cause damage to the engine not covered by the
warranty.

273
 PERFORMANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Max. speed in km/h that can be reached after initial car use.
 
Versions Maximum speed (km/h)

High Range 150

Low Range –

274
PRESCRIPTIONS FOR HANDLING THE CAR AT THE END OF ITS
LIFE
FCA has been committed for many years to safeguarding the environment through the constant improvement of its production
processes and manufacturing products that are increasingly "eco-compatible". To grant customers the best possible service
in terms of respecting environmental laws and in response to European Directive 2000/53/EC governing vehicles at the end of
their life, FCA is offering its customers the chance to hand over their vehicle at the end of its life without incurring any additional
costs. The European Directive sets out that when the vehicle is handed over, the last keeper or owner should not incur any
expenses as a result of it having a zero or negative market value.
To hand your vehicle over at the end of its life without extra cost, contact one of our dealerships if you are purchasing another
vehicle or an FCA-authorized collection and scrapping centre. These centres have been carefully chosen to offer high quality
service for the collection, treatment and recycling of vehicles at their end of life, respecting the surrounding environment.
Similarly, to meet its obligations under European Directive 2006/66/EC on batteries, FCA requires you to comply with the
national regulations on handling both low-voltage and high-voltage lithium ion batteries (12V and 48V) at all times. This includes
consigning vehicles complete with their batteries to one of the collection and demolition centres authorized by FCA to handle
such batteries, and not disposing of them improperly, which could lead to personal injuries and/or harm to the environment.
You can find further information on these collection and scrapping centres either from an FCA dealership or by calling the
number in the Warranty Booklet or by consulting the websites of the various FCA brands.

275
 MULTIMEDIA
MULTIMEDIA
This chapter describes the main FIAT LINK & DRIVE ..................... 277
features of the FIAT Link & Drive and Uconnect™ ............................... 283
Uconnect™ infotainment systems.
CONNECTED SERVICES -
UCONNECT SERVICES .............. 303
OFFICIAL TYPE APPROVALS ...... 306

276
FIAT LINK & DRIVE 2. activate the pairing procedure on the If the external audio device has other
instrument panel by selecting the "Pair formats (e.g. .exe, .cab, .inf, etc.)
The FIAT Link & Drive system is an in- Phone" option in the menu; problems might arise during playing of
car system designed to play supported tracks.
3. select the FIAT Link & Drive system
music files either by interacting with
("Uconnect [Serial Number]") from the 101)
your smartphone, after downloading
list of available devices displayed on
the FIAT Link & Drive app, or via the EXTERNAL AUDIO
your smartphone;
USB port under the climate control SOURCES
Check your smartphone for permission
system controls (wav, mp3, aac, wma). Other electronic devices can be used
requests and data downloads.
The FIAT Link & Drive system is on the car. Some of them may cause
Smartphones with Android 6 and iOS
activated from the outside when the electromagnetic interference however.
11 or higher are compatible with FIAT
doors are unlocked and deactivated Disconnect these devices if the system
Link & Drive.
when the driver's door is opened with performance worsens.
the ignition device in the OFF position. MULTIMEDIA DEVICES:
USB source
To make the best use of the system, SUPPORTED FILES AND
FORMATS NOTE The system supports only
users must download the FIAT Link &
For the USB source (USB flash drive or FAT16, FAT32 and exFAT formatted
Drive app from Apple App Store or
Apple device connected via USB) the USB devices. The system does not
Google Play Store. The app makes
system can play files with the following support devices with a capacity higher
it easier to use the telephone and
extensions and formats: than 256 GB.
minimises distraction. The functions
within the app can be used to manage .MP3 (32-320Kbps); The system does not support USB
phone calls, play audio files and web .WAV (8/16 bit, 8-48 kHz); hubs connected to the USB port of the
radio stations, navigate and manage .WMA (5–320Kbps) mono and car. Connect your multimedia device
audio settings. stereo; directly to the USB port, using the
.AAC (8–96KHz) mono and stereo. specific connection cable for the device
To use the app, pair your smartphone
if necessary.
or tablet with the FIAT Link & Drive For all sources, the system can also
system via Bluetooth ®. play the following Playlist formats: Smartphone source
To pair the devices using the .M3S Connecting to FIAT Link & Drive via
Bluetooth ® function, proceed as .M3U Bluetooth ® will allow you to listen to
follows: .WPL music from your smartphone, make
1. activate the Bluetooth ® function on telephone calls and, by inserting your
the smartphone; WARNING It is recommended to load telephone into the dedicated mount
only freely accessible music files, with on the dashboard, use navigation
supported extensions. programs in a optimal manner.

277
 The app allows you to browse In addition, you can use the steering You can switch the system back on

MULTIMEDIA
information related to the car: wheel controls to manage telephone again by pressing the / button
when the telephone is connected to calls, fast forward tracks being played located on the central tunnel.
FIAT Link & Drive via Bluetooth ®, you by FIAT Link & Drive, select the audio
can see the energy flows while driving, source, and call up the smartphone
listen to music and web radio, manage voice assistant (Google Assistant, Siri, IMPORTANT
telephone calls and use the navigation etc.).
apps available on your smartphone; There is a mount (A) fig. 260 on the 101) Some multimedia players may not
when the telephone is not connected dashboard for your smartphone; be compatible with the FIAT Link & Drive
to FIAT Link & Drive, you can use the system. Only use devices (e.g. USB flash
always use it in order to interact with drives) from safe sources on the car.
app to see the data saved when the your smartphone safely. Devices from unknown sources could
car was switched off: last location, 102) contain software infected by viruses which,
battery charge level and voltage, if installed on the car, could increase the
The USB port located near the vulnerability of the car's electric/electronic
charging schedule of the high-voltage
smartphone stand is preferable for systems to hacking.
battery, trip statistics and car usage
charging the smartphone stand and 102) Telephone voice commands: not
data, the nearest Fiat Dealerships and all mobile phones are compatible with
does not allow media files to be read.
a dictionary of the on-board warning this function. You can obtain further
lights. information from your mobile phone
service provider or the user guide for your
FIAT Link & Drive controls mobile phone. FCA provides the voice
The volume up/down controls (A) A interface functions, but shall not be held
fig. 259 and / are located on the liable for the content.
central tunnel.

260 F0S1210

When the motor is off, the FIAT Link &

Drive system remains on for up to 20
minutes or until the driver's side door is
opened.
259 F0S1197

278
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS
The controls for the main system functions are present on the steering wheel to make control easier.

261 F0S1211

279
 MULTIMEDIA
Steering wheel controls summary table
Button Interaction

Acceptance of incoming call

Acceptance of the second incoming call and putting the active call on hold

Long press (greater than 2 seconds): Activates a voice assistant session on the phone paired over Bluetooth® to
impart voice commands or ends the session if one is in progress.
Short press (less than 2 seconds): Make another request in the current voice session without starting a new one.

Rejection of incoming call

Ending of call in progress

280
CONTROLS BEHIND THE STEERING WHEEL

262 F0S1350

281
 MULTIMEDIA
 
Buttons Interaction

Button A (steering wheel left side)

Brief button press: select the next song or track.

Upper button
Long button press: fast forward the track.

Each press selects one of the USB and Bluetooth® sources. Only the available
Central button
sources will be selected.

Brief button press: select the previous song or track.

Lower button
Long button press: fast rewind the track.

Button B (steering wheel right side)

Increasing volume
Upper button Brief button press: single volume increase
Long button press: fast volume increase

Central button Activation/deactivation of Mute function

Decreasing volume
Lower button Brief button press: single volume decrease
Long button press: fast volume decrease

282
Uconnect™
Uconnect™ 10.25”
(where provided)
B C D E F D
A

263 F0S2048

283
 Uconnect™ 7”

MULTIMEDIA
(where provided)

A B F E B

264 F0S1349

284
GRAPHIC BUTTONS ON DISPLAY (A)
 
Graphic button Functions Mode

Show the main screen Press graphic button

Home

Access Media mode to select available

sources, folder tracks and interaction with Press graphic button
Media audio settings

Comfort
(Uconnect™ 10.25" version) Climate control system settings (air flow, set
indoor temperature) and heated seat (where Press graphic button
provided)
Comfort
(Uconnect™ 7" version)

Access to the Phone mode Press graphic button

Phone

Access to additional car settings and

Press graphic button
Vehicle functions

Nav Start Navigation system Press graphic button

(Uconnect™ 10.25" version only)

Access the list of available Apps Press graphic button

App
You can customise the order of the buttons by holding down the icon to move and dragging it to the desired position.
NOTE Customisation is only active when the car is stationary. If an attempt is made to customise with the car in motion or to resume driving
without having completed the operation, a warning message will appear on the display and the operation will be ended.

285
 STATUS BAR

MULTIMEDIA
 
Area Functions Mode

B Comfort (where provided) Climate control system display and settings Press graphic button

C App Access the list of available Apps Press graphic button

Quick access to functions: Profiles,

D Reconfigurable quick button bar Notifications, External temperature, Voice Press graphic button
recognition

Display the current time / access to App list

E Timetable / App customisation Press graphic button
for customising the reconfigurable bar

Display notifications, audio track playing,

F Message area tuned radio station, call time, volume and –
scrolling messages

286
CONTROLS ON THE STEERING WHEEL
The controls for the main system functions are present on the steering wheel to make control easier.

265 F0S1211

Steering wheel controls summary table

Button Interaction

Acceptance of incoming call

Acceptance of the second incoming call and putting the active call on hold
Display on the instrument panel of the list of the last 10 calls and favourite phone numbers (only with call browsing
enabled)

287
 MULTIMEDIA
Button Interaction

for Uconnect™ 7"

Interaction Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
for Uconnect™ 10.25"
Activation of voice recognition
Interruption of the voice message in order to give a new voice command
Interruption of voice recognition
Interaction Apple CarPlay and Android Auto

Rejection of incoming call

Ending of call in progress

288
CONTROLS BEHIND THE STEERING WHEEL

266 F0S1350

289
 MULTIMEDIA
 
Buttons Interaction

Button A (steering wheel left side)

Brief button press: search for next web radio station or select next track.
Upper button
Long button press: fast forward the track.

With each press advances between AM, FM, DAB, USB and Bluetooth ®
Central button sources.
Only the available sources will be selected.

Brief button press: search for next web radio station or select next track.
Lower button
Long button press: fast rewind the track.

Button B (steering wheel right side)

Increasing volume
Upper button Brief button press: single volume increase
Long button press: fast volume increase

Mute on/off (mutes the playback of audio tracks, radio stations, streaming from
Central button
App and the ringing of incoming calls).

Decreasing volume
Lower button Brief button press: single volume decrease
Long button press: fast volume decrease

290
CONTROLS ON CENTRAL To go back to the previous screen, NOTE Customisation is only active
CONSOLE press the "X" (Delete) graphic button or, when the car is stationary. If an attempt
depending on the active screen . is made to customise with the car in
To go back to the home screen motion or to resume driving without
or home position press the HOME having completed the operation,
graphic button. a warning message will appear on
The touchscreen function can be used the display and the operation will be
to access and view the available lists of ended.
music tracks, phone numbers, settings, MEDIA MODE
etc. Press the "Media" graphic button to
Move your finger on the screen to scroll listen and manage your music, view the
lists and selections. Hold your finger available lists and select your preferred
267 F0S1245
down and move up to display the list audio settings.
(A) (long press) Uconnect™ on/off items at the bottom; move down to
button display the list items at the top. Hold
WARNING Applications used
(A) (short press) Mute on/off (mutes your finger down on the screen and
on portable devices may be not
the playback of audio tracks, radio move your finger rightwards, to see
compatible with the Uconnect™
stations, streaming from App and the the lists to the left; move your finger
system.
ringing of incoming calls). leftwards, to see the lists to the right
(B) Volume adjustment knob of the screen. The same operation can
be performed to move between pages. After Media mode is selected, the
TOUCHSCREEN Press your finger on the chosen field or following information is shown on the
FUNCTION button to select the field or perform the display.
The system uses the touchscreen function associated with the button. Upper part: Selection of the different
function; to interact with the different pages of the "Sources", "Playback",
HOT BUTTONS "Browse", "Audio settings" function.
functions, press the graphic buttons
displayed. Up to 4 hot buttons (D) fig. 263 can be Left part: Display of the user's three
set on the status bar. favourite sources. To choose the
To confirm the selection, press the
graphic button "OK" or tick the required Press the button below the time ((E) source, select "Sources" and then
selection. Confirmation of some fig. 263) to open the drop-down menu choose the source to display. The
functions or settings is accompanied with the list of available apps. Hold the source being played is shown in red.
by a dedicated chime. desired app pressed and drag it to the Middle part: Display of information
app to be replaced on the status bar. about the track being played and
playback control buttons:

291
 “Bluetooth”: for a Bluetooth® audio NOTE This button might be disabled for PAIRING A BLUETOOTH®

MULTIMEDIA
source, opens the list of devices; some Apple® devices. AUDIO DEVICE
"Browse" for USB/Bluetooth ® NOTE The DAB frequency can be used The pairing of a Bluetooth® device
source, allows you to search for in countries where digital transmission (e.g. a smartphone) is done via the
content on your device; technology is available. The device "Device Manager" function on the
"Tracks" for USB/Bluetooth ® will tuned to any frequency if the DAB "Phone" page.
source, allows you to select a track button is pressed in a country where Proceed as follows to pair a device:
from the playlist; the service is not provided. activate the Bluetooth® function on
/ : previous/next track selection COMFORT MODE the device;
or previous/next station; On the screen you can select: access the "Device Manager"
: random playback of the tracks function;
the airflow distribution settings:
contained in the folder; press the "Add Device" graphic
windscreen, face, face plus feet, feet
: when the last track is finished, button;
plus windscreen;
playback automatically resumes from a pop-up window shows the
the inside temperature settings;
the first track in the playlist; temporary PIN to be entered on the
fast windscreen heating ( Max)
: pause track being played; device;
the defrosting of the rear window
"Tuning": access the radio station search for Uconnect™ on the
( );
selection page. Bluetooth® audio device;
the activation of the climate control
Lower part: Quick access to the when requested by the audio device,
system (A/C);
favourite radio stations. enter the PIN code shown on the
the activation of the climate control
system display or confirm on the device
Track selection system with maximum cooling (Max
the PIN displayed;
The “Tracks” function allows you to A/C);
if the pairing procedure is completed
open a window with the list of tracks the recirculation function;
successfully, a screen is displayed.
being played. the AUTO function;
Answer “Yes” to the question to pair
the activation/deactivation of the
The graphic buttons and can be the Bluetooth® audio device as
heated seat function (where provided).
used to browse the list of artists, music favourite (the device will have priority
genres and albums on the connected BLUETOOTH® MODE over all other devices to be paired
device via USB or Bluetooth ®, This mode is activated by pairing a subsequently). If "No" is selected, the
according to the information recorded Bluetooth® device containing music priority is determined according to the
on the tracks themselves. tracks with the Uconnect™ system. order of connection. The last device
Within each list, the "ABC" graphic connected will have the highest priority.
button allows the user to skip to the
desired letter in the list.

292
If no device has been registered, you USB SOURCE the display and the operation will be
can access the "Device Manager" There are two USB ports. The first one ended.
directly from the "Phone" function. is located on the dashboard for data display and call contacts from the
NOTE Up to 20 device can be paired. transfer to the Uconnect™ system registers of previous calls;
In case of an attempt to pair a twenty- and for charging external devices; display and call the contacts in the
first device a pop-up window will notify the second one is inside the central phonebook of the mobile phone;
that this is impossible. Remove a console for charging external devices view received text messages;
paired device to allow the pairing of a only. view the connected devices.
new one. When a USB device is plug into The mobile phone audio is transmitted
NOTE The Radio may change the track the port on the dashboard with the through the car’s sound system;
being played by modifying the name of radio on, it starts to play the tracks the system automatically mutes the
the device in the Bluetooth® settings on the device if the "AutoPlay" is set Uconnect™ system audio when the
of the telephone (where provided), if to "ON" in the "Audio" menu. If the Phone function is used.
the device is by means of USB after "AutoPlay" function is set to OFF and
Pairing a mobile phone
the Bluetooth® connection. After a smartphone is connected, only
WARNING Carry out this operation
updating the phone software, for charging the device will be active.
only with car stationary and in safety
proper operation, it is recommended PHONE MODE conditions; this function is deactivated
to remove the phone from the list of
Press the “Phone” graphic button on when the car is moving.
devices linked to the radio, delete the
the display to activate the Phone mode.
previous system pairing also from the
NOTE To consult the list of mobile To pair a mobile phone, see the
list of Bluetooth® devices on the
phones and supported functions, visit procedure in the "Pairing a Bluetooth®
phone and make a new pairing.
the www.driveuconnect.eu website audio device" paragraph in this
Select the desired page on the display chapter.
WARNING If the Bluetooth® using the bar at the top to:
connection between mobile phone "Double telephone" feature
dial the phone number using the
and system is lost, consult the mobile The Uconnect™ system allows
graphic dial pad on the display;
phone handbook. simultaneous Bluetooth® connection
NOTE The keypad is only active when
to two telephones. Only one of the two
the car is stationary. If an attempt is
connected devices can play multimedia
made to use the keypad with the car
content via Bluetooth®.
in motion or if driving is resumed
without having completed engagement,
a warning message will appear on WARNING The “double telephone”
feature is not available while using the

293
 telephone in CarPlay or Android Auto If this operation is not supported by "Do Not Disturb" function

MULTIMEDIA
mode. the phone, the corresponding "Text If supported by the connected phone,
message" graphic button is deactivated by pressing the "Do Not Disturb"
Making a phone call (greyed out). graphic button the user will not receive
The operations described below can When a text message is received, the notifications of incoming calls or text
only be accessed if supported by the display will show a screen where the messages. The user can reply with a
mobile phone in use. For all functions options "Read", "Answer" “Forward", default or customized message by
available, refer to the mobile phone "Call" or "Incoming" can be selected. means of the settings.
owner's handbook. Close the window by pressing the "X" Text message options
You can make a call by selecting one of button on the top right. (for Uconnect™ 10.25")
the following items: NOTE On some mobile phones, to According to the versions, default text
"Keyboard"/"Keypad" (according to make the text voice reading function messages may be stored in the system
the version) available, the text notification option memory and can be sent to answer
"Recent" (according to the version) on the phone must be enabled; this a received message or as a new
"Favourites" option is usually available on the phone, message. The following list of available
"Contacts" in the Bluetooth® connections menu messages is given by way of example:
for a device registered as Uconnect™.
Favourites Yes
After enabling this function on the
You can add a number or a contact (if No
mobile phone, it must be disconnected
already in Contacts) to the favourite list Okay
and reconnected with the Uconnect™
during a call by pressing one of the 5 I can't talk right now
system in order to make it effective.
"Empty" graphic buttons on the upper Call me
part of the display. The favourites can Thanks
WARNING Some mobile phones may I'm lost
also be managed by using the Phone
not take the text message delivery I'm on the road
Book options.
confirmation settings into account I am stuck in traffic
TEXT MESSAGES when interfacing with Uconnect™.If Are you there?
(for Uconnect™ 10.25") a text message is sent via the Where are you?
You can access the text message list Uconnect™ system, the driver could I can't talk right now
received by the cell by selecting the face an additional cost, without any I will be 5 (or 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45,
"Messages" item (the list shows a warning, due to the text message 60) (*) minutes late
maximum of 60 received messages). delivery confirmation request sent by (*) Only use the numbers listed,
To use this function, the mobile phone the phone. For any problems related otherwise the system will not take
must support the text exchange to the above, contact your telephone the message. When receiving a text
function through Bluetooth®. service provider.

294
message, the systems also allows the Uconnect™ system. Any discrepancy Wireless mode
same message to be forwarded. between the date and time on the You can use Apple CarPlay and
NOTE For details on how to send a text display and the actual date and time Android Auto in Wireless mode, without
message using the voice commands, may be due to a malfunction in Apple the need to connect your smartphone
refer to the dedicated paragraph. CarPlay/Android Auto. to the USB port.
Apple CarPlay and Apple CarPlay App Setup To configure this mode, follow the
Android Auto Apple CarPlay is compatible with the procedure for pairing a Bluetooth®
(where provided) iPhone 5 or more recent models, with device. If successfully completed
the iOS 7.1 operating system or later and the connected device supports
The Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
versions. Wireless mode, confirm that it starts
applications allow you to use your
on the message shown on your
smartphone in the car safely and Before using Apple CarPlay, enable Siri
smartphone and Uconnect™ display.
intuitively. To enable them, connect from "Settings" > "General" > "Siri" on
a compatible smartphone to the the smartphone. On subsequent connections, Wireless
USB port of the car or in Wireless mode is available automatically. If a
Android Auto APP Setup Bluetooth® pairing is cancelled, the
mode and the contents of the phone
Before use, download the Android Auto pairing procedure must be repeated on
will be automatically shown on the
application to your smartphone from the "Device Manager" menu.
Uconnect™ system display.
Google Play Store.
To check the compatibility of your Interaction
The application is compatible with
smartphone, refer to the indications on After the setup procedure, the
Android 5.0 (Lollipop) and later
the websites: application will run automatically on
versions. Starting from Android version
https://www.android.com/intl/it_it/auto/ the Uconnect™ system when your
10 and higher, the Android Auto app is
e http://www.apple.com/it/ios/carplay/. smartphone is connected to the USB
integrated into the operating system of
If the smartphone is connected port in the car.
the smartphone and no downloading is
correctly to the car via the USB port or required. Apple CarPlay: To interact with Apple
in Wireless mode, the Apple CarPlay or CarPlay press the steering wheel
On the first connection, you will have
Android Auto icon will be displayed in to perform the setup procedure that button (long press) or the "Home"
place of the graphic button in the appears on the smartphone. You can graphic button on the display in Apple
main menu. only perform this procedure with the CarPlay.
NOTE The date and time shown on the car stationary. Android Auto: To interact with
Uconnect™ system display must Android Auto press the steering wheel
Once connected to the USB port, the
match the actual date and time, even Android Auto application establishes a button (long press of the button)
after disconnecting the battery. Adjust parallel Bluetooth® connection. or the "Microphone" graphic button
it from the "Settings" menu of the

295
 on the display in Android Auto (where Exiting the Android Auto and Apple Write message

MULTIMEDIA
provided). CarPlay apps Call back
To end the Apple CarPlay or Android Show recent calls
Navigation
Auto session, physically disconnect Show outgoing calls
(only for Uconnect™ 10.25")
the smartphone from the USB port of Show missed calls
If the "Nav" mode of the system is Show received calls
the car or using the "Device Manager"
already active, or when a device is
menu. Text
connected to the car with a navigation
session in progress, the system VOICE COMMANDS Send a message to <contact>
navigation mode is interrupted to (only for Uconnect™ 10.25") mobile / work
continue the navigation session of the NOTE Voice commands are not Media
device. available for languages not supported I want to listen to music
The selection can be changed at by the system. Play <track> by <artist>
any time by accessing the chosen To use voice commands, press the Let me hear some <genre>
navigation system and setting a new "Voice" button on the steering Show my playlists
destination. wheel controls or the button on the Play album…
Voice Commands display and say out loud the function Play artist…
(only for Uconnect™ 7") you want to activate. Alternatively, the Play genre…
NOTE Voice entry of addresses is function can be activated by saying Play playlist…
only supported in the country in which "Hey FIAT" or "Hey Uconnect" (if Radio
you are located and provided that the user has previously enabled the I want to listen to music
the system language matches the function). Play <track> by <artist>
local language. For example, if the car The list of available voice commands Let me hear some <genre>
is located in Italy, it will be possible is shown on the display divided by Show my playlists
to enter Italian addresses only if the categories. I want to listen to a radio
system language is set to "Italian". Suggestion Play radio <name>
To use the voice commands, press the A list of the most used voice Play channel <number>
“Voice” button on the steering commands is shown. Tune to <frequency> <FM>/<AM>
wheel controls and say the function you Tune to <radio name>
want to activate aloud. Alternatively, Phone Tune to <radio name> DAB channel
the function can be activated by saying Call <contact name>
Navigation
"Hey FIAT" or "Hey Uconnect" (if Call <number>
See the "Navigation" paragraph below.
the user has previously enabled the
function).

296
Climate NOTE The navigation system volume
"Recent": Select this button
Set the temperature to <value> can only be adjusted during navigation to open the list of recent
I'm cold when the system provides voice destinations. Select a recent
Make it warmer indications. destination to plan a route to
Turn down the fan NOTE In some countries, the use of the that destination.
Turn on the A/C keyboard is only permitted when the
"Favourites": select this button
NAVIGATION car is stationary. If an attempt is made
to show the saved favourite
to enter text (e.g. an address) with the
(only for Uconnect™ 10.25") places.
car in motion or if driving is resumed
Press the "Nav" graphic button to show
without having completed engagement,
the navigation map on the display. "Trips": select this button to
a warning message will appear on
You can use map view in the same way show saved trips.
the display and the operation will be
as you might look at a traditional paper ended. We recommend the use of
map. You can move around the map voice commands while driving. "Maps": select this button
using gestures, and zoom using the to display a list of installed
zoom buttons. Navigation main menu maps. The maps are updated
In "Map view" or "Guidance view", tap automatically.
You can find your destination by
selecting it on the map, choosing a the "Main menu" button to open the "Settings": select this button
saved destination (for example "Home" menu. to open the Settings Menu. In
or "Work") or searching for an address The following buttons are available in the "Settings" menu, you can
using the "Search" button in the main the main menu: change the items shown on the
menu.   navigation display.
After selecting the destination, a route
"Search”: select this graphic System buttons
is planned and shown on the "Map button to search for an address, The following buttons are available on
view" screen. The route bar appears a place or a point of interest, the different screens of the navigation
on the right hand side of the display then plan a route to the location.
system:
and provides an additional indication of
events along the route, e.g. accidents "Add Home": select this button
and speed cameras. The arrival time to set the location of your home.
and remaining distance are also
available.
You can choose to view the route via a "Add Work": select this button
to set the work position.
3D image in the "Guidance view".

297
   Map update Go to <address>

MULTIMEDIA
To ensure optimal performance, the Go to <city name> centre
After selecting a destination,
clicking on a point on the navigation system must be updated Drive to
map or using the search periodically. For this, the Mopar Map <address>/<PDI>/<junction>
function, select this button. The Care service offers a new map update Navigate home
navigation system will find the every three months. Go via home
best route and, if available, The updates can be downloaded from Clear route
two alternative routes. You the maps.mopar.eu website and Recent Destinations
can select an alternative to Stop at a recent destination
installed directly on the Uconnect™
avoid tolls or heavy traffic, for 2D view
example. system. All updates are free of charge
for 3 years from the start of the 3D view
Use this button to decide warranty on the car. Volume adjustment
whether to display the results on The navigation system can also be The volume of the navigation system
the map or in a list. updated at the Fiat Dealership. can only be adjusted when the
Use this button to access the NOTE The dealer may charge for navigation system provides voice
"Route Options" menu. With an updating the navigation system. commands.
active route, you can change
the route from this screen.
Voice Commands VEHICLE MODE
NOTE Voice entry of addresses is Pressing the "Vehicle" graphic
only supported in the country in which button to access the pages: "Electric
Select this button to return to
the previous screen. you are located and provided that Vehicle", "Controls" and "System
the system language matches the Settings".
local language. For example, if the car
Select this button to return to is located in Italy, it will be possible Electric vehicle
the "Map view" screen. to enter Italian addresses only if the The following submenus are
system language is set to "Italian". available to the user on the "Electric
Select this button to switch The following voice commands can be vehicle" page: Power flows, History,
between the "3D direction up", given after pressing the button on the Programming and Charge Status.
"2D direction up" and "2D north steering wheel : Power Flow shows in a chart the
up". power flow used by the battery, the
Find <PDI> (Point of Interest)
electric motor and the climate control
Select this button to choose near/along the route
system.
between audio instructions, Let's go <home>/<to work>
warning only or no sound.

298
History shows the power flows used the power level, select one of the five Lights
up to 15 minutes before or in the values from "1" (lowest current) to "5" Brakes
previous 7 days. (maximum current) on this page. The Doors & Locks
Programming can be used to estimated time displayed on the screen Key off options
program the charging of the high will be updated accordingly. Radio Setup
voltage battery or climate control Reset
Checks
system when the car is parked. System information
The "Controls" tab contains for
The page shows a summary of the Notifications
example: "screen settings OFF",
programmed charging and climate Geolocation
"internal electrochromic mirror" (where
control system operations with Software update
provided), "rear camera" (where
respective times and days of activation. System information
provided).
Select "New programming" to define a APP
new programmed charging or climate System setup
Pressing the graphic button "App"
control system operation. The settings are available with the
will display the "Favourites", "Recent"
When programming a battery charging ignition device in OFF or START
(according to the version), "Categories"
operation, select "Operating frequency" position. You can access the settings in
and "All" submenus.
to set the day and time for the start and two ways by pressing the "Settings"
button on the status bar, or from the Favourites
end of charging.
main page of the function you are The "Favourites" submenu contains
When programming the climate control
viewing, at the bottom right. (for versions/markets, where provided)
system, a pop-up with the ignition
NOTE The menu items displayed vary the "Electrical functions" and
device in the OFF position will ask
according to the versions. "Performance" pages.
the user whether to recharge the
high-voltage battery or not despite the The menu is indicative and includes the The "Favourites" page can contain up
programmed function. Set the desired following items (where provided): to 6 favourite pages. A message will
day and time to start the climate My Profile indicate that you have reached the
control system from this page. Language maximum number of pages allowed if
Display you try to add an additional page.
The Charging status shows the
current battery level and gives an Units To add or remove an app from the
estimate of the maximum and minimum Safety and Driving Assistance Favourites list, select or deselect the
charging time (depending on the power Clock and Date star that appears on the app icon in the
supplied by the charging station). For Phone/Bluetooth ® list shown in the "Recent", "Categories"
home charging, you can also set five Camera or "All" pages. A pop-up will tell you
different power consumption levels whether you want to save the app in
according to your needs. To adjust your favourites or not. The operation

299
 can be cancelled by selecting "Cancel" display and select the desired Widget Moving the widget: hold the desired

MULTIMEDIA
or "X". from the list. widget pressed for a few seconds and
Some Widgets can also be customised then move it to the right or left of the
Recent
by pressing the button next to the display.
The "Recent" submenu contains
recently used or downloaded apps. title. This will open the customisation
The user will see a list of apps arranged screen.
in chronological order. The number of Widgets which can be
In the "Recent", "Categories" and "All" installed per page depends on their
submenus you are prompted by a size. You can add multiple pages (up to
message to press the star on the App a maximum of five in total) by pressing Resizing the widget: press the
icon to add it to your favourite app list. the "+" button on the display. To switch widget resize icon to be resized.
between pages, simply touch the page
Categories briefly and swipe your finger rightwards
The "Other categories" submenu or leftwards.
contains the list of filtered categories Pages can be deleted using the "Delete
between apps. The following are page" function or reordered using the
displayed in order: Media, Comfort, "Reorder pages" function.
Nav (where provided), Telephone, View widget content: select the
NOTE The customisation is only active desired widget and then scroll
Vehicle, System and more. The when the car is stationary. If an attempt
applications in each category are vertically. When reordering the widgets
is made to customise with the car in (viewing their thumbnails), it will not be
displayed in alphabetical order. motion or to resume driving without possible to view their contents.
All having completed the procedure,
The "All" submenu all available apps a warning message will appear on SHORTCUTS WIDGETS
and allows the user to search for them the display and the operation will be Shortcuts (which can only be added
in alphabetical order from A to Z or Z to ended. with the car stationary) enable quick
A. access to contents offered by the
MOVING THE WIDGETS
system such as, for example:
WIDGETS Select the desired widget and then:
the "Call" function to start a call;
On the main page, you can view the "Media" widgets for starting
summary pages of Uconnect™ the radio and playback from
system functions (called "widgets") Bluetooth®/USB;
from a list of available widgets. To add the "App" widgets for starting the
a Widget, press the button on the radio, Bluetooth®/USBplayback,

300
opening the comfort, SOS and NOTE The rear-view camera, be made mandatory when the car is
Uconnect™ and car settings screens. Uconnect™ system and other driver first started. In case of a mandatory
assistance systems are not available update you can only press the "OK"
PROFILES
during the update. It is recommended button on the pop-up and start the
By entering the “Profiles” mode you
to carry out the update when the car is update.
can create an avatar and enter your
stationary. During the update the radio will
own customisations.
Instant update show the percentage of the update
Selecting "All profiles” displays
completed and the time remaining until
the existing profile. Selecting "Edit Press the "Update Now" button
completion fig. 269. When the update
profile” allows you to enter or edit fig. 268 to update the software
is complete the Uconnect™ system
customisations in the profile. immediately when the pop-up window
will automatically restart.
The profile customisations can be appears on screen.
deleted using either "Edit profile” or the Scheduled update
"Del. personal data” function in the In case of a mandatory update, press
"Settings" menu. the "Update now" or “Schedule
UPDATING THE SYSTEM update" button fig. 268. The scheduled
The Uconnect™ system can be update option allows you to define a
updated remotely via Over The Air different update time. Press the arrows
upgrade. / on the screen to set the desired
NOTE The images are given by way time.
of example only. They may differ from 269 F0S2075
those shown below according to the
version/market. Updates over external Wi-Fi
NOTE Instead of using external Wi-Fi When a software update via Wi-Fi is
connections, Over The Air software available, a pop-up window will appear
updates use the data connectivity on the screen offering the update
included with the car, at no additional instantly or at a later time.
cost to the customer. NOTE The rear-view camera,
When a software update is available, a Uconnect™ system and other driver
pop-up window will appear on screen 268 F0S2074 assistance systems are not available
informing that a new software version during the update. It is recommended
or new features for the Uconnect™ NOTE The scheduled update option to carry out the update when the car is
system are available. can be used 20 times per update. After stationary.
the 20th postponement the update will

301
 To allow the Uconnect™ system to arrows / on the screen to set the Uconnect Box updates

MULTIMEDIA
update its software: desired time. (where provided)
Select "Settings" on the screen NOTE The scheduled update option The Uconnect™ system can update
Select "Wi-Fi" in the settings list can be used 20 times per update. After the Uconnect Box remotely via Over
Select the correct Wi-Fi router from the 20th postponement the update will The Air update.
those shown be made mandatory when the car is NOTE Instead of using external Wi-Fi
NOTE If the Wi-Fi router is too far from first started. In case of a mandatory connections, Over The Air software
the car, it will not be shown among the update you can only press the "OK" updates use the data connectivity
available ones. button on the pop-up and start the included with the car, at no additional
If prompted, enter the password to update. cost to the customer.
access the router and select "OK". During the update the radio will When a software update Uconnect
To enable software updates: show the percentage of the update Box is available, a pop-up window
Select “Enable software download completed and the time remaining until will appear on the screen offering the
over Wi-Fi" on the Wi-Fi settings completion fig. 269. When the update update instantly or at a later time.
screen. is complete the Uconnect™ system NOTE The Uconnect Box can only be
When a software update is available, will automatically restart. updated when the car is off (ignition
a pop-up window will appear on the Update errors device in OFF position).
Uconnect™ system screen to alert In case of errors during the update, the Instant update
you that a new update is available. operation will be interrupted and the Press the "Update Now" button to
When asked to connect to a Wi-Fi following messages will appear: update the software immediately when
network, select "Yes".
"An error has occurred. The system the pop-up window appears on screen.
During the update, a second pop-
will revert to the previous software The update will take place with the car
up screen shows the estimated time
version." is off. When the update is complete the
remaining and the progress percentage
"Update failed. An error occurred Uconnect™ system will automatically
of the update. When the update is
during the update procedure. Please restart.
finished, press "OK".
contact your dealer. Error code: XXXX"
Scheduled update
Instant update Contact a Fiat Dealership in these Use the scheduled update option to
Press the "Update Now" button to cases. set a deferred update time. Press the
update the software immediately when
arrows / on the screen to set the
the pop-up window appears on screen.
desired time.
Scheduled update During the update the radio will
Use the scheduled update option to show the percentage of the update
set a deferred update time. Press the completed and the time remaining

302
until completion. When the update is You can access the Uconnect Services Operating prerequisites
complete the Uconnect™ system will through the dedicated FIAT app for To use some of the Uconnect
automatically restart. smartphones or smartwatches, a web Services, you need to register
Update errors portal, or the Uconnect™ system of on the dedicated portal
your car. http://myuconnect.fiat.com/ which
In case of errors during the update, the
The availability of services requires a can be accessed from the official Fiat
operation will be interrupted and the
UConnect Services contract. website, and activate and login to your
following messages will appear:
Read more about the Uconnect devices.
"An error has occurred. The system
Services – applicability, availability, Uconnect Services not available in all
will revert to the previous software
compatibility, packages and markets and is subject to limitations
version."
specifications – on the Fiat website. depending on Uconnect™ system
"Update failed. An error occurred
type, location and duration of the
during the update procedure. Please GENERAL DISCLAIMER
services.
contact your dealer. Error code: XXXX" Personal data & privacy
The full operation of the Uconnect
Contact a Fiat Dealership in these FCA collects, processes and Services, including the ASSIST call, is
cases. uses the personal data of the car in subject to mobile network and GPS
accordance with legal requirements.
CONNECTED Read more about the general
geolocation coverage, without which
SERVICES - the proper provision of services is not
conditions of service and data guaranteed. Coverage may not be
UCONNECT protection policies on the Fiat official guaranteed in places such as tunnels,
SERVICES website. garages, multi-storey car parks,
The Customer is solely responsible mountains.
(where provided) for using the services in the car, even In case of mobile network overload
260) if by other people, and shall inform all or problems related to the power
Uconnect Services connected services users and occupants of the car about supply of the car (e.g. low battery), the
enrich the experience of use of the car the services and the functions and services may not be available.
by connecting it to the network. limits of the system. When using the services, customers
The services (where provided) allow If the SOS emergency service shall keep their passwords secret for
you to receive timely assistance in is activated, the call will be strictly personal use and not to disclose
case of need and emergency, to obtain automatically routed to the 112 them to third parties.
information about the status of your emergency service number or a
car, its location, control it remotely and private FCA Call Centre (depending SERVICES
to improve the navigation experience on market). WARNING Some of the services listed
(where provided) thanks to real-time below may not be available if the car
updates. is left with the motor off for more than

303
 20 days. Start the motor to reactivate FCA network with a valid e-mail My Remote: this can be used to

MULTIMEDIA
these services. address. manage remote operations (switching
"In-Vehicle Alerts (Basic)": to on lights, door lock/unlock, find vehicle,
NOTE The date and time shown on the receive messages and/or alerts etc.) from the FIAT mobile app and
Uconnect™ system display must regarding recall campaigns or through compatible voice assistants. It
match the actual date and time, even other important messages on is also possible to use the "E-Control"
after disconnecting the battery. Adjust the Uconnect™ system display. services that allow to manage,
it from the "Settings" menu of the You can contact FCA Customer remotely, all the functions related
Uconnect™ system. Any discrepancy Service for further information to the of the high-voltage battery
between the date and time on the regarding the messages received. charging, such as charging activation,
display and the actual date and time My eCharge: is a service that allows charging programming and charge
may be due to a malfunction in the you to find, use and pay for charging at level monitoring. When a high-voltage
Connected Services. public charging stations and keep track battery charge session is planned using
According on the equipment of the car of your charging history. The service the Uconnect™ system display of the
and of the country, different services also allows you to manage recharges car, or via the Fiat app, and charging is
may be available for different durations. with your private wallbox charging taking place using devices/charging
For further information about your car, station directly from your smartphone. points which have their own planning
go to the personal page on the official My Car: vehicle status monitoring solutions, make sure that the
Fiat website. service: programming functions are compatible
"Vehicle Information" and with those of the car itself, as otherwise
Some of the packages made available
"Vehicle Health Report": charging might not take place.
to the customer are:
information and alerts related to My Navigation: connected
My Assistant: Customer care and
battery level, tyre pressure, and navigation service (subject to availability
safety alert service, which includes:
odometer. according to version/market). The
"ASSIST call" (see "In an navigation system is automatically
"In-Vehicle Alerts: possibility
emergency” section). updated by prioritising the maps of the
to receive messages and/or
"Vehicle Health Report": area most frequented by the user.
notifications related to the
information on the status and My Wi-Fi: Optional Wi-Fi Hotspot
provision of services and reminder
condition of the car, notifying service. This service provides
messages about the execution of
potential maintenance needs Internet access from the car to
service and/or recall campaigns
to the customer via periodic all devices with Wi-Fi connection
on Uconnect™ system display.
e-mails. This service is provided (smartphones, tablets, laptops)
You can contact FCA Customer
on condition that the Customer (supported technologies: 3G – 4G).
Service for further information
has previously provided the This creates a private Wi-Fi internet
regarding the messages received.

304
access point in the car. The function, My Theft Assistance: optional software are updated remotely in order
available only with the ignition device service with app and web notifications to provide the customer with newer
to motor or with the motor running in case of suspected theft attempts software versions that include new
allows the connection of up to eight and assistance in case of theft. features or enhancements/enrichments
devices simultaneously, but not direct of features already offered.
DEACTIVATION OF
communication between devices. The Updates are made at the discretion of
GEOLOCATION MODE
quality of the service offered by the FCA.
(only for Uconnect™ 10.25")
integrated Wi-Fi Hotspot depends on Some system updates will be
the coverage of the mobile operator's If you wish to deactivate geolocation
managed automatically, others will be
network. Users with active data plan mode, simply do so from the
communicated to the Customer by
with the Wi-Fi Hotspot service can Uconnect™ system (see the
showing messages on the display
also use the radio-activated voice "Settings" menu of the Uconnect™
of the Uconnect™, allowing the
service on-board the vehicle to system for more details).
customer to confirm or postpone the
perform operations, such as checking When geolocation mode is deactivated
update itself.
the weather or news, playing music, some of the services on mobile apps
The customer will be notified by the
interacting with the navigation system and web that use the location of the
Uconnect™ system if the system is
and remotely controlling intelligent car will not be available.
unavailable.
devices in their home. To read more about services, features,
NOTE The hotspot name and WARNING The icon at the top of specifications, availability and any
password can only be changed with the Uconnect™ display indicates updates please always refer to the
the ignition device in motor position that the geolocation function is active content included in the official Fiat
and the system in "READY" state (the (ON). When geolocation is on, the website.
car is ready to go). car position is tracked to enable
You can enrich your Uconnect Services the functions that require it. When DEACTIVATING
experience by purchasing optional geolocation is off, the car position UCONNECT SERVICES
services for which a subscription is is only tracked by the navigation, If you sell your car on which the
required. safety, insurance and driver assistance Uconnect Services are still active, you
The services can be subscribed to systems (where provided). See the will be responsible for logging off your
independently by the customer from Uconnect™ system "Settings" chapter profile from the services on the page on
the catalogue of services available for to deactivate the function. the official Fiat website, by contacting
the car, directly on the personal page the Customer Care or by going to a
of the official Fiat website. UPDATING THE SYSTEM Fiat Dealership.
Uconnect Services and the You will also be responsible for
Uconnect™ system application informing the new owner of any

305
 services which have not yet expired Radio frequency devices

MULTIMEDIA
associated with a new Uconnect
Services account. All radio frequency devices comply with
the regulations in force in the countries
in which they are sold.
WARNING For further information go
to www.mopar.eu/owner or
260) Always follow the highway code of http://aftersales.fiat.com/elum.
the country in which you are driving, and
concentrate on the road. Always drive
safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. Only use the Uconnect™ system
functions when you are sure that it is safe
to do so. The customer is liable for all risks
associated with using the functions and
applications of the car. Failure to follow
these rules may cause serious accidents
and/or death.

OFFICIAL TYPE
APPROVALS
Radio devices

The radio equipment supplied with

the vehicle complies with Directive
2014/53/EU, UA.RED.TR and
the French SAR Decree Law of
15/11/2019. For more information
about certifications and open
source lists available for in-car
components use the following:
http://aftersales.fiat.com/elum/

306
NOTES
CONTENTS Bodywork (warranty) . . . . . . . . . . 248 Connected Services - Uconnect
12V battery Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Controls
inspecting the charge . . . . . . . 243 Boot courtesy light . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Summary table of display
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Brakes Cooling system fluid . . . . . . . . . . 240
A BS (system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Cornering lights (light
Active safety systems . . . . . . . . . 100 activation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Adaptive Cruise Control with Follow Correct reading of the rim
to Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Car inactivity............ .. 247 code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Adaptive Cruise Control with Carrying children safely . . . . . . .. 118 Correct reading of the tyre . . . . . . 262
Stop&Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Charge cable emergency Courtesy lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Adjusting the headlights unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Cup / can holders . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Charging equipment . . . . . . . . . . 178
Alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 D ashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Charging functions . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Alternating current (AC) charging at Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . 37
Charging mode 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Dead Lock (device) . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Charging modes . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Demanding use of the car . . . . . . 236
Charging procedure from public
ASSIST call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
charging station (AC) . . . . . . . 201
Automatic dual-zone climate control Direction indicators (activation) . . . . 37
Chassis marking . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Disabling active safety
Checking levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Autonomous Emergency Brake systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Child restraint systems . . . . . . . . 118
Control (system) . . . . . . . . . . 104 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Autonomous Emergency Brake Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Control system . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Climate control system . . . . . . . . . 46
Driving assistance systems . . . . . 104
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Battery ............ ... . . . 257
Co-Driver system with Follow to
Driving on slippery roads . . . . . . . 176
Blind Spot Assist (system) ... . . . 104 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 145
Blind Spot Assist system . ... . . . 104 Co-Driver system with DTC (system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Bodywork (cleaning and Stop&Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 145 Dusk sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
maintenance) . . . . . . ... . . . 248 eCoasting mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
 Electric handle (Soft Touch) . . . . . . 66 Hold 'n' Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

CONTENTS
Occupant protection
Electric steering wheel heating . . . . 35 HSA (system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 I dentification data Official type approvals . . . . . . . . . 306
Electronic Cruise Control . . . . . . . 143 body paint identification One-Pedal Driving . . . . . . . . . . . 207
ERM (system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
ESC (system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 VIN plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Extending the boot . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Ignition device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Paintwork (maintenance) . . . . . . 248
External lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 In case of accident . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
FIAT Link & Drive ........... 277 Instrument panel features . . . . . . . 75 ParkView (rear camera) . . . . . . . . 175
Controls behind the steering Intelligent Speed Assist . . . . . . . . 174 Passenger compartment air
wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Interior fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 diffusers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . 279 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Passive Entry (system) . . . . . . . . . 27
Fix&Go kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Interiors (cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . 251 PBA (system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Fixed glass sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . 59 ISOFIX child restraint system Performance (top speed) . . . . . . . 274
Flashing (activation) . . . . . . . . . . . 37 (installation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Fog lights / rear fog light . . . . . . . . 37 iTPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring Power sources that can be
Follow Me Home (device) . . . . . . . 37 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 J ump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Pre-tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Front ceiling light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Lane change function . . . . . . . . . . 37 Quick domestic charging
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 procedure from the wallbox
Fuses (replacement) . . . . . . . . . . 222
M ain beam headlights charging station . . . . . . . . . . . 200
(activation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Grab handle ............... . 68 Manual climate control system . . . . 46 R aising the car ......... . . . . 246
Handbrake ........... .... 140 Motor Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Hazard warning lights . . . . . .... 210 technical specifications . . . . . . 256 Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . .... . 35 Motor compartment Rear window washer (jets) . . . . . . 244
(washing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Rear window wiper / washer . . . . . 42
Headlight alignment corrector ... . 37
Motor marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Rear-view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Headlights (washing) . . . . . .... 248
High-voltage battery . . . . . . .... . 17 RED special series . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . 24 Wireless charging system –
Regular checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 WCPM (Wireless Charge Pad
Replacing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . 68 Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Replacing an exterior bulb . . . . . . 217
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Replacing the windscreen/rear Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
window wiper blades . . . . . . . 244 Supplementary Restraint System
Rim Protector (tyres) . . . . . . . . . . 262 (SRS) - Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Rims and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Roof rack/ski rack . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 T C (system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Rubber hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Technical specifications . . . . . . . 254
SBR system ........... . . . . 115 The keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Scheduled servicing . . . . . . . . . . 236 Towing the car . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Traffic Sign Recognition . . . . . . . 172
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Sentry Key (system) . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Transporting animals . . . . . . . . . 176
Service Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Transporting passengers . . . . . . . 176
Side bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Tyres (inflation pressure) . . . . . . . 262
Side bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Uconnect™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Side Distance Warning
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Warning lights on panel . . . . . . . . 84
Side/tail lights / dipped beam Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
headlights (activation) . . . . . . . . 37 Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Window bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Snow tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Windows (cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . 248
Soft top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Windscreen washer (jets) . . . . . . . 244
Space-saver wheel . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Windscreen wiper / washer . . . . . . 42
Spark plugs (type) . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Windscreen/rear window washer
Speed Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
FCA Italy S.p.A. - MOPAR - Technical Service Operations - Service Library
Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 3 - 10040 Volvera - Torino (Italy)
Print no. 603.85.432 - 08/2021 - 1st Edition
Printed on recycled paper